JP2020120840A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for enhancing interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 includes traveling accessory performance means that uses a traveling accessory derivable to a position visually recognizable from a player side and can derive a traveling accessory performance for performing a predetermined suggestion or teaching by behavior of the traveling accessory. The traveling accessory performance means includes a traveling accessory travel area in which a traveling accessory is configured so as to be capable of traveling on the basis of mechanical energy, and allows at least one portion of the traveling accessory that travels from a starting point to an ending point of the traveling accessory travel area to be visible in the traveling accessory performance. The traveling accessory travel area includes a first traveling accessory travel area and a second traveling accessory travel area. Stopgap performance means capable of executing a stopgap performance for deriving a virtual traveling mode of a traveling accessory between the first traveling accessory travel area and the second traveling accessory travel area is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. A variable display for that is displayed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-27480 A

By the way, in the pachinko machine provided with the variable display means, many players proceed with the game just by continuing to look at the variable display means. Therefore, there is a concern that the user may get bored sooner.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention,
At a position visible from the player side, a first effect means for performing a first effect and a second effect means for effecting a second effect are provided,
Between the first effect means and the second effect means, there is provided a connecting effect means capable of executing a effect that connects the first effect and the second effect.

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a spinning drum type gaming machine.

According to the present invention, interest can be improved.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where the inner frame and the front frame set were opened. It is a front view showing a configuration of an inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state where an inner frame, a back pack unit, and the like are opened. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric constitutions of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows hit/miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows reach judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a firing permission command setting process. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart showing a variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation|variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flow chart showing a starting winning device control process. It is a flow chart which shows reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payment control device. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determination of a decorative design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information storage processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation stop process. It is a front view showing a decorative symbol display device and a pseudo sphere effect device. It is a front view of a pseudo ball production device. It is a perspective view of a pseudo sphere effect device. It is a perspective view of a pseudo sphere effect device. It is a front view showing the visual recognition mode of a decorative pattern display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows a guidance display. It is explanatory drawing which shows a guidance display. It is explanatory drawing which shows a guidance display. It is explanatory drawing which shows a guidance display. It is an explanatory view showing a pseudo sphere effect (transfer effect). It is explanatory drawing which shows a connection production (handover production). It is an explanatory view showing a pseudo sphere effect (transfer effect). It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flow chart which shows succession effect execution processing. It is a schematic cross section which shows the pseudo sphere production apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the storage member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic side view which shows the mechanism which conveys the pseudo sphere in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure which derives|leads-out the pseudo|simulation sphere of the same color in order of an upper movement type accessory movement area -> a lower movement type accessory movement area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure which derives|leads out the pseudo-sphere of a different color in order of an upper movement type accessory movement area -> a lower movement type accessory movement area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure which derives|leads out the pseudosphere of a different color in order of a lower movement type accessory movement area -> an upper movement type accessory movement area. It is a schematic front view showing a variable display device unit (decorative symbol display device and specific winning unit) in the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transfer effect in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transfer effect in another embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the production error processing in another execution form.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side portion of the outer frame 11 includes an inner frame as a game board mounting frame. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. Note that in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, the game members (such as nails and accessories) arranged on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper side frame forming part 11a and a lower side frame forming part 11b made of a wooden plate material, and a left side frame forming part 11c and a right side frame forming part 11d made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is made of a material and is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, and thereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame forming portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 protruding toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the width direction rear end portion thereof. The extension wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12 from the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5 ). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extension wall 83. The lower receiving portion 85 is provided with a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, and projects toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed on the inner surface of the top of the curtain plate ornament 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening/closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be supported so as to be directly openable to the outer frame 11 rather than via the inner frame 12.

Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower plate 15 is provided in the center of the lower portion, and game balls paid out from the lower payout outlet 16 are stored in the lower plate 15. It is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a ball removing lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") as an operating unit (launching operating unit) projecting to the front side. It should be noted that the handle 18 is provided with a rotatable operation body 18a that is provided so as to be rotatable. A variable resistor for detecting the manipulated variable is provided. Then, when the handle 18 is turned clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 with a strength corresponding to the amount of turning operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the stop lever 18b is pressed, the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to perform the turning operation of the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while the handle 18 is held.

As shown in FIG. 2, above the lower plate 15, an upper plate 19 capable of storing the game balls paid out from the upper payout outlet 17 is provided. Further, the upper plate 19 is arranged to guide the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 (once) to a launching device 60 as a launching means, which will be described later while aligning the game balls in a line. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the lower payment outlet 16 described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the lending switch 121 is operated with a game card having a balance inserted (inserted) into a CR unit arranged on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, in response to the operation The rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated to return the card or the like inserted in the CR unit. In addition, the balance display unit 124 displays how much balance the card inserted in the CR unit has.

Further, a ball removing button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be retractable from the upper surface of the upper plate 19, and is always urged by the urging means (not shown) to the side protruding upward from the upper surface of the upper plate 19. By pressing the ball removal button 123, the space between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 are guided to the lower plate 15. .. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removing button 123.

In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, an operation means, a production button 125 as a production operation means, and a cross button 126 are provided. The effect button 125 has a built-in LED whose emission color can be changed as appropriate, and by pressing the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, the display on the decorative pattern display device 42 described later is switched or a predetermined selection is made. Make decisions about matters.

Further, a light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the game state. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein is provided. Further, on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided. It should be noted that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104, corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. ..

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are separately attached in front and back, but has a round shape as a whole and is assembled and then attached.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 at the rear side of the window hole 39 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

In addition, a lower portion of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39, is provided with a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60. There is. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launching device is adopted as the launching device 60. Furthermore, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device for guiding the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by the drive of the built-in driving means (for example, solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. On the game board 30, a general winning device 31, a variable winning device 32 as a variable winning means, a starting winning means, a first starting winning device 33a and a second starting winning device 33b as a specifying means, a through gate 34, a variable. A display device unit 35 and the like are arranged. As is well known, the game ball launched by the launching device 60 is guided to the front side of the game board 30, that is, the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137, and the game ball is When winning (winning) various winning holes of the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, etc., the number of winning balls detected by various detection switches and corresponding to the various winning holes are given to the upper plate 19 Alternatively, it is paid out to the lower plate 15.

In the present embodiment, three balls are entered in the starting winning apparatuses 33a and 33b, ten balls are entered in the general winning apparatus 31, and a ball is entered in the variable winning apparatus 32. If there is, 15 game balls are paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 where the game ball only passes (is not discharged to the rear surface side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. In addition, while the first start winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured such that game balls moving in the game area are always enterable (passable), The starting winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change their state between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and game balls that have not won various winning outlets such as the general winning device 31 will have the outlet 36 open. It is discharged through the game area. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are arranged. ing.

In addition, the game board 30 of the present embodiment is made of a transparent resin such as acrylic resin or polycarbonate. Further, the printing is directly performed on the front surface or the rear surface of the game board 30 (a sticker is attached), a decorative accessory is installed behind the game board 30, and the window hole 39 is formed. Decoration and the like are performed on the inner peripheral side (the visible range of the game board 30).

The variable display device unit 35 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area. The variable display device unit 35 includes a decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later in detail, and a center frame 47 provided so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42, and a game ball enters the inner peripheral side of the center frame 47. It is configured not to.

A first starting winning device 33a is provided below the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a projects forward from the front part of the game board 30, and a winning opening (starting winning opening) in which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. It should be noted that the first starting prize device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening/closing member that changes the ease with which the game balls enter the first starting prize device 33a.

A second starting winning device 33b is arranged below the first starting winning device 33a. The second starting winning device 33b is adjacent to the winning opening (starting winning opening) of the second starting winning device 33b into which the game ball can enter, and is provided with a pair of blade members 37 rotatably displaceable. Equipped with. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tip end portion of the blade member 37 and the first starting winning device 33a, The second start winning device 33b is in a closed state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball. On the other hand, by changing the blade member 37 to the open position that opens to the outside, a gap through which the game ball passes is secured between the blade member 37 and the first starting winning device 33a, and the second starting winning device 33b plays the game. While the ball is allowed to enter, the game ball that moves laterally of the second starting prize device 33b by the blade member 37 is guided to the starting winning opening of the second starting prize device 33b, and is in an open state.

As will be described later in detail, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are the first as a condition establishment detecting means, a starting winning detecting means, and a specific detecting means for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. A start prize switch 224a and a second start prize switch 224b are provided. When a game ball is detected by the start winning award switches 224a and 224b, a winning/winning lottery or the like as to whether or not to generate a jackpot state as a special game state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is performed, and will be described later. The special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 are configured to perform variable display. Then, when the player wins in the winning/unwinning lottery, the jackpot state is given.

The variable winning device 32 is provided below the second starting winning device 33b. The variable winning device 32 has a big winning opening that communicates with the rear of the game board 30, a shutter that opens and closes the big winning opening, a big winning opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a game ball that has entered the big winning opening. The variable winning a prize device 32 (big winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state by including a count switch 223 for detecting and drivingly controlling a big winning opening solenoid and opening and closing a shutter.

The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot enter, and in the jackpot state, the game balls are in an open state in which the game balls can be won. In addition, in the special winning shutter of the variable winning device 32 of the present embodiment, the lower edge of the large winning shutter is rotatably supported along the lower edge of the special winning opening, and the variable winning device 32 is closed. In the state, the special winning shutter extends vertically to close the special winning opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the special winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the variable winning device 32, the special winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is slightly inclined rearward), and the game ball flows down in front of the special winning opening. Is received on the back surface (upper surface) of the special winning shutter and is guided to the special winning opening.

Of the game area (when the game board 30 is viewed from the front of the game machine 10), the area located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 (hereinafter referred to as “left side area”) and the variable display device unit 35. A through gate 34 is arranged in a region located on the right side (hereinafter, referred to as “right side region”). The through gate 34 is configured such that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described later in detail, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) as to whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the ordinary symbol display device 41 is also provided. At, a variable display is provided to teach the result of the entry support lottery. When the winning support lottery is won, the second starting winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the win/loss lottery, and a "high probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the win/loss lottery. Further, the blade member 37 of the second starting winning device 33b is relatively frequently opened, and the "high winning state" as the second winning state in which the game ball can be easily entered into the second starting winning device 33c, There is a "low ball entry state" as the first ball entry state in which the time period in which the blade member 37 is opened is reduced compared to the high ball entry state. Hereinafter, the low probability state and low entry state is referred to as "normal mode", the low probability state and high entry state is referred to as "time reduction mode", and the high probability state and high entry state A certain state is called "probability variation mode". It should be noted that the high probability state and the low ball entry state (latent probability mode) may be set.

In addition, as the high-ball entry state, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low-ball entry state, (2) one opening time of the second starting prize device 33b ( (Regulated time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second starting prize device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times of opening the second starting winning device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is higher than that in the low ball entry state, (5) Winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is lower than in the low ball entry state There is also a high state. The high-ball entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), (4), and (5). Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high entry state”. .. As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to frequently win the second starting winning device 33b, the number of times the winning/winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the probability variation mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode does not require the big hit state, the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern. When the variable display on the display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) set in advance, the display is finished and the normal mode is entered.

Further, as the jackpot types of the present embodiment, 10 round certainty variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as “10RS”), 10 round regular jackpots (hereinafter referred to as “10RN”), and four rounds probability variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as “4RS”). ) There is. The variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or 10 game balls are entered into the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened, which is regarded as one round, and is “10RS”, “10RN”. , It is repeated 10 times, and for “4RS”, it is repeated 4 times before the jackpot state ends. In addition, a "probability variation mode" is given after the jackpot state of "10RS" and "4RS" is finished, and a "time shortening mode" (in this example, 100 variations display) is given after the jackpot state of "10RN" is finished. To be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the "small hit" is won in the win/loss lottery based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b. When a small hit is made in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 1.8 seconds (once) as a small hit state. In addition, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs.

In addition, adjacent to the upper right portion of the substantially oval game area, a variable display for teaching the result of the winning/winning lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a Means, a first special display device 43a as a variable display means, and a special display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the winning/winning lottery that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b. The second special display device 43b as the variable display means and the special display devices 43a and 43b correspond to the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b during the variable display. The result of the ball entry support lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 and the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b as a hold display means indicating that the variable display is held and stored. Normal symbol display device 41 as a normal display means for performing variable display for teaching, and if there is a passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 during the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41, it corresponds to the passage. A normal hold display device 44 that indicates that the variable display is stored and stored is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 will be described later. The display is directly controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means.

The first special display device 43a includes four LEDs (first special figure lamp). Then, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize device 33a, the first special display device 43a is configured to perform a switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp.

The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special figure lamp). Then, when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, a switching display (variation display) of the second special figure lamp is performed on the second special display device 43b.

Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the winning/winning lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (combination of the special map lamps that are lit) is associated with various results of the winning/losing lottery, and the winning mode is determined by the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped. The result of the lottery, that is, "big hit", "small hit", or "miss" is definitely displayed.

Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, “10RS”, “10RN”, and “4RS” Which is also taught. In addition, there are a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that respectively teach that various types of big hits, small hits, and out of place, and there are a plurality of stop modes, and one of them is selected. Is displayed and stopped.

In the present embodiment, there is no possibility of winning the “small hit” in the win/loss lottery, which is carried out when the game ball is entered into the first starting winning device 33a, but there is a possibility of winning. You may comprise. Further, it is possible to configure so that there is no possibility of winning the "small hit" in the winning/winning lottery, which is carried out when the game balls are entered into the second starting winning device 33b.

Further, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next variable display can be started after the specified time has elapsed (after the fluctuation interval). Has been done. Furthermore, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, if the next variable display is not performed even after the stipulated time, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b. The special display device 43b is configured to be switched from a lighting mode showing the result of the win/win lottery to a lighting mode showing a standby state in which no variable display is performed. The lighting mode showing the result of the win/no win lot may be maintained as it is.

Each of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b includes two LEDs (first hold lamp, second hold lamp). In the present embodiment, variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "first variable display") based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning a prize device 33a is configured to be held and stored up to four times. Furthermore, the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second variable display") based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize-winning device 33b is also configured such that it can be stored up to four times.

Further, for example, when the first fluctuation display is held once, the first holding lamp on the left side (inside of the game area) is turned on, and when the first fluctuation display is held twice , When the first hold lamps on the left and right are turned on and the first variation display is held for three times, the first hold lamp on the left blinks and the first hold lamp on the right turns on, and the first variation When the display is held for four times, the left and right first holding lamps blink. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning device 33a, 33b during the big hit state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

In this embodiment, the suspended variable displays are basically consumed in the suspended order, but when both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended, the second variable display is suspended. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second starting prize device 33b has not been exhausted, the first variation display triggered by the ball of the first starting winning device 33a is displayed. There is no configuration. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp is lit, a game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, and when one second holding lamp is lit, the first variation display is postponed, The second variable display is performed first. However, when the second variable display is held and stored during the change of the first variable display, the second variable display is performed after the changing first display.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (universal figure lamps). Then, in the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the general symbol lamp on the right side (outer peripheral side of the game area) is blinked (variably displayed). There is. Also, after the variable display is displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the entry support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (combination of lit public figure lamps) and the various results of the entry support lottery are associated with each other, and the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped is changed. , The result of the ball entry support lottery is definitely displayed. For example, both the right and left universal figure lamps are turned on to indicate "winning", and only the left side universal figure lamps are turned on to indicate "off."

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, which is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34, can be reserved and stored up to four times. For example, when the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inside of the game area) is turned on, and when held for two times, the left and right normal When the hold lamp is lit and is held for three times, the left ordinary hold lamp blinks, and when the right ordinary hold lamp is lit and held for four times, the left and right ordinary hold lamps are Flashes. When a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the big hit state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with an effect display unit configured by a liquid crystal display device and capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a variable display unit. The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to variably display the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, by the sub-control device 262, based on the command from the main control device 261, so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The auxiliary display content is determined, and the display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display regions of upper, middle, and lower (upper symbol display region, middle symbol display region, lower symbol display region), and a plurality of types of decoration in each symbol display region. Designs (for example, numerical designs with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in order for each design display area (for example, upper design display area → lower design display area → middle design display The decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state (in the order of the areas). For example, when the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed in the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first or second special display device 43a, 43b, and a decorative symbol is a jackpot on the decorative symbol display device 42. It is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to (for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area), and the big hit state Is started.

Further, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous stage, for example, the same decorative design is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper design display region and the lower design display region. Will be done. In this way, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the state where the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the "reach state". .. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean a big hit, and there is also a case where it goes off.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. When it is performed (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of an odd-numbered doublet, either "10RS" or "4RS" occurs, and in the case of an even-numbered doublet, "10RS", "4RS", or "10RN" is generated. Either happens.

Also, the combination of decorative patterns other than the doublet basically teaches "out", but when it is "small hit", the decorative pattern is not a doublet, but a specific pattern on the activated line. It is designed to be stopped and displayed in combination (combination of chance patterns, so-called chance). In the present embodiment, for example, a mode in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas is a combination of chance symbols.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages (different backgrounds, etc.) are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, a “probability stage” that confirms that you are staying in the probability mode, a “normal stage” that confirms that you are in the normal mode, and either a time saving mode or a probability mode. There is a "pullback stage" where you are staying. That is, when "4RS" is won, the "probability variation stage" is entered after the jackpot state is completed. In addition, when "10 RN" is won, the process shifts to the "pullback stage" after the jackpot state ends, and when the variable display is performed 100 times in the pullback stage, it shifts to the "normal stage". In addition, when winning the “10RS”, after the jackpot is over, the process shifts to either the “probability variation stage” or the “pullback stage”.

In other words, if "10RN" is won in the probability variation mode, the time reduction mode is sandwiched and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this respect, even when "10RS" is won in the probability variation mode, the same effect as in the case of "10RN" can be derived in the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like (for example, "10RS" is won in the probability variation mode). With a probability of 1/15 of the case, the teaching that the probability variation mode is given is not performed and the teaching that the probability variation mode is not performed may be performed). However, it is possible to have the expectation that it is actually the probability variation mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display performed based on the entry of the game balls into the starting winning devices 33a, 33b is suspended (having the right to execute the variable display) is a decorative design. The display device 42 is also taught. As shown in FIG. 43, in the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 42, a hold display area 462 for displaying a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is provided. The hold icon 461 of the present embodiment is a figure imitating a "gaming ball". The hold display area 462 can display up to four hold icons 461 corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold areas of the hold information storage areas (first and second hold information storage areas). The hold icons 461 are displayed side by side, and the hold icon 461 located on the left side corresponds to the variable display that is consumed first.

In this embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the hold information stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area is not displayed in the hold display area 462. Further, even when there are five or more holding memories in total including the first variable display and the second variable display, the number of holding icons 461 displayed in the holding display area 462 is four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the first variable display and the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second variable display are in a common mode, and if the hold icon 461 is visually recognized, the first icon is displayed. It is impossible to identify which of the hold icon 461 corresponding to the variable display or the second variable display. Further, the hold icon 461 may be derived based on the information stored in the storage area of the hold information storage area in a mode that suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the corresponding variable display. A plurality of types of hold icons 461 of such an aspect are prepared, and a pattern (type) of the hold icons 461 is associated with a winning expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) for occurrence of a jackpot state. In the present embodiment, in addition to the default silver (gray) sphere, blue and red spheres can be displayed as the hold icon 461. Basically, in the order of silver (gray)→blue→red, the jackpot expectation Is being increased. In addition, the pattern of the hold icon 461 may change (the hold change effect is derived) from the time the hold icon 461 is derived until the time when the variable display corresponding to the hold icon 461 is exhausted. ..

Now, as shown in FIG. 4, the variable display device unit 35 of the present embodiment is provided at the center position of the upper side of the center frame 47, and the sub display device 48 constituted by a liquid crystal display device and the decorative pattern display device 42. It is provided with a movable accessory production means provided so as to project from the rear surface side to the side and downward, and a pseudo-ball production device 49 as a transfer production means (pseudo-sphere production means).

In the sub-display device 48 of the present embodiment, the display section has a substantially circular shape in front view. Further, on both sides of the sub display device 48, a pair of left and right light emitting effect parts 47a that extend along the upper side of the variable display device unit 35 (center frame 47) and have built-in LEDs are provided. Inside each of the light emitting effect units 47a, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side along the extending direction of the light emitting effect units 47a (upper side of the center frame 47), and the lighting is individually controllable. In the present embodiment, when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the sub display device 48 and the display portion of the decorative pattern display device 42 are vertically arranged close to each other. Further, each light emitting effect part 47a is connected to the sub display device 48 and extends to both side parts (or the vicinity thereof) of the variable display device unit 35 (center frame 47).

Now, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 39 to 42, the pseudo sphere effect device 49 includes a left unit 401, a right unit 402, and a lower unit 403. Each of the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 is a movable role moving area in which a pseudo sphere FB (see FIG. 39 etc.) as a mobile role is movable based on mechanical energy. It is provided with 404 (pseudo-sphere moving area). Then, a "pseudo-sphere effect" as a mobile accessory effect producing means for giving a predetermined (for example, whether or not it is a big hit) suggestion or teaching is given according to the behavior of the pseudo-sphere FB moving in the mobile accessory moving area 404. It is like this. Further, the pseudo ball FB (diameter) is configured to be slightly larger (for example, about 1 mm) than the game ball, and is relatively easy to see. The size of the pseudo sphere FB may be changed according to the color (expansion color, contraction color) of the pseudo sphere FB.

The left unit 401 and the right unit 402 have basically the same configuration (they are arranged facing each other and vertically upside down, and the mounting positions of some members (starting solenoid 413 described later) are changed. The parts used are the same). Further, in the present embodiment, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 are attached to the rear surface side of the game board 30 (attachable individually), but the left unit 401, the right unit A mounting plate to which the lower unit 403 and the lower unit 403 can be mounted is provided, and the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 which are mounted and positioned on the mounting plate are collectively mounted on the rear surface side of the game board 30. It may be configured as described above (attachable to the mounting plate individually). Further, each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 corresponds to a mobile accessory moving area unit.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the left unit 401 includes a main body 405 having a substantially rectangular tubular shape that extends vertically, and a production passage member 406 that is substantially U-shaped and has both ends connected to the main body 405. A storage member that is configured to be slidable along the longitudinal direction of the main body 405 in a state of being housed inside the main body 405 and also as a mobile accessory storage means that stores an unused pseudo sphere FB. And 408.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the effect passage member 406 is a passage (hereinafter, referred to as a “connecting passage 406a”) that allows the pseudo sphere FB to pass between an upper end portion and a lower end portion that are connected to the main body portion 405. Called). The production passage member 406 is made of a transparent material, and is arranged behind the transparent game board 30 so as to project laterally beyond the side portions of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the center frame 47. From the front of the pachinko machine 10, the pseudo sphere FB moving in the connection passage 406a can be visually recognized through the game board 30. That is, the pseudo sphere effect is performed by visually recognizing the appearance of the pseudo sphere FB moving from the upper end of the pair of end portions of the effect passage member 406 to the lower end thereof. I have decided. In the present embodiment, the vicinity of both ends of the effect passage member 406 is arranged behind the decorative symbol display device 42, and the main body portion 405 and the like connected to the end of the effect passage member 406 are also decorative symbols. It is arranged behind the display device 42 and is invisible (or difficult) from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 40, the storage member 408 of the present embodiment is opened to one side and has a vertically long rectangular box shape so that the inner space is vertically divided into four stages. It has four storage rooms 408. Each storage room 408 is configured to be able to store one pseudo sphere FB, and in this embodiment, which storage room 408 stores which type of pseudo sphere FB is associated. .. In the present embodiment, a silver (gray) pseudo sphere FB is housed in each of the top storage room 408 and the second storage room 408 from the top, and a blue pseudo sphere is stored in the third storage room 408 from the top. The FB is housed, and the red pseudo-sphere FB is housed in the fourth (bottom) storage room 408 from the top. The pair of silver-colored pseudo spheres FB are basically used alternately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, a rack-shaped portion 409 having a vertically extending sawtooth portion is connected to the side surface of the storage member 408. As shown in FIG. 42, a pinion member 410 is meshed with the serrated portion of the rack-shaped portion 409, and is constituted by a stepping motor that is connected (either directly or indirectly) to the pinion member 410. It is configured to be slidable up and down based on the driving of the pseudo-ball production motor 411. The pseudo sphere effect motor 411 is drive-controlled by the sub controller 262. That is, for example, the rack-shaped portion 409 is provided with a special-shaped portion, and a sensor capable of discriminating the passage of the special-shaped portion is provided so that the height position of the rack-shaped portion 409, and by extension, the storage member 408 can be grasped and determined. The height position of the storage member 408 is adjusted and controlled according to the contents. It should be noted that the storage member 408 is arranged at the upper limit position or the lower limit position when the pseudo sphere effect is not performed or when the power is turned on, and the position information of the storage member 408 is initialized. Further, in the present embodiment, the rack-shaped portion 409, the pinion member 410, the pseudo sphere effect motor 411, and the sub control device 262 constitute a displacement means. The position of the storage member 408 may be grasped based on the rotation amount of the pseudo sphere effect motor 411 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 40 and the like, in this embodiment, one left unit 401 is provided with two effect passage members 406, and the effect passage members 406 are connected in a pair in the vertical direction to one main body portion 405. Has been done. On the other hand, the left unit 401 includes only one storage member 408 and one pseudo sphere effect motor 411. In the present embodiment, the sub control device 262 drives and controls the pseudo sphere effect motor 411 based on the position information of the storage member 408, and the position (height position) of each storage room 408 of the storage member 408 and each effect. The upper end position and the lower end position of the passage member 406 can be matched.

That is, when it is attempted to pass the blue pseudo sphere FB through the upper production passage member 406 of the pair of upper and lower production passage members 406 in the left unit 401, the height of the upper end portion of the upper production passage member 406 is increased. The height position and the height position of the third storage chamber 408 from the top of the storage member 408 are matched. On the other hand, the height position of the lower end portion of the effect passage member 406 used in the pseudo sphere effect, and the storage room in which the pseudo sphere FB used in the pseudo sphere effect was stored before being used in the pseudo sphere effect. By matching the height position of 408, the pseudo sphere FB used in the pseudo sphere effect is stored in the original storage room 408.

In the present embodiment, of the storage member 408, (the space of) the storage room 408 that is arranged side by side with the upper end portion of the effect passage member 406, the storage room 408 that is arranged side by side with the lower end portion of the effect passage member 406, and an effect. The movable accessory moving region 404 is configured by the connecting passage 406a of the passage member 406. That is, (the space of) the storage room 408 which is arranged side by side with the upper end of the effect passage member 406 corresponds to the start point of the movable accessory moving area 404, and the storage room 408 which is arranged side by side with the lower end of the effect passage member 406. The space () corresponds to the end point of the mobile accessory moving area 404.

It should be noted that the storage member 408 immediately after the pseudo sphere FB used in the pseudo sphere production is derived from the storage room 408 (based on the detection of the start point detection switch 415 described later), immediately below the lower end of the corresponding production passage member 406. The height position of the part and the height position of the storage room 408 from which the pseudo sphere FB is derived may be adjusted so as to be displaced. Further, basically, before the pseudo sphere FB derived from the storage room 408 reaches the lower end portion of the connection passage 406a of the effect passage member 406, the corresponding storage chamber 408 is connected to the connection passage 406a of the effect passage member 406. It is also possible to reach the lower end.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the storage member 408 is provided with an auxiliary plate portion 412 as a retaining means that projects downward or upward along the lower surface and the front side of the upper surface. There is. Therefore, even when the lowermost storage room 408 of the storage member 408 and the upper end of the predetermined effect passage member 406 are aligned with each other, the lower end of the predetermined effect passage member 406 (connecting passage 406a). At least a part of the portion can be closed by the auxiliary plate portion 412. Therefore, the pseudo sphere FB reaching the lower end portion of the effect passage member 406 (connection passage 406a) is discharged to the end point side of the movable type accessory moving area 404 where the storage member 408 is absent, and the pseudo sphere FB is stored. It is possible to avoid a situation where the data cannot be stored in 408.

Further, since the pseudo sphere FB is stored in the storage room 408 that stores the pseudo sphere FB that has not been used for the pseudo sphere effect, the pseudo sphere FB that has reached the lower end of the effect passage member 406 is stored in the corresponding storage room 408. Even if the height position of the lower end portion of the effect passage member 406 and the height position of the other storage room 408 coincide with each other when the storage member 408 is displaced to be stored in The pseudo sphere FB that has reached the lower end is not stored in the storage room 408.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, a starting solenoid 413 as a starting assisting means is provided at a position facing the upper end of each effect passage member 406 with the main body 405 interposed therebetween. Further, in each of the storage chambers 408 of the storage member 408, the wall portion on the side opposite to the opening side of the storage member 408 (the side of the effect passage member 406) penetrates the wall portion substantially at the center thereof. The extrusion hole 408a is provided.

The height position of the predetermined storage room 408 of the storage member 408 and the height position of the upper end portion of the predetermined effect passage member 406 are matched, and the starting solenoid 413 corresponding to the predetermined effect passage member 406 is illustrated. When the plunger is not projected, the plunger is inserted into the extrusion hole 408a of the predetermined storage chamber 408, and the pseudo sphere FB stored in the predetermined storage chamber 408 is pushed to the effect passage member 406 side. It is supposed to be released. The effect passage member 406 (connection path 406a) may have a portion that extends horizontally, or the effect passage member 406 is slightly open toward the end side (the distance between the pair of straight line portions). May have a substantially U-shape, and the connecting passage 406a may be inclined downward toward the downstream side at any part.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41 and the like, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the effect passage member 406 of the present embodiment are connected to the main body portion 405 via a sphere detection switch that detects passage of the pseudo sphere FB. There is. That is, the pseudo sphere FB is pushed to the upper end of the effect passage member 406 (connection passage 406a) by the sphere detection switch (hereinafter, referred to as “start point detection switch 415”) connected to the upper end of the effect passage member 406. It is possible to understand what has been done. Furthermore, the pseudo ball FB reaches the lower end of the effect passage member 406 by a sphere detection switch (hereinafter, referred to as “end point detection switch 416”) as an end point detecting means connected to the lower end of the effect passage member 406. It is possible to grasp that.

As shown in FIG. 40 and the like, the right unit 402 is basically the same as the left unit 401 installed upside down, and the start solenoid 413 is turned upside down as the effect passage member 406 is turned upside down. Is attached corresponding to the upper end of the effect passage member 406. With respect to the right unit 402 as well, the upper end of the effect passage member 406 is used as the starting point of the movable accessory moving region 404, and electrical wiring is performed in the same manner as in the left unit 401, thereby functioning similarly to the left unit 401 ( Operation).

Further, as shown in FIG. 39 and the like, in the present embodiment, the upper side portion of the upper effect passage member 406 of the left unit 401 is located below the upper edge portion of the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 4, the upper end of the effect passage member 406 on the upper side of the left unit 401 partially overlaps with the lower end of the left light effect producing unit 47a. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the lower side portion of the upper effect passage member 406 of the left unit 401 is at substantially the same height position as the upper side portion of the upper effect passage member 406 of the right unit 402, and the right unit The lower part of the effect passage member 406 on the upper side of 402 and the upper part of the effect passage member 406 on the lower side of the left unit 401 are at substantially the same height position, and the effect passage member 406 on the lower side of the left unit 401. The lower side portion of the right unit 402 and the upper side of the upper production passage member 406 of the right unit 402 are at the same height position, and the lower side of the lower production passage member 406 of the right unit 402 is a decorative symbol display device. It is located above the lower edge of the display portion 42. Hereinafter, the upper direction production passage member 406 of the left unit 401 is also referred to as “first production passage 421”, the upper production passage member 406 of the right unit 402 is also referred to as “second production passage 422”, and the lower side of the left unit 401. The production passage member 406 is also referred to as a “third production passage 423”, and the production passage member 406 below the right unit 402 is also referred to as a “fourth production passage 424”.

In the present embodiment, the types of the pseudo spheres FB stored in the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are the same combination, but different combinations (for example, the right unit 402 includes silver and green). , Red and gold pseudo spheres FB are stored one by one). Further, in FIG. 39, the pseudo-sphere production motor 411 is provided so as to project to the side more than the left and right side portions of the decorative pattern display device 42, but the pseudo-sphere production motor 411 is a decorative plate (not shown). Is arranged behind (the effect passage member 406 is arranged in front of such a decorative plate), so that it is not visible from the front.

In the present embodiment, the connection passage 406a of the upper production passage member 406 and the upper end portion of the upper production passage member 406 of the production passage members 406 provided in a pair in each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402. , And the storage room 408 (the space thereof) of the storage member 408 which is arranged side by side with the lower end portion, constitutes a first movable type accessory movement area (of means C described later), and the lower effect passage member 406. Second movement (of the means C described later) by the connecting passage 406a of the above, the upper end portion of the lower effect passage member 406, and the storage chamber 408 (the space) of the storage member 408 that is arranged side by side with the lower end portion. A formula accessory moving area is configured. Further, the storage member 408 that slides up and down, the rack-shaped portion 409 that displaces the storage member 408, the pinion member 410, the pseudo-ball effect motor 411, and the sub-control device 262 are used to prepare and store auxiliary means. Is configured. Further, in the means A-3 and the like, the left unit 401 corresponds to the first movable type accessory movement region, and the right unit 402 corresponds to the second movable role movement region.

As shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, etc., the lower unit 403 is a lower unit capable of individually storing the silver (gray), blue, and red pseudo spheres FB and appropriately taking out the selected type of the pseudo spheres FB. A storage unit 431, a push-up device 432 provided on both sides of the lower unit storage unit 431 and extending up and down, and a pseudo sphere provided below the lower unit storage unit 431 and discharged from the lower unit storage unit 431. The distribution member 433 is provided for guiding the FB to one of the pair of lifting devices 432.

The lower unit storage unit 431 of the present embodiment is arranged behind the decorative pattern display device 42 (see FIG. 39) and is invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The first communication passage 434 that guides the pseudo sphere FB derived from the lower unit storage portion 431 to the distribution member 433 is at least lower than the decorative pattern display device 42 and is visible from the front. It is made of a semitransparent material that makes it difficult to distinguish the color of the passing pseudo sphere FB. It should be noted that the first communication passage 434 only needs to be configured such that the pseudo spheres FB passing through the first communication passage 434 are relatively difficult to visually recognize, and the relatively narrow visible range is scattered and the reflectance is high. It may be configured such that it is composed of a material to which a material is added, or is colored in a psychedelic tone.

As shown in FIG. 40, the distribution member 433 has an inlet 435 that receives the pseudo sphere FB derived from the lower unit storage 431 and a left that guides the pseudo sphere FB that has flowed into the inlet 435 to the left-side pushing device 432 side. A guide portion 436, a right guide portion 437 that guides the pseudo sphere FB that has flowed into the entrance 435 to the right-side pushing device 432 side, a left guide portion 436, and a branching device 438 provided at a branch point of the right guide portion 437. And are housed in an opaque case body 439 (see FIG. 41, etc.). The branching device 438 of the present embodiment is drive-controlled by the sub control device 262 and guides the pseudo sphere FB to the selected one of the left guide portion 436 and the right guide portion 437.

As shown in FIG. 40, FIG. 41, etc., the second communication passages for guiding the pseudo spheres FB derived from the left guide part 436 and the right guide part 437 of the distribution member 433 to the pair of left and right lifting devices 432, respectively. 440 is made of an opaque material.

As shown in FIG. 40, the lifting device 432 includes a vertically extending cylindrical body 441, a vertically extending rod-shaped rotating shaft provided inside the cylindrical body 441, and a spiral-shaped portion provided on the outer periphery of the rotating shaft. And a rotatable spiral rotor 442. A gap is formed between the inner surface of the cylindrical body 441 and the spiral rotating body 442, and an inner surface of the cylindrical body 441 is provided with a protrusion (not shown) that extends vertically. The second connecting passage 440 is connected to the lower end of the cylindrical body 441, and the pseudo sphere FB flowing into the lower portion of the cylindrical body 441 through the second connecting passage 440 is attached to the inner surface of the cylindrical body 441 and the ridges. The spiral rotating body 442 pushes upward while making contact.

The cylindrical body 441 is semi-transparent from the lower end portion to the intermediate position in the up-down direction, and the visibility becomes lower as it approaches the lower end portion. Further, the upper part of the cylindrical body 441 from the intermediate position in the vertical direction is transparent, and the upper end of the cylindrical body 441 is arranged behind the decorative symbol display device 42 (see FIG. 39). A discharge port (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the upper end of the cylindrical body 441. As shown in FIGS. 40 and 42, the pseudo sphere FB discharged from the discharge port is guided to the lower unit storage section 431. The third communication passage 443 is made of an opaque material. Although not shown, the lower unit 403 is also provided with an end point detection switch for detecting the pseudo sphere FB pushed up by the push-up device 432 to a height hidden behind the decorative pattern display device 42. .. In the lower unit 403, a portion of the lower unit storage portion 431 that faces the inlet of the first communication passage 434, the first communication passage 434, the distribution member 433, the second communication passage 440, the lifting device 432, and the third communication passage 434. The passage 443 and a portion of the lower unit storage portion 431 that faces the outlet of the third communication passage 443 form a movable accessory moving region 404. In addition, in the present embodiment, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 (each production passage member 406 for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402) are the first production unit and the second production unit. And the pseudo ball effect performed there corresponds to the first effect and the second effect. In addition, one of the decorative symbol display device 42, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 (each production passage member 406 for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402) is an instep production means. And the other composes the second-stage production means, and the display production or the pseudo-sphere production performed there corresponds to the instep production or the second-stage production.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the pseudo sphere effect performed by using the pseudo sphere effect device 49 is a part of the hand-over effect that inherits the behavior of the game sphere entered in the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b as the specific ball entering means. Done. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 42 as the connecting effect means (display means), the virtual movement mode (pseudo-sphere display) of the pseudo sphere FB between the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 is derived. It is possible to carry out a connection effect (pseudo-sphere display effect). In the present embodiment, the pseudo-sphere effect device 49, the decorative symbol display device 42, and the sub display device 48 constitute a takeover effect means (of the means D-1).

As a basic pattern of the hand-over effect, the game balls enter the starting winning devices 33a and 33b in a state where the variable display is not held (based on the detection of the starting winning switches 224a and 224b as the specific entering detecting means). When the hand-over effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 44, the light emitting means built in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b emit light, and the game ball is launched in the decorative symbol display device 42. A display 464 (pseudo-sphere display) as if going forward is displayed. On the other hand, if the hand-over effect is to be executed at the stage where the variable display that has been held is executed, as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and a hold icon 461 (pseudo-sphere display imitating a game ball) corresponding to the variable display to be executed is set in the launch device 465, and a launch display 464 is performed.

Note that, as described above, the hold icon 461 is configured to be able to change the display mode (color in this example), and effects that continue from the hold icon 461 will inherit the display mode of the hold icon 461. (It may change on the way). That is, for example, when the hand-over effect is performed corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the blue hold icon 461, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a blue pseudo sphere, and the sub display device 48 also displays blue. The effect display in which the pseudo sphere is derived is performed. In addition, the LEDs built in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b are also three-color LEDs, and in the case where it is decided to perform a succession effect at the time of winning the starting prize, a lottery of which color the LEDs should emit, etc. Based on, the corresponding color is caused to emit light, and in the subsequent production, the light emission mode (emission color) is inherited (may change in the middle).

The launched game ball (pseudo ball display) is caught by the character 466 displayed on the sub display device 48, as shown in FIG. There are a plurality of types of the character 466, and the character 466 and the success expectation degree of the hand-over effect correspond to each other. On the decorative pattern display device 42, an explanatory display such as "a ball thrown by a character hits when it reaches the goal" is derived.

As shown in FIG. 47, when the character 466 displayed on the sub display device 48 throws a pseudo ball, one of the pair of left and right light emitting effect parts 47a extending along the upper side of the center frame 47 (the character 466 is When a pseudo ball is thrown leftward, a plurality of LEDs 467 (having a circular shape of the same size as the pseudo ball FB or the game ball when viewed from the front) are built in the left-side light emitting effect part 47a) as a sub display. It shifts from the one on the device 48 side to the one on the production passage member 406 side, and sequentially turns on and off.

When the light emission mode of the light emitting effect production unit 47a reaches the effect passage member 406, as shown in FIG. 48, the pseudo sphere effect using the pseudo sphere FB by the pseudo sphere effect device 49 is started. As a basic success pattern of the pseudo-sphere production, the first production passage 421 on the upper left → the second production passage 422 on the upper right → the third production passage 423 on the lower left → the fourth production passage 424 on the lower right → the lower unit 403 is simulated in this order. The sphere FB passes. Further, as shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, during each pseudo-sphere effect, in the decorative symbol display device 42 located between the effect passage member 406 of the left unit 401 and the effect passage member 406 of the right unit 402. By deriving the pseudo sphere display 468 (joint effect) imitating the pseudo sphere FB, effects (the entire transfer effect) are connected. The success expectation of succession production is suggested by the color of the pseudo sphere FB passing through the production passage member 406, the color of the pseudo sphere display 468 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and the like.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pseudo sphere FB reaches the lower unit 403 (when the pseudo sphere FB is led to a position where the pseudo sphere FB can be visually recognized in the lower unit 403), the succession effect is successful, It is a teaching that a big hit situation occurs. In the lower unit 403, an effect (pseudo ball effect) that teaches/indicates the type of the big hit state is performed. For example, the degree of expectation of a probability varying jackpot is suggested depending on the color of the pseudo sphere FB moving in the lower unit 403 and which of the pair of left and right lifting devices 432 of the lower unit 403 is used. After that, the pseudo sphere FB pushed up by the push-up device 432 is received by the character 469 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the pseudo sphere display 468 is fitted into the recess of the door to open the door. Depending on the display mode of the displayed decorative pattern display device 42, the jackpot type is taught and suggested (the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a corresponding combination).

The pattern of the pseudo-sphere effect is not particularly limited, and for example, the sub display device 48→the upper right second effect passage 422→the upper left first effect passage 421→the lower right fourth effect passage 424→the lower unit The pseudo sphere FB passes through in the order of 403, or the pseudo sphere FB passes through the sub display device 48→the upper left first effect passage 421→the lower unit 403 in order, or the sub display device 48→the decorative pattern display device 42→the third. There may be a pattern in which the pseudo sphere FB passes in the order of the effect passage 423→the fourth effect passage 424→the lower unit 403. The pseudo sphere effect and the pseudo sphere effect can be appropriately connected by a pseudo sphere display (joint effect) of the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, during the hand-over effect, the variable display of the (decreasing) decorative pattern may be displayed somewhere on the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42 (small), or the decorative pattern may not be displayed.

In the present embodiment, by means of the light emitting means built in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the decorative symbol display device 42 (the function of displaying a game ball or a pseudo ball display for launching), the sub display device 48, and the light emitting effect production unit 47a. Guide display means is configured. A mode in which the LED 467 built in the starting winning device 33a, 33b emits light, a display for launching a game ball or a hold icon 461 (pseudo-sphere display) in the decorative symbol display device 42, a display in which a character throws a pseudo-ball in the sub display device 48, The light emission mode of the light emission effecting unit 47a is a guide display and is also an attention unit. However, since the guidance display of the present embodiment is performed in a form that easily associates the game sphere and the pseudo sphere FB, the guidance display may be included in the handover effect. In the present embodiment, the change display and the period correspondence effect are configured by the guidance display and the handing over effect.

As shown in FIG. 4, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge of the game area in the left side area of the game area and in the lower part of the right side area. The general winning device 31 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail constituent portion 51 and an outer rail constituent portion 52 and which guides a game ball shot from the launch device 60 to the upper portion of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball that has been launched in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. This prevents a situation where the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially front end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail forming portion 52. The game ball that has been launched with a momentum above a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming portion 52 is cut off at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail forming portion 51 is cut off at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the rail 50 may flow backward, so the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are removed from the game area. Get burned.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 is provided with a lower plate communication passage 71 that is connected to a lower discharge outlet 16 of the lower plate 15 from a payout mechanism unit 352, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that is connected to the upper plate 19 from the discharge mechanism unit 352.

In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 (outer rail forming portion 52) provided on the front surface side of the inner frame 12, and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball fired from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns backward on the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is passed to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Emitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a launch ball passage 74 is provided which connects the upper plate 19 and the ball feeding device 63 to each other and guides the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 to the ball feeding device 63. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the ball feeding device 63 is provided with a ball clogging detection switch 75 capable of detecting the game ball near the entrance of the game ball to the ball feeding device 63. That is, the ball feeding device 63 is provided with a feed valve (not shown) that feeds the game balls one by one to the firing position that is launched by the launching device 60, and if ball clogging occurs in such a feed valve, ball clogging occurs. There is a risk. In the present embodiment, when the ball clogging detection switch 75 continues to detect the gaming ball for a predetermined time or longer while the handle 18 is being operated, it is detected that the ball clogging has occurred in the corresponding portion. It has become.

In addition, a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower plate communication passage 71 is formed in the launch ball passage 74 (which may be the downstream portion of the upper plate 19), and the first shutter (which opens and closes the communication hole). (Not shown) is provided. The first shutter is always biased to a closed position side that closes the communication hole by a biasing means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is configured to interlock with the ball removal button 123 and to be displaced to an open position for opening the communication hole when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is formed with a discharge port 15a through which the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A second shutter 15b that opens and closes is provided. The second shutter 15b is always biased by a biasing means (not shown) to the closed position side that closes the discharge port 15a. Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to interlock with the ball removing lever 25 (for example, connected or integrally formed), and when the ball removing lever 25 is pressed (to the left side), the second shutter 15b is operated. Is configured to be displaced to an open position where the discharge port 15a is opened.

In addition, the lower plate 15 is provided with a holding means (not shown) capable of holding the second shutter 15b in the open position, and the discharge port 15a is in the open position even if the player does not continue to press the ball pulling lever 25. Can be held at. As the holding means, for example, by fully pushing the ball pulling lever 25 to the open position side, the ball pulling lever 25 and a predetermined portion on the second shutter 15b side are brought into a locked state and the locked state. From the above, there is a configuration in which the locking state is released by pushing the ball-pulling lever 25 again to the open position side as much as possible.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). Is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate communicating passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower plate communication passage 71. In addition, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective inlets and the payout passage 67 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be discharged to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting the game balls located in the lower plate communication passage 71. By the existence of the full detection switch, it is understood that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display on the decorative pattern display device 42, voice, etc. Is controlled. It should be noted that when the game balls are not accumulated in the lower plate communication passage 71 and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are not detected for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally so that they are partially overlapped with each other, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. A protective cover made of resin or the like is attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally called a back pack, the unit is called a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover for covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, the display control device 45, and the sub control device 262, which face the front from the opening of the frame cover 213, are detachably attached in a state of being stacked in front and back. There is. The sub display device 48 is embedded in the center of the upper portion of the center frame 47 and is provided so as to be exposed to the front. The light emitting effect parts 47a provided on both sides of the sub display device 48 may be configured by the upper part of the center frame 47 or may be configured separately from the center frame 47 and attached to the center frame 47. It may be.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42a in which an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the board box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving the LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 (e.g., the light-emission production section 47a) is arranged. Further, the accommodation box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by the ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 having the main controller 261 mounted thereon is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

Main controller 261 is housed in substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured to be unsealed without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it can be easily found that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning openings, corresponding to various winning openings such as the general winning device 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, and a variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch 223. In addition, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b are provided with a first start prize winning switch 224a and a second start prize winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although illustration is omitted, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board which is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. There is. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261 and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start prize winning switch 224a and the second start prize winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main controller 261 sends a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid) according to the winning situation at each time to the payout controller 311, and a predetermined number of game balls based on an output signal from the payout controller 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, on the back surface of the game board 30, a special winning opening solenoid for opening the special winning opening of the variable winning device 32, a solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 37 of the second starting winning device 33b, and the like. Is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main controller 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is one in which a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 are integrated. The back pack unit 203 is openably and closably supported on the left side portion (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an opening/closing axis extending along the up-down direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numeral is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (big hit state, probability variation mode, etc.), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91, 92 described later. 12 terminals for outputting information regarding opening, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower bowl full error, tank ball no error, and dispensing error, award paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal or the like for outputting information regarding the number of balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of ABS resin, for example, and is provided with a protective cover portion 354 that projects rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is closed, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 having an opening on the upper side is provided, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Has been done. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electric configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power from the outside is installed. There is. Main power of 24 V AC, for example, is supplied to the power switch substrate 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), a lower frame set 251 which is axially supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and which can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collecting mechanism flow, and the game balls are provided at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings of the general winning device 31 and the like are collected through the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage 217, and the game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the power supply/launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a front-back manner. Has been. The power supply/launch control device 310 includes a firing control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, is housed in a board box 313a, and is fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

The payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/firing control device 310). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member similar to the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is housed, so that the traces of opening the board box 311a remain. There is.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually confirmed.

In addition, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor occurs, the dispensing motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 protruding outward from the substrate box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function and can retain the state at the time of power failure even if a power failure occurs, and can restore the state at the time of power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power shutdown is stored and retained. Therefore, when the user wants to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Throw in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into a key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the cylinder lock 700 is rotated to one side to move the inside. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion on the front surface side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side (lower left in FIG. 5) on the back side of the inner frame 12. Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can be retracted from the switch body. The front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pushed toward the switch body and is immersed in the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off by the detection unit being pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. It turns on. Similarly, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, and the detecting part is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control unit 261 as the main control unit and the lottery unit is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be configured into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data will be backed up.

In the case where the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is in a power-off state (including a power failure in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the values of stack pointers, registers, I/O, etc. The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein through a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input/output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, various detection switches such as a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, and a power source are provided in the input/output port 505. -Various substrates such as the launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, the sub-control device 262, the hold display devices 46a and 46b, the normal hold display device 44, the solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, and the second start winning device. Various electric parts such as a motor for opening and closing 33b (blade member 37) are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal portions and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and a ROM 552 storing fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. In addition to the RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the above, an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit not shown Equipped with. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

To the input/output port 554, the CPU 551, the ROM 552, the RAM 553 are connected via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected. Further, in the input/output port 554, the speaker SP, the light emitting effect part 47a, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the light emitting means built in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the annular illumination part 102, and the error display lamp 104. Etc. are connected.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display. As described above, the present embodiment teaches that the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 win the jackpot, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed as the effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol in the special display devices 43a and 43b. Further, the display control device 45 of the present embodiment is configured to also execute the display control of the sub display device 48. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display control device 45 is also included in the sub control means together with the sub control device 262.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511, the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

The RAM 513 is configured such that a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Is backed up. Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a has a stack pointer at the time of power-off, each register, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned off and the power is turned off again. This is an area for storing values such as I/O. The writing in the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. Like the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which payout control of the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261. And a command buffer in which the commands transmitted from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main control device 261 and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is initialized. It is turned off when the process is performed or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, as the specific commands, the payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, the prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls, and the main controller 261 are restored. There are three payout return commands transmitted in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. The command reception flag is turned on when any of the commands is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, the initial setting process or the power shutdown. It is turned off when it is returned to the previous state, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment processing is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from main controller 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 including the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main control device 261, the power supply/firing control device 310 (firing control circuit 312), the payout device 358, the CR unit connection board 314, etc. are connected to the input/output port 515. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball clogging detection switch 75 for detecting the ball clogging in the ball feeding device 63 is also connected to the input/output port 515 of the payout controller 311.

The CR unit connection board 314 is a ball rental operation unit (lending switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The CR unit controller of the rental unit) and the payout controller 311 are electrically connected to each other. Although the lending switch 121, the return switch 122, and the balance display unit 124 are mounted on the pachinko machine 10, they are substantially included in the CR unit because they are related to the game ball lending operation by the CR unit. It is what is done. Further, the CR unit connection board 314 is also mounted on the pachinko machine 10, but is provided between the CR unit control device and the lending switch 121, the return switch 122, and the balance display unit 124, and the CR unit control device. Since it is electrically connected to the payout control device 311, it is substantially included in the CR unit.

Then, the information about the ball lending operation section by the player or the ball lending operation to the button provided on the main body of the CR unit is input to the CR unit control device, and the recording medium inserted in the CR unit (game When the game value balance is stored in the card that is the value medium), the card balance is decremented, and at the same time, a lending request signal for the number of gaming balls corresponding to the deduction is output to the payout control device 311. .. The recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type and may be a coin type or a stick type.

It should be noted that the CR unit is provided with a money reader capable of reading the amount of money inserted into the cash insertion unit and a card control unit capable of reading the balance stored in the card inserted into the card insertion unit. .. In addition, a card available lamp (flashing with an error) indicating that the CR unit is available, a card insertion lamp indicating that a card is inserted, a card balance display section indicating the card balance, and a game ball are displayed. A lending switch LED or the like indicating that the lending is possible is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the CR unit outputs a lending request signal to the pachinko machine 10 and uses the function of paying out the game ball of the pachinko machine 10 to the player (on the upper plate 19 or the like). However, for example, the CR unit has a function of paying out game balls, and when the lending switch 121 is operated, the CR unit is guided to the upper plate 19 through a guide tube extending from the CR unit. The game balls may be rented.

Further, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply/firing control device 310. It is configured to output every (for example, every 2 msec).

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of a game ball by the launch device 60. The handle 18, the payout control device 311, and the main control device 261 are electrically connected to the firing control circuit 312. Further, the firing control circuit 312 causes the handle 18 to dial the dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the amount of rotation operation (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotation operation body 18a) and the player touches the handle 18. A touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is operating and a firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b are inputtable. Further, the firing control circuit 312 is configured such that a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected can be input from the payout control device 311.

Then, the firing control circuit 312 outputs a firing state signal to the main control device 261 on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input. On condition that the status signal is input, the launch permission signal and the ball feed signal are output to the launch control circuit 312. Main controller 261 is configured to output a firing permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the firing state signal is being input.

Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feeder 63 to send the game ball to the launch position when the ball feed signal is input. It should be noted that the ball feeding device 63 is provided with a preparation ball detection sensor capable of detecting whether or not a game ball is present at the launch position, and the preparation ball detection sensor detects that the game ball is already present at the launch position. In the state, the ball feeding device 63 may not be driven (even if the ball feeding signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the launch position).

Further, the firing control circuit 312 drives the firing device 60 (firing solenoid) on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, the (dial position signal), and the firing permission signal are input. Is configured to let. As a result, the game ball set at the launch position is launched by the launch device 60 with strength based on the dial position signal.

Further, the power supply circuit 313 is a power supply unit 541 that supplies electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It has and.

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24 volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. The +12V power source, the +5V power source, and the backup power source are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. In addition, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage is less than 22 V, determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred, The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Note that the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the output voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the power failure process even after the DC stable voltage of 24 V becomes less than 22 V. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erasing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erasing switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 323 being pressed down (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. It

The display control device 45 executes variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 according to the instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It has and. The input/output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Generation of internal command for VDP 526) is executed. Thereby, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as a design displayed on the decorative design display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the present embodiment, the sub-display device 48 including a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529. Also for the sub display device 48, the display control device 45 derives the effect display based on the instruction from the sub control device 262.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs the lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a win/loss random number counter C1 as a win/loss random number generating means used in win/win lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a type used to determine the jackpot type (type lottery). A decision counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to decide whether or not a reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the win/no pass random number counter C1, and a first And the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, which are used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42), etc., and the second start winning device 33b is in the open state. The normal symbol random number counter C4 used in the entry support lottery to determine whether or not to use is used. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for lottery of reach patterns when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and varied. The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for selecting a fluctuation pattern (effect pattern selection) of the decorative pattern display device 42.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, it returns to 0 which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

In the RAM 503, a special variation holding area as holding storage means for storing the respective values of the winning/failing random number counter C1, the type determining counter C2, and the variation selecting counter C3, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 are normally stored. A variable reserve area is provided. The normal variable holding area includes four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting the configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

In addition, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area including four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth reservation areas), a second special fluctuation storage area, and one execution area. There is. In each of the holding areas of the first special variation holding area, the respective values of the winning/discarding random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Sequentially stored. In each of the holding areas of the second special variation holding area, the values of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the second starting winning device 33b. Sequentially stored. By adopting this configuration, the variable displays (first variable display and second variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held up to four times, respectively.

Explaining each counter in detail, the success/failure random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 637, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 637) as the final value, the lower limit value 0 as the opening value. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the win/fail random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning/failing random number counter C1 (value=0 to 637), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of the normal process. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is updated regularly (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning device 33a or the second start prize winning device 33b, the value of the random number counter C1 stored in the random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the success/failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode) is two, and the value is “7,307”, and the high probability. In the state (probability change mode), the number of values of the success/failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit is 20, and the values are “7 to 11, 307 to 311”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two win/loss determination tables as win value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. There are a first hit/miss determination table that stores "7, 307" as a jackpot value and a second hit/miss determination table that stores "8-11, 308-311" as a jackpot value.

The type determination counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), returns to 0 which is the lower limit value. In addition, the ROM 502 is provided with two type determination tables that are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to, and the first start winning device 33a. There are a first type determination table that is referred to when a big hit corresponding to a ball and a second type determination table that is referred to when a big hit corresponding to a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. Then, when the jackpot is won in the win/no win lottery, the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (the type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the decided type is given. The Rukoto. It should be noted that the jackpots corresponding to the first start winning device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b may be assigned the same jackpot classification and one classification determination table.

The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. ..

The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to the lower limit value 0. In the present embodiment, the variation selection counter C3 causes a reach state with respect to the decorative symbol, and then a final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, so that the reach state similarly occurs. After that, the final stop design is determined to be stopped except before and after the reach design, "reach other than out of front and rear" and "complete removal" in which the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, there is one reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 and the reach pattern for the ROM 502, but for example, for the game ball to the first start winning a prize device 33a. A first reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach pattern (when a big hit does not occur) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 that is acquired as a result of entering a ball, and a game ball for the second starting winning device 33b. It is also possible to provide a second reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach pattern (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 acquired upon the entry of No. Further, for example, the first reach determination table may be referred to in the low ball entry state, and the second reach determination table may be referred to in the high ball entry state, or the first reach determination table may be referred to in the normal mode. However, the second reach determination table may be referred to in the time reduction mode, and the third reach determination table may be referred to in the probability variation mode.

The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation reservation area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning configuration device 33a or the second startup winning configuration device 33b. ..

Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 255, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 255), and then the lower limit value. The variation type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, and the other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 31, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 31), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Has become. In addition, the variation time of the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is associated with the rough variation pattern of the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 (reach pattern such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.). If the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also determined (the variation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 that exactly fits the variation time of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b). To let you choose).

The counter and the like used for determining the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, it is possible to determine the reach pattern of the decorative pattern only by the first variation type counter CS1. Further, the table for determining the reach pattern is not particularly limited, and the number, the correspondence with the game state, the content, etc. are appropriately set for each model.

The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined by the decoration symbol display device 42 when the variation of the decoration symbol is started.

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the numbers of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one in the range of 0 to 232, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 232). The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated regularly (once in each of the timer interrupts in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values that can be won in the low ball entry state is 1, and the range is "1". On the other hand, the number of random number values to be won in the high-income state is 232, and the range is “1 to 232.” In other words, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has a low-ball-on support determination table that is referred to in the low-ball-on state ball-support support lottery and a high-ball-point-supported high-ball-point support lottery table that is referred to. A ball-time support determination table is prepared. Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41 (the ordinary symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 blink alternately). After that), the game is stopped and displayed in a mode (combination of lights) corresponding to the winning, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened in a pattern according to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process which is activated by the input of the above. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, reading processing of various prize switches is executed. That is, the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 are read, the state of the switches is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process directly proceeds to the next process.

In addition, when there is the detection information of the various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. In an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out. ). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process associated with passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. In a succeeding step S306, a firing permission command setting process for performing a process such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power/firing control device 310 is performed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once ended.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the RAM 503 has a first holding counter Na for counting the number of holdings of the first variable display triggered by the winning of the first starting winning device 33a, and a second holding of the winning for the second starting winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb is provided to count the number of variable displays held. It should be noted that a suspension total counter may be provided to count the total number of suspension variable displays (the total number of suspensions of the first variable display and the suspension number of the second variable display).

Further, in the execution area and each of the holding areas of the special variation holding area, a winning/discarding random number storage area that stores the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 as winning/unlocking related information, a winning type random number storing area that stores the value of the type determining counter C2, A reach random number storage area for storing the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is provided.

Further, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, whether the first variation display based on the ball entered into the first start prize winning device 33a or the second variation display based on the ball entered into the second start prize winning device 33b. A variable storage area is provided for storing information indicating whether or not Hereinafter, "the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set to ON", and "the second variation display is displayed in the variation storage area". "The information indicating "is stored" is also referred to as "the second variation flag is set to ON".

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start prize device 33b based on the detection information of the second start prize switch 224b. When an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). When a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S502, the operation proceeds to step S503, where the second holding counter Nb is incremented by 1.

In a succeeding step S504, an addition display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by 1 is performed. That is, when both the pair of left and right second holding lamps are off, the left second holding lamp is turned on, the left second holding lamp is on, and the right second holding lamp is off. If it is, both the left and right second holding lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right second holding lamps are turned on, the left side second holding lamp is turned on while the right side second holding lamp is turned on. When the second holding lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the second holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, the processing for blinking both the left and right second holding lamps is performed.

After step S504, in step S505, the values of the winning/discarding random number counter C1, the type determining counter C2, and the variation selecting counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 (the winning/disallowing random number counter buffer, the type determining counter buffer, and the variation). Each value stored in the selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (winning random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the free holding areas of the second special variation holding area. .. After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. The details of the hit/miss determination processing will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S508, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit, the value is deviated based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of fluctuation is performed. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, details of the hit/miss determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either "7" or "307" which is the value stored in the first winning/discarding determination table. Determine whether. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Note that, in FIG. 14, the process of step S 5101 is simplified for convenience of description, but actually, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is "307", and if either of these determinations is affirmative, affirmative determination is made in step S5101, which determination is which? Also in case of negative determination, the negative determination is made in step S 5101.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5101, then in step S5102, the first winning/prohibiting flag is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second win/loss determination table “8 to 11”. , 308-311”. By the way, "8-11, 308-311" is a value that is a big hit only in the high probability state (probability variation mode). Even in the determination process, in reality, as described above, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 and the respective values corresponding to the jackpot match.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5103, then in step S5104 the second hit/miss flag is turned on and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the high probability state is also “displaced”, in step S5105, whether the new variation information is stored is the second special variation suspension area ( Whether the second variable display is supported or not) is determined. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5105, the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5106 is the value "101-210" stored in the small hitting determination table. It is determined whether or not

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5106, the small hit flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5106, the present process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the first win/fail flag, the second win/fail flag, and the small hit flag are the first win/fail flag and the second win/fail flag for the win/fail random number storage area of the corresponding holding area of the special variation hold area. By overwriting the information corresponding to the small hit flag, the first hit/miss flag, the second hit/miss flag, and the small hit flag are turned on.

If a negative decision is made in step S5105, this processing is ended as it is. That is, in the winning/winning lottery performed based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting winning device 33a, there is no possibility of winning the small hit. In the case of winning the small hit in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a (with a lower probability than the winning probability of the small hit in the winning lottery entering the second starting winning device 33b) It may be configured to have.

Next, the second type determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second win/loss flag has been set to ON in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility that a big hit state will occur), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (a big hit state may occur), in step S5302, the second type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “14 to 19” corresponding to “10RS”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5302, then in step S5303, the 10RS flag is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5304, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area corresponds to “4RS” by referring to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches the value “8 to 13”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5304, the 4RS flag is turned on in step S5305, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5304, then in step S5306, the 10RN flag is turned on, and then this processing is ended. In the present embodiment, the 10RS flag, the 4RS flag, and the 10RN flag are the first winning/disabling flag, the second winning/disabling flag, and the small value with respect to the winning type random number storage area of the corresponding holding area of the special variation holding area. By overwriting the information corresponding to the hit flag, the 10RS flag, the 4RS flag, and the 10RN flag are turned on.

Next, the reach determination process of step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first win/loss flag has been set in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5401, that is, if the jackpot is a jackpot in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur (there is a possibility of being out of place) at least in the low-probability state, then in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into consideration and newly added. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "out-of-position reach". If an affirmative decision is made in step S5402, then in step S5403, the front/rear flag indicating the occurrence of front/rear deviation is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5402, then in step S5404, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area corresponds to “reach other than front/back deviation”. It is determined whether or not any of the values “2 to 21” to be performed matches. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5404, the flags other than before and after are turned on in step S5405, and then the present process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variable display ends without reaching the reach state, that is, “complete disconnection”, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 subsequent to step S508, the advance command setting process is performed. The start command includes variation information (information used to determine the content of the variation display) indicating the results of the hit/miss determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing, the first start winning device 33a, or the The information indicating which of the two-start winning devices 33b is the variation information triggered by the ball entering is included, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

After the processing of step S509, or if the determination in step S501 or step S502 is negative, it is determined in step S510 whether or not the game ball has won the first starting prize device 33. It is determined by the detection information of 224a. When a negative determination is made in step S510, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S511, the value of the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of variable display triggered by the winning of the first starting winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). When a negative determination is made in step S511, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S511, the operation proceeds to step S512, and the first holding counter Na is incremented by 1.

In a succeeding step S513, addition display processing of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variable display by 1 is performed. That is, when both the pair of left and right first holding lamps are off, the left first holding lamp is turned on, the left first holding lamp is on, and the right first holding lamp is off. If it is, both the left and right first holding lamps are turned on. If both the left and right first holding lamps are turned on, the left first holding lamp is turned on while the right first holding lamp is turned on. When the first holding lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the first holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, processing for blinking both the left and right first holding lamps is performed.

After step S513, in step S514, the respective values of the winning/discarding random number counter C1, the type determining counter C2, and the fluctuation selecting counter C3 are stored in the vacant holding areas of the first special fluctuation holding area (the winning/failing random number storage area and the winning type random number storage). Area, reach random number storage area). After step S514, the process proceeds to step S515.

In step S515, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the hit/miss determination processing have been described above.

In the following step S516, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area. A first type determination process for determining the type is performed.

Here, the first type determination processing of step S516 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second win/loss flag is set to ON in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. When a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a big hit state will occur), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a big hit state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “19” corresponding to “10RS”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5202, the 10RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the value “8RS” corresponding to “4RS”. .About.18". If an affirmative decision is made in step S5204, then in step S5205 the 4RS flag is turned on and then this processing is ended.

If a negative decision is made in step S5204, the 10RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and then the present process is terminated. In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is hit, the high-probability state is given the same proportion. Is. However, in the case of winning the jackpot state when the first start winning device 33a is hit, the percentage of winning “10RS” is 5%, and the percentage of winning “4RS” is 55% (“10RN”). While the winning percentage is 40%), if you win the jackpot with the second start winning device 33b, the percentage of winning "10RS" will be 30% and "4RS". The winning percentage is 30% (the winning percentage for "10RN" is 40%).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S517 following step S516, when it is determined in step S515 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is changed. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed based on the value of the selection counter C3. The details of the reach determination processing (see FIG. 16) have been described above.

After step S517, the advance command setting process is performed in step S518, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the winning or deciding process. The configuration determination process and the reach determination process are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, a provisional storage area for temporarily storing these counter values when the values of the acceptance/rejection random number counter C1 and the like are provided, and regarding the information stored in the provisional storage area, the acceptance/rejection determination processing, the type determination processing, and A configuration may be adopted in which after the reach determination processing is executed, the reach is stored in the holding area of the corresponding special variation holding area.

The process of extracting the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 constitutes a discriminant value extracting process, and the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S514 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process, and the function of performing the process corresponds to the hit/failure related information acquisition means. Further, the function of extracting and storing the value of the random number counter C1 constitutes the information acquisition means. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S515 (steps S5101, S5103) is a value corresponding to the winning constitutes a first winning/discarding process, and the determination result is The process of storing (setting the corresponding flag) steps S5102 and S5104 constitutes a result storing process.

Next, the through gate passage processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined by the detection information of the through gate switch 225. When a negative determination is made in step S601, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, in step S602, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal suspension counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S602, that is, it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal hold counter is set. Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) corresponding to the fact that the number of variable displays held in the normal symbol display device 41 is increased by one is performed. That is, when both of the pair of left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are off, the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is turned on, the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is turned on, and the right ordinary hold lamp 406 is turned off. If it is, both the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are turned on. If both the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are turned on, the left side ordinary hold lamps 406 are left on. When the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is in the blinking state and the right ordinary hold lamp 406 is in the lit state, processing for blinking both the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 is performed.

After step S604, in step S605, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage processing is ended.

Next, the firing permission command setting process of step S306 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag indicating that the firing state signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312 is set to ON. The firing state signal is output when the firing control circuit 312 receives the touch signal from the handle 18, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311. From the main control device 261.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not a firing state signal has been received. When a negative determination is made in step S702, the firing permission flag is turned off in step S703, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S702, then in a step S704 it is decided whether or not the value of the firing timer used for measuring the firing interval of the game ball is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S704, the value of the firing timer is decremented by 1 in step S707, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S704, then in step S705, the main control device 261 transmits a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312. In a succeeding step S706, the firing permission flag is turned off. After step S706, this process ends.

In addition, when the determination in step S701 is negative, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the firing state signal is received. When a negative determination is made in step S708, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S708, then in step S709 the firing permission flag is set ON.

In a succeeding step S710, a ball sending signal is transmitted to the firing control circuit 312. Further, in step S711, "300" corresponding to 0.6 seconds is set to the firing timer. As a result, the game ball is reliably set at the launch position by the ball feeding device 63, and then the game ball is launched by the launch device 60, and the main controller 261 is launched from the launch control circuit 312. While continuing to receive the signal, the main control device 261 transmits a launch permission signal at an interval of 0.6 seconds, and the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 at an interval of 0.6 seconds. After step S711, this process ends.

When the firing control circuit 312 receives the firing permission signal from the main control device 261, it receives all of the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and the payout control device 311. Whether or not it is determined, and when the determination is affirmative, the launching device 60 (the launch solenoid) is driven, and the launching process for launching the game ball is performed. The firing control circuit 312 controls the firing device 60 with respect to the firing strength (firing speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. Thereby, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 with the adjusted strength.

In addition, when the ball control signal is received from the main control device 261, the launch control circuit 312 sets the game ball at a launch position in the launch rail 61 where the launch device 60 will launch the game ball. If it is confirmed that the game ball is not set at the launch position by checking the preparation ball detection sensor that detects that the game ball is set, the ball feeding device 63 is driven to set the game ball at the launch position. Perform ball feeding processing.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503a of RAM 503.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing. In step S401, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt processing is performed. finish.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is also executed in the payout control device 311 as well, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main process is activated upon a reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, in order to set the stack pointer to a predetermined value and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable, for example, 1 Wait processing is executed for about a second. In a succeeding step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM deletion switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). In order to do so, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. That is, the effectiveness of backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the validity of the backup by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization processing (step S113 or the like) of the RAM 503. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM deletion switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is necessary that the information on occurrence of power failure is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value or the like) is normal. Then, the process at power recovery (the process at power recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the game state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the starting winning device 33 updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is output to the sub side. It executes external output processing such as transmission to each control device.

For example, when the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in a variable manner, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, the design command, etc., determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. The display control device 45 is instructed to display (variable display) on the decorative pattern display device 42.

The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative design such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these fluctuation pattern commands and the fluctuation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern and the like of the variable display based on the change pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the sound, and the like.

Here, the variation type of the decorative pattern will be described. “Normal reach” is a reach pattern in which no special effect display is displayed other than the variation of the decorative pattern. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display time is shorter than that in the normal mode even in the case of various types of reach. For example, the variation display time (variation time) from which the normal reach is derived is “12 seconds” or “15 seconds” in the normal mode, “9 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, or “12”. Seconds”. In the normal mode as well, the first variation display that starts from the state where four first variation displays are suspended is also in a temporarily shortened state, and the variation time of the first variation display is normal reach. For example, it is set to "9 seconds" or "12 seconds".

"Super reach" is a reach that makes the player have an expectation by displaying characters other than the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42 during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established). It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the variation display for deriving the super reach is “13 seconds”, “16 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “25 seconds”, or “30 seconds”, or a certain variation in the normal mode. In the mode and the time shortening mode, it is "13 seconds", "16 seconds", "20 seconds", "22 seconds", "25 seconds", "27 seconds", or "30 seconds". It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when the super reach occurs may be configured to be a common fluctuation time in any game mode.

"Premium reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative pattern, a character of a pattern different from the super reach, etc. Is displayed in such a manner that the player has a sense of expectation. The variation display from which the premium reach of the present embodiment is derived has a longer variation time than the variation display from which the super reach is derived, and also has the same length in both the high entry state and the low entry state. For example, 60 seconds).

In addition, the variation time of the variation display that is "completely disengaged" without any reach state is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "small hit" is won, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of chance symbols. In this example, variable display is performed in which "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As described above, there is a possibility that the "small hit" is won only when the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b is won, and "3", "4", The variation time of the variation display in which "1" is stopped and displayed is "6 seconds" in any game mode.

Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays the stop symbol required after the lapse of the variable time. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, and is a combination of probability variation jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of chance symbols, a combination of front/rear symbols, and a symbol other than front/rear symbols. It is intended to specify six categories of combination and combination of completely out-of-design. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

If you win the jackpot (any one of "10RS", "4RS", "10RN"), in the decorative pattern display device 42, a combination in which the decorative pattern with the number pattern becomes a doublet Will be stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the case of "probable variation jackpot (either "10RS" or "4RS")", a decorative design composed of odd-numbered ditches of "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" Change in either combination of "probable variation jackpot design" which is a combination, or "normal jackpot design" which is a combination of decorative designs consisting of even numbered doublet of "2, 4, 6, 8" The display is stopped and displayed, and in the case of "normal jackpot ("10RN")", the variable display is stopped and displayed in a combination of "normal jackpot symbols".

Then, when the sub-control device 262 receives the probability variation jackpot symbol command, it determines one of the combinations of symbols consisting of any one of the "1 to 9" as a stop symbol, and usually the jackpot. When the symbol command is received, one of the combinations of symbols composed of any one of "2, 4, 6, 8" is determined as the stopped symbol.

When the small hit is won, the combination of the chance symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. There is only one combination of chance patterns in this embodiment. The number of patterns and types of combination of chance patterns is not particularly limited, and a plurality of types may be provided.

The combination of the front and rear deviating symbols corresponds to the "rear and front deviating reach" in which the final stop symbol deviates by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach state occurs. The combination of symbols other than the front/rear deviation corresponds to “reach other than front/rear deviation” in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the reach is generated. The combination of complete detachment patterns corresponds to "complete detachment" in which even reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a combination of front/rear deviation symbols, a combination of symbols other than front/rear deviation, and a combination of complete deviation symbols, it is “disengaged”.

Note that the display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is for presentation purposes, and can be appropriately changed for each model. That is, for example, during the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, the symbol display area may not be divided into upper/middle/lower but may be divided into left/middle/right, or a decorative symbol display device. You may comprise so that three symbol display areas may be accommodated and displayed in the right half of 42, or the very upper left part area.

Incidentally, as will be described in detail later, when the sub-control device 262 receives these deviating symbol commands, the sub-control device 262 determines the combination of symbols stored in the corresponding counter buffer of the RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In the present embodiment, three commands are prepared for the detachment design command, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, there is only one detachment design command, and the sub-control device 262 combines decorative symbols. May be determined.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. To do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In a succeeding step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is performed, and determination of a big hit and setting of variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S208, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed. The details of this starting winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes in and after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeatedly executed (step S211, step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (637 in this example).

In step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass/fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly changes. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power supply has been cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S213 is executed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. Be seen. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember.

Then, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, in step S217, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

The processing of step S209 is the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processing of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than in the case where each processing is in the middle. And can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. ..

Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variation interval set after the variation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the variation interval period, the value of the variation interval timer is subtracted in step S802, and then this processing is terminated. That is, for example, when the variation interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the variation interval timer is set to "249 ("250" in the case where step S802 is performed before step S801)", In the process, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S801, that is, if it is not a fluctuation interval, then in step S803, the hit state storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to, and at present, in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. It is determined whether or not there is.

During the jackpot state, the variable winning device 32 is in an open state and the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is opened. There is a round period for which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period after which the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started after the final round.

During the small hit state, the variable winning device 32 is in an open state and the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is opened. And the ending period until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started. It should be noted that the number of rounds in the small hit state may be plural, and in that case, the interval period exists even in the small hit state.

In the hit situation storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in the states other than the big hit state and the small hit state, and in the big hit state and the small hit state, "1" is set in the opening period and the interval period. , "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S803, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit state storage area, and it is determined whether or not the big hit state or the small hit state is in progress.

When a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state is in progress, the present process is ended as it is, while when an affirmative decision is made in step S803, in detail in step S804, By referring to the setting status of the special figure displaying flag described later, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42). Specifically, when the special figure displaying flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special figure displaying flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which is a state in which variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is started, and the special figure display flag of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is stopped and displayed.

When a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, in the case where the big hit state or the small hit state is not being performed and the variation display is not being performed either, the process proceeds to step S805, and the second start winning device 33b is used as a trigger. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of 2 variable display holds is greater than “0”.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S805, that is, if any one of the second variable displays has been stored in suspension, then in step S806, 1 is subtracted from the second suspension counter Nb. In the present embodiment, if the second variable display is held and stored by the determination processing of step S805, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even when the first variable display is held and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is preferentially consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In a succeeding step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area→holding first area, holding third area→holding second area, holding fourth area→holding third area.

After step S807, in step S808, the second variation flag of the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON. In a succeeding step S809, subtraction display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the number of hold of the second variable display being decreased by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second holding lamps are both blinking, the second holding lamp on the right is turned on while the second holding lamp on the left is blinking, and the second holding lamp on the left is blinking. When the second holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, both the left and right second holding lamps are turned on, and when the second holding lamps on the left and right are both in the lighting state, the second holding lamp on the left side When the second holding lamp on the right side is turned off while the is on, and the second holding lamp on the left side is in the lighting state and the second holding lamp on the right side is in the off state, both the second holding lamps on the left and right sides are turned off. Perform processing to cause it.

After step S809, in step S810, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, when no second variation display is stored on hold, in step S811, the first variation triggered by the entry into the first start winning a prize device 33a. It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na, which counts the number of held displays, is greater than zero.

When a negative determination is made in step S811, the process shifts to step S812, and both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are in the change waiting state in which no change display is performed. The standby display setting for deriving a corresponding display mode (for example, a mode in which only the first and second special figure lamps or the second special figure lamps from the right in the bottom row are lit) is performed. That is, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment, the stop mode is maintained during the change interval (in the mode showing the result of the winning/winning lottery) after the fluctuation stop. However, when the variation interval ends, it is possible to switch to a display mode indicating that it is in the variation standby state. After step S812, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S811, then 1 is subtracted from the first holding counter Na in step S813. In a succeeding step S814, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area→holding first area, holding third area→holding second area, holding fourth area→holding third area.

After step S814, in step S815, the first variation flag of the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON. In a succeeding step S816, subtraction display processing of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the number of hold of the first variable display being decreased by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first holding lamps are both blinking, the first holding lamp on the right is turned on while the first holding lamp on the left is blinking, and the first holding lamp on the left is blinking. When the first holding lamp on the right side is in the lighting state, both the first holding lamps on the left and right are turned on, and when the first holding lamps on the left and right are both lighting states, the first holding lamp on the left side When the 1st hold lamp on the right side is turned off while the is on, and the 1st hold lamp on the left side is on and the 1st hold lamp on the right side is off, both the 1st hold lamps on the left and right are turned off Perform processing to cause it.

After step S816, the variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then the present process is terminated. In this embodiment, the number of execution areas of the special variation suspension area is one, and the data stored in the first special variation suspension area and the second special variation suspension area are displayed when the variation display based on the data is performed. Then, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

Details of the variable display setting process in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the high probability state (probability variation mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of “11”, “12”, and “21”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12” is the time reduction mode. "21" corresponds to the probability variation mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the state is the high probability state by determining whether or not “21” is stored in the mode storage area.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S901, that is, if it is in the high probability state (probability variation mode), then in step S902 the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the win/loss flags (see win/loss determination processing in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the win/loss lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the random number storage area for winning/damaging is taken into consideration, and whether the first winning/damaging flag is ON. Determine whether or not. If the affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set to ON. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the winning/discarding random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot determination flag.

In a succeeding step S905, the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the 10RS flag (see the type determination processing in FIGS. 15A and 15B) is set to ON.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S905, that is, if it is "10RS", then a 10RS pattern setting process is carried out in step S906. The 10RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variable display for teaching the occurrence of “10RS”, and based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, Variation patterns of the display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display time, stop mode of variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42, effect pattern of variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ) Is determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S919 described below.

The relationship between the numerical values of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. That is, in the 10RS pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from normal reach, super reach, and premium reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability variation mode, time reduction mode, or the first variation display). Based on the determination result of whether or not there are four reservations), the variable time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. Then, the information including 10RS, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and the information capable of grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 10RS is to be stopped is determined and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, it is determined whether the type of the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is an odd or even doublet, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command. Note that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined by the sub controller 262 instead of being determined by the main controller 261.

Further, when the determination in step S905 is negative, in step S907, it is determined whether or not the 4RS flag is set to ON by taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S907, that is, if it is "4RS", then 4RS pattern setting processing is carried out in step S908, and then the flow proceeds to step S919.

In the 4RS pattern setting process, information including 4RS and the variation time of 4RS is set in the variation pattern command, and information capable of grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Also, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 4RS is to be stopped is determined and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined as a chance symbol corresponding to 4RS, and the stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S907, the 10RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the 10RN pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from the normal reach and the super reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability change mode, time reduction mode, or hold of the first variation display is 4). Based on the determination result of whether or not it is a certain state), the variable time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. Then, information that includes 10RN, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and the information that can grasp the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 10RN is to be stopped is determined and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the type of the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined to be an even number, and the stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

In addition, in the case where the negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, or when the negative determination is made in step S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the low probability state In step S911, the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set to ON. When a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, when it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, in step S912, the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration, and the front-back flag (see the reach determination processing in FIG. 16) is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the "rear-rear reach" has been performed, the front-rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S919.

In the front-rear reach pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from normal reach and super reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability change mode, time reduction mode, or suspension of the first variation display) Based on the determination result of whether or not there are four), the change time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. Then, information that includes the out-of-front/rear reach, the determined reach pattern, and the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the information capable of grasping the fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the disengagement is determined to be stopped and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the type of the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined to be a front/back deviation symbol, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S912, in step S914, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S914, that is, if the "reach other than out-of-front/back-off" has been performed, a reach pattern setting process other than before/after front is performed in step S915 and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the reach pattern setting process other than before and after, the reach pattern is determined to be the normal reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time shortening state (probability change mode, time shortening mode, or a state in which there are four first variable display suspensions) ), the change time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. Then, information indicating that the reach is other than the out-of-front-rear, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and the information capable of grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the disengagement is determined to be stopped and stored in the corresponding storage area. Furthermore, the type of the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined to be a symbol other than the front/rear deviation, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S914, that is, in the case of "complete deviation", after performing deviation pattern setting processing in step S916, the process proceeds to step S919. In the deviation variation pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined as “no reach occurs”, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability variation mode, time reduction mode, or suspension of the first variation display) Based on the determination result of whether or not there are four), the change time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. Then, the information including the complete out-of-range variation, the determined reach pattern (no reach is generated), and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and the information capable of grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Remember. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the disengagement is determined to be stopped and stored in the corresponding storage area. Furthermore, the type of the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined to be a deviating symbol, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S911, that is, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state is confirmed is set in step S917. .. After that, in step S918, the small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the small hit pattern setting process, information including the small hit and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the information capable of grasping the fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the small hit is determined to be stopped and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined as a chance symbol corresponding to the small hit, and the stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

In step S919, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is set to ON. This indicates that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b is satisfied. In a succeeding step S920, special figure display timer setting processing for measuring the variation time (remaining time of variation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display.

The fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer, in the next external output process of the normal process, when the control signal for starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b, The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Further, the sub-control device 262 which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the special display device. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43a, 43b, the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols based on the symbol command. After step S920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the starting winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 and storing the value in the special fluctuation holding area, the winning/judging determination process of steps S506 and 513, and the fluctuation display setting. In the process, the win/loss flag and the small hit flag and the process of steps S901 to S903 for determining the win/loss based on the situation at that time constitute a win/loss lottery. Further, the second winning/disagreement determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S906, step S908, step S909, step S913, step S915, step S916, and step S918. It

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S817 and the subtraction process of the special figure display timer is performed. Every time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the variation time is 12 seconds (12000 msec), "3000" is set to the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S818, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variation time has elapsed by taking the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction into consideration. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", the affirmative determination is made in step S818.

When a negative determination is made in step S818, in step S824, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. It should be noted that, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S824, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S818, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S819, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S820. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, in the next external output process in the normal process, a control signal for outputting the stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b. That is, on the special display devices 43a and 43b, the modes corresponding to the respective jackpot types, deviations, and the like set in the variable display setting process are stopped and displayed.

In addition, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command for causing the sub-control device 262 to perform stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set. This ensures that the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are synchronized. However, since the sub-control device 262 has already determined the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 by the symbol command and the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again. Need not be added. Further, again, the main display is the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42 is merely an auxiliary one (for production).

Succeedingly, in a step S822, determination information setting processing for performing initial setting of a hit state and switching setting of a game mode is performed, and in a step S823, the variation interval timer corresponds to a variation interval (for example, 1 second). After setting the value, this process ends.

In the decorative symbol display device 42, basically, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the stop display of the variable display of the special symbol by the special display devices 43a and 43b. In addition, when the variation interval ends and the variation display is stored on hold, the variation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 are simultaneously started. On the other hand, even if the variation interval ends, if the variation display is not stored in a suspended manner, the display mode in which the decorative pattern is completely stopped is derived as it is (the mode corresponding to the stop may be switched). Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the even-numbered doublet, the combination of the decorative symbol may be converted into the odd-numbered doublet in the variable interval period. A re-lottery effect such as (a configuration that is always converted is acceptable) may be performed.

Here, the discrimination information setting process of step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set to ON by referring to the execution area of the special variation holding area. When a positive determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration and it is determined whether or not the 4RS flag is set to ON.

When a negative determination is made in step S1002, that is, when the jackpot is "10RS" or "10RN", the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) executed during the jackpot state is determined in step S1003. "10" is set to the round number counter for discrimination. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1002 is affirmative, that is, if the jackpot is "4RS", the round number counter is set to "4" in step S1019.

After step S1003 or step S1019, the process moves to step S1004, and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1005, a value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set to the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32). Succeedingly, in a step S1006, "10" indicating 10 which is the maximum number of entered balls per round is set to a prize counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32. .. It should be noted that the value of the prize winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 in the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 11), and the variable prize winning device 32 is detected. If it is determined that there has been a ball entry, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1007, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type and the like, and the sub control device 262 can also grasp the number of all rounds in the hit state. After step S1007, this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, the appearance of promotion of the jackpot type in appearance, etc. (for example, when an even-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, it is taught that “10RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately after. Alternatively, when an odd-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the fact that “10RS” has been won in the immediate jackpot state may be taught).

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1001, in step S1013, the execution area of the special variation holding area is referred to, and it is decided whether or not the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1013, then in step S1008, the round number counter is set to "1". After step S1008, in step S1009, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1010, a value "250" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 1 second is set in the special variable timer, a winning counter is set in a step S1011, and a small value is set in a step S1012. Set the opening command per hit. After that, this processing ends.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1013, it is decided in step S1014 whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the time reduction mode is set. When a negative determination is made in step S1014, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1014, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1015 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, at the end of the “10RN” jackpot state, the number of fluctuation displays (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set in the fluctuation counter, and the special display is performed. Every time variable display of the devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in step S1015.

In a succeeding step S1016, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1016, that is, after the jackpot state of "10RN" ends, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is displayed. If it has not been performed yet, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1016, then in step S1017, "11" indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed the specified number of times on the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After step S1017, in step S1018, a support end command for informing the sub-control unit 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then this process is ended.

Next, the variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, by determining whether or not the value set in the hit state storage area is "0", it is determined whether or not there is a state other than the hit state. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is not in the hit state, this processing is ended as it is. By the way, at the start of the big hit state and the small hit state, “1” is set in the hit situation storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when the hit state is in effect (when any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. By the way, at the start of the big hit state, "2000" is set to the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1204, that is, if the ending timing of the opening period or the interval period has arrived, then in step S1205, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area. Succeedingly, in a step S1206, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit.

When a negative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1207, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1206, in step S1208, the special variable timer is set to a value “450” corresponding to the time (1.8 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32. To do.

After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, processing for opening the variable winning a prize device 32 is performed, and in step S1210, a round command for transmitting information to the effect that the round is started to the sub control device 262. Set. After that, this processing ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all the rounds in the big hit state (small hit state) are finished and the ending period is started, “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. When a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when the round period has ended (when it is not yet time to end the jackpot state), the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1212.

In a succeeding step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, when there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. In the small hit state of the present embodiment, since there is only one round, negative determination is not made in step S1213.

Then, in step S1216, the value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set to the special variable timer. After step S1216, in step S1218, the winning counter is set to "10". Further, in step S1219, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1220, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect that the interval is started is set to the sub control device 262. After that, this processing ends.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, when the time (open time or closed time) for which the open state or the closed state of the variable winning device 32 remains (open time or closed time), the process proceeds to step S1221. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls to the winning device 32 is "0". The winning counter is set to "10" which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state and the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32.

When a negative determination is made in step S1221, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1221, that is, if the trigger for the end of the round has come without waiting for the elapse of the set period of the round, the process moves to step S1212. As a result, when 10 game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round is promptly terminated at that point even if the open period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if all the rounds in the jackpot state have been exhausted, the process proceeds to step S1222, and “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit. When a negative determination is made in step S1223, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) in the jackpot state is set in the special variable timer in step S1224. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1223, then in step S1225 the value "100" corresponding to the ending time (0.4 seconds) in the small hit state is set in the special variable timer.

After step S1224 or step S1225, in step S1226, the winning counter is set to "7". When the process of setting endings in step S1222 and subsequent steps is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is “0”. Then, if the value of the winning counter is left at "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1221 in the variable winning device control processing after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, in step S1226, a temporary numerical value (“7” in this example) other than “0” is entered in the winning counter to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

After step S1226, in step S1227, a process of closing the variable winning a prize device 32 is performed, and in a succeeding step S1228, an ending command for transmitting information to the effect that the ending is started is set to the sub control device 262. After that, this processing ends.

If the determination in step S1211 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process moves to step S1229 and end setting processing is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area and the variation counter are set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the 10RN flag is set to ON by referring to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1401, the value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is added after the jackpot state is completed.

In the following step S1403, "100" is set to the variation counter. It should be noted that the fluctuation counter is used to display fluctuations for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for understanding that. After step S1403, in step S1404, a time saving start command for informing the sub control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode (transition to the pullback stage) is set. After that, this processing ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the small hit flag is set ON by referring to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. When an affirmative decision is made in step S1405, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1405, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1406. As a result, the probability variation mode is added after the jackpot state ends. After step S1406, in step S1407, a probability variation start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the probability variation mode is set. After that, this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the case where the probability variation mode is added, the variation display of the decorative pattern that teaches the occurrence of the jackpot state, and the probability variation jackpot state in the probability variation jackpot state. Is not taught, and there is a case where it is not taught in the decorative symbol display device 42 that it is the probability variation mode even after the probability variation mode is started (for example, it may occur at a rate of 1/15 of 10RS big hit). , The sub-control device 262 determines when the variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation big hit is received. Then, based on the determination, the sub-control device 262 shifts to the probability variation stage when the probability variation mode is taught at the start of the probability variation mode, and shifts to the pullback stage when the teaching is not performed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1229, in step S1230, "0" indicating that the jackpot situation storage area is not in the jackpot state is set. After that, in step S1231, a hit end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 to notify the sub-control device 262 of the information that the jackpot state is to be ended, and then the present process is ended. The hit end command includes the number-of-times information of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the universal figure interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (typical figure interval) set after the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is "0". To do. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is the universal figure interval, the value of the universal figure interval timer is subtracted in step S2102, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the universal figure interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the universal figure interval timer is set to “249 (“250” in the case where step S2102 is performed before step S2101”) In the process, the value of the universal figure interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is not the ordinary figure interval period, then in step S2103, the ordinary figure displaying flag indicating whether or not the ordinary symbol display device 41 is performing variable display. It is determined whether it is on. In addition, when the general figure display flag is ON, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying the variable.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, the flow proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal suspension counter Nc is greater than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is ended as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, this process is ended. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, in the normal symbol display device 41, the standby display setting for deriving the display mode corresponding to the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed is set. May be In other words, the normal symbol display device 41, after the fluctuation stop, the stop mode will be maintained (in a mode that shows the result of the ball entry support lottery) during the regular drawing interval period, but the regular pattern interval period ends. Then, it may be configured to switch to a display mode indicating that it is in the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2104, then 1 is subtracted from the normal suspension counter Nc in step S2105.

In a succeeding step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normal variable holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second area→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area.

Then, in step S2107, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set, and the universal symbol fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

Here, the universal figure variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In a succeeding step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the present is a state other than the big hit state and the small hit state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2302, that is, if the hit state is not reached, then in step S2303 it is determined whether a value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, a high value. It is determined whether or not it is in a ball entering state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

When a positive determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to the ordinary symbol display timer that measures the variation time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the ordinary symbol display device 41. Set "100" to 0.4 seconds.

Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "0". In the high-ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1 to 232", the winning is won.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2305, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, when the winning support lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting winning device 33b is won, the winning support lottery is won in step S2306. The entry support flag indicating that is set to ON. After step S2306, this process ends.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in the case of a big hit state, a small hit state, or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, the ordinary symbol display timer, the normal symbol Set "500" to set the variable display time of 2. to 2.0 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1". In the low ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1", the winning is won.

When a negative determination is made in step S2308, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery is won, in the above-mentioned step S2306, after the entrance support flag indicating that the winning support lottery is won is set to ON, The process ends. In addition, the variation display time of ordinary symbols and the winning probability in the entry support lottery can be set appropriately for each model of the pachinko machine, for example, the winning probability of the entry support lottery in the high entry state. Alternatively, the winning probability may be higher than the winning probability of the entry support lottery in the low entry state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display of the ordinary hold display device 44 (ordinary hold lamp 406) corresponding to the fact that the number of held variable displays of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is decreased by one. Perform processing. That is, when the pair of left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are both blinking, the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is turned on while the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is blinking, and the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is blinking. When the right ordinary hold lamp 406 is on, the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are turned on, and when the left and right ordinary hold lamps 406 are on, the left ordinary hold lamp 406 is turned on. When the normal hold lamp 406 on the right side is turned off while the light is turned on, and the normal hold lamp 406 on the left side is turned on and the normal hold lamp 406 on the right side is turned off, both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are turned off. Perform processing to cause it. After step S2108, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2109, and processing for subtracting the universal figure display timer is performed. Every time this process is performed once, the count value of the universal figure display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the processing proceeds to step S2110, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the universal figure display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (switching display for alternately lighting a pair of left and right universal symbol lamps) is performed. .. Incidentally, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41. As a result, the normal display control process timing, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms. After step S2115, this process ends.

Further, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the general figure displaying flag is turned off in step S2111, and the general figure stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, when the winning support lottery is won (when the entering support flag is set to ON), both the pair of left and right universal symbol lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are turned on, and in the case of being out. Only the left hand drawing lamp is turned on.

Subsequently, the processing proceeds to step S2113, and general figure determination information setting processing is performed. Here, the universal figure determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entry support flag is set ON. If a negative decision is made in step S2401, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state is set to on in step S2402.

In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not any one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the high-ball entering state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 1 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "450" to 8 seconds.

Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number) of opening the second starting winning device 33b to open the second starting winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step S2409. Further, in step S2410, the second starting winning device 33b is set to the open state, and then the present process is terminated.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, in the low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". In a succeeding step S2407, "1" is set to the opening number counter so that the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to the open state. This process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to the universal figure interval period (for example, 1 second) is set in the universal figure interval timer, and then the present process ends.

Next, the starting prize winning apparatus control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the flag during the support period is on. When a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2201, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202.

In a succeeding step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is a period in which the opened/closed state of the second starting winning device 33b is maintained, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2203, then it is decided in step S2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, when the timing for closing the second starting winning device 33b is currently in the open state, the normally variable flag is turned off in step S2205. In a succeeding step S2206, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in a step S2207, the second starting winning device 33b is set to the closed state.

Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening counter is "0". If an affirmative decision is made in step S2208, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2209, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery has been performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times based on that. If there is the remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "250") is set in the ordinary variable timer in step S2210, and then this processing is ended.

In addition, when the determination in step S2204 is negative, that is, in the interval period during which the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the timing for ending the interval period. When the time comes, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2211, and a value corresponding to the open time (in this example, "450" only in the high-ball entering state) is set in the normal variable timer in step S2212. Then, in step S2213, the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is performed. After that, this processing ends.

When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, if the specified number of game balls (e.g., 8) have entered the second starting prize device 33b, the second starting prize device 33b. May be immediately closed (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second start prize switch 224b is detected, and an affirmative determination is made). In this case, the process may proceed to step S2205).

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of description, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is once put on standby, and the reception interrupt process is executed.

When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001 and the command transmission from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. The command reception flag is turned on, and this reception interrupt processing ends. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in the predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Will be updated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is assumed to be the interrupt process executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the command determination process may be performed. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received by confirming the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at every predetermined interval.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value and the interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

If the power failure information is not set in step S3106, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the initialization process of the RAM 513 is performed from step S3115. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal in step S3108, the process at power recovery (when power failure is restored) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is returned, in step S3110 the power-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interruption is permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in step S3122 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power is cut off, and therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, the RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 513 that are backed up.

In the process of step S3122, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed after the process performed when the power is turned on, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is low and can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the command determination process is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination processing (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28) described above.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, and thus the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

In the processing of steps S3304 to S3306, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306, is it a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Then, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command and then performs the initialization process of the RAM 513. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 are initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the deviation of the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the adverse effects of Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout permission of the prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, this command determination processing is ended without performing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization processing of the RAM 513. That is, in the process of step S3307, the RAM 513 is prohibited from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received while the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, when the payout permission flag is turned on and the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309), the prize balls are not paid out, etc. Although a bad effect is caused to cause a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before power-off, In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on in order to permit the payout of prize balls. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer has ended, so that the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the award ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of award balls corresponding to the command to the total number of award balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the prize balls can be paid out early for the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer has ended, so that the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO) nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Returning to the flowchart of FIG. 30, when the command determination processing in step S3201 is finished, ball clogging detection processing for detecting whether ball clogging has occurred in the ball feeding device 63 is performed in step S3202. When the ball clogging detection process in step S3202 ends, in step S3203, a CR unit corresponding process related to the CR unit such as a ball lending operation is performed.

After step S3203, in step S3204, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and if it is decided that the state return operation has started, then the state return operation is executed. By this processing, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor occurs, the dispensing motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state). ..

After that, in step S3206, setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full tank is set, and when the lower plate is no longer full, Execute the setting of the plate full release status. In addition, in step S3207, the tank sphere-free state (ball-out state) or the tank sphere-free state (ball-present state) is set according to the change in the state of the tank sphere. That is, the tank sphere no switch is detected by the detection signal of the tank sphere no switch, and the tank sphere no state, the tank sphere no state setting is executed, and the tank sphere no state is lost, the tank sphere no state is released. Execute the setting.

After that, in step S3208, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is performed.

Subsequently, a payout control process of prize balls and ball rental is executed. More specifically, the payout amount setting process is performed in step S3209, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3211.

In step S3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to perform the ball removal processing by driving the payout motor on condition that the ball removal operation is not disabled and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3213, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a clogged state. Then, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, a normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

If the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In a succeeding step S3903, a holding information storage process is performed in which the information of the advance command output from the main control device 261 is stored in the holding information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. As described above, the advance command corresponds to information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b is the variation display triggered by the winning, the big hit and the small hit. It includes information indicating whether it is fluctuation information, information indicating a jackpot type, information indicating a type of reach, and the like.

The holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262, like the special variable holding area of the main control device 261, includes a first holding information storage area and a second holding information storage area, each of which has four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). It has a hold information storage area and one execution area. In the first pending information storage area, according to the reception history of the advance command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area), information on whether or not it is a jackpot, a jackpot type, and a jackpot. Information regarding whether or not information is displayed and information regarding variation display such as reach patterns (variation information) are stored in time series. Further, in the second suspension information storage area, the variation information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the second variation display (information stored in the second special variation suspension area). By adopting the configuration, the variation information about the first variation display triggered by the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, and the second variation display triggered by the entry into the second starting winning device 33b. It is possible to store four pieces of variation information regarding each of them. As a result, not only the execution areas of the first and second special fluctuation holding areas of the main control device 261, but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262. ..

Here, the pending information storage processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the advance command is received (whether or not the advance command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative decision is made in step S4101, the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4101, does the starting command correspond to the entry into the second starting prize device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) in step S4102? Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the advance command corresponds to a ball input (change information stored in the first special change hold area) of the first start winning device 33a, in step S4103. , The first variable hold counter Nd that counts the number of held variable information held in the first held information storage area is incremented by one.

In a succeeding step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type (in the present example, the jackpot is not won in the win/loss lottery triggered by the entry into the first starting prize device 33a, In the case where the small hit may be won, the information on whether the small hit or not), the reach pattern information, etc. are stored in the first reserved area of the first reserved information storage areas. ..

Further, in subsequent step S4105, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where intentional presentation of effect displays related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to give the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the count value is stored in the first pending information storage. Of the areas, the variation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous announcement counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 49, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). The continuous notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 9, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The advance notice type counter is periodically updated, and the value of the advance notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (previous notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, in the notice information storing process, when the variation information is stored in the pending information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notification flag which is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notification is derived.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success/failure determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give consecutive notices, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of consecutive notices. A plurality of advance notice success/failure determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice success/failure determination table and advance notice table to be referred to are selected according to the variation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, continuous notice lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, it is confirmed whether or not there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is already set to ON. Therefore, in the case where the existence of the holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and further, only the variation information corresponding to the complete deviation (disengagement in which the reach state does not occur) is stored in the first holding area. , A lottery with a series of notices will be held. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set, the continuous notice lottery is not performed.

In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106, when the value of the first fluctuation holding counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first holding information storage area, It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice by referring to the notice win/failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to the miss) .. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first holding information storage area, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach pattern and the game mode. Refer to to determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

In the hold icon setting process of step S4107, selection (lottery)/setting of which mode the hold icon 461 is derived is performed. For example, the patterns of the hold icons 461 are classified into ranks, the display rank indicating the rank of the hold icons 461 actually displayed is stored in the display rank storage area, and the display upper limit rank indicating the range in which the pattern of the hold icons 461 can be changed. Is stored in the upper limit rank storage area, and the pending change flag is set to ON when there is a difference between the display rank and the upper limit rank.

After step S4107, this process ends. As will be described later in detail, the hold icon 461 will be erased from the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the corresponding variable display is executed (started), but the hold icon 461 is When erased, a hold icon 461 (a picture simulating a game ball) may be launched by a cannon. In addition, there are patterns such as a pattern that does not appear to be launched when it is launched, a launch position (direction in which the display of the game ball flies), a launch position (the position of the cannon), and a pattern in which the launch device (manual etc.) changes. is there.

In addition, in the case of affirmative determination in step S4102, that is, in the case where the advance command corresponds to the entry into the second starting prize-winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second variation suspension counter Ne that counts the number of suspensions of the variation information stored in the second suspension information storage area is incremented by one.

After that, in step S4109, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, the information on the jackpot type, the information on whether or not it is a jackpot, the information on the reach pattern, etc. Store in the first area. In a succeeding step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the holding area in which the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 of the second holding information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous announcement lottery process for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement is performed. The continuous announcement lottery process of step S4111 only corresponds to the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4106 corresponding to the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, and a description thereof will be omitted. After step S4111, in step S4112, a hold icon setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3913.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying a decorative design. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO, and the upper, middle, and lower patterns used for setting each out-of-design symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added by using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values randomly change.

When the big hit state occurs, the big hit decoration symbol counter CO determines the pattern (big hit pattern) when the decoration pattern display device 42 stops changing, and in the present embodiment, as the big hit decorative symbol counter CO. , 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 8 and returned to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

This big hit decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S3905, and is stored in the big hit decoration symbol counter buffer. Then, as will be described later, at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives a symbol command corresponding to the jackpot from the main control device 261, the value of the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is read from the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553.

Further, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed during the probability jackpot and a probability variation jackpot stop decorative pattern table that associates the value of the decorative symbol counter CO during jackpot with a combination of decorative patterns that are normally stopped and displayed during a jackpot. There is a normal big hit stop decorative design table that is associated with the value of the big hit decorative design counter CO.

When the sub controller 262 receives a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped from the main controller 261, the value of the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer, On the basis of the probability variation big hit stop decorative design table, for example, if the counter value is 0, "1" (doublet), if 1 "2" (double), a set of big hits Determine the match. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. You can

Further, when the sub controller 262 receives a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped from the main controller 261, the value of the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer. Based on the normal big hit stop decorative design table, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1, it is "2" (doublet), if it is 2 to 4, "4" (doublet), 5 , 6, “6” (the doublet), and 7, 8 “8” (the doublet), and the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined.

In addition, in the case of winning the probability variation jackpot, if the probability variation jackpot design is stopped and displayed, and if it is taught that it is a probability variation jackpot (the probability variation mode is given), and if the probability variation jackpot is won, When the probability variation un-teaching flag (ON state when not taught) that can be distinguished from the case where the probability variation big hit is not taught is provided, the decorative pattern based on the reception of the pattern command corresponding to the probability variation big hit. At the time of setting the stop symbol, the probability variation uninstructed flag is set.

Each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determines the combination of each stopped symbol in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning/winning lottery is missed. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each. The stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The respective symbol counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a front/rear outreach symbol buffer in the RAM 553, a reach symbol buffer other than outrear/reach, and complete It is stored in any of the out-of-design symbol buffers.

Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the upper symbol counter CL is the update time, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol counter CM is the update time. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative decision is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative decision is made in step S4002. If the upper symbol counter CL is updated (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the middle symbol counter CM is updated (YES in step S4002), the process advances to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if the update time of the lower symbol counter CR (NO in both steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, The calculation result is set as the current value of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update processing, and the update times of the respective counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

Then, in step S4006, whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same) is determined. If it is determined and it is a reach symbol combination (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display regions and the symbol in the middle symbol display region are the same). Determine whether. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and rear deviation symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of front and rear deviating symbols (front and rear deviating reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is before and after the RAM 553. This is stored in the out-reach pattern buffer, and this processing ends. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of symbols other than front and rear (reach other than front and rear) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. Are stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

If the combination is a combination other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the detachment symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the detachment symbol (completely detached symbol), so in step S4011, the The combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete deviation symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a holding process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative decision is made in step S4201, it is decided in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second variation suspension counter Ne is larger than "0". When a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when the variation information of the second variation display is not stored in a suspended manner, the process proceeds to step S4203 and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and the first variation display is digested when the second variation display is held and stored. There is no such thing. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is retained and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than “0”, the fluctuation pattern command is displayed as the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It is determined which of the fluctuation information of the above is held. Of course, the variation pattern command is given information as to which variation information, the first variation display or the second variation display, corresponds to, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is changed to the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display has.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first suspension information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first holding information storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of →execution area, hold second area→hold first area, hold third area→hold second area, hold fourth area→hold third area. After step S4204, the process moves to step S4207.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of variation information for the second variation display is stored in suspension, the value of the second variation suspension counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4205.

In subsequent step S4206, a process of shifting the data stored in the second suspension information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding information storage area to the execution area side. The holding first area→the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area→holding first area, holding third area→holding second area, holding fourth area→holding third area. After step S4206, the process moves to step S4207. In the present embodiment, the number of execution areas of the suspension information storage area is one, and the data stored in the first suspension information storage area and the second suspension information storage area are displayed in a variable display corresponding to the data. When it is called, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step S4207, advance notice setting processing for determining the type of display effect used for continuous advance notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON. Since this is not performed, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when a positive determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, what kind is it, and if it is not a jackpot, what is the reach pattern? , The type of continuous notice is determined by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at a desired timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Each holding area of the holding information storage area and the execution area are provided with a holding icon storage area for storing the type of the holding icon 461. The information regarding the holding icon 461 is also stored in the holding information storage area described above. The data is shifted in the area data shift processing.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon 461 in accordance with the data shift, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, every one variable display is consumed (executed), the most. The hold icon 461 located on the left side is deleted, and the hold icon 461 located on the right side is shifted to the left by one (the display location is moved). After step S4208, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in step S4208, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon 461, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set to ON, the hold change effect of the hold icon 461 is performed. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to increase the rank of the hold icon 461 when the lottery is won (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded), and a new display rank storage area is added. The display rank is stored. In the redrawing process, the holding icon 461 is drawn at a corresponding position based on the information (display rank) of the display rank storage area of each holding area of the holding information storage area. In addition, when the display rank is increased, it is determined whether the display rank of the display rank storage area and the upper limit rank of the upper limit rank storage area are the same, and if they are the same, the pending change flag is set to OFF. ..

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a display setting process is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, etc., and displays the display pattern of the variable display of the decorative symbol, etc. decide. Then, control such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45 is performed.

The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, the symbols are cooperated with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45. The variable display of is continued.

Further, when the variable display is started, when the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON, each situation is determined based on the change information of the change pattern command. The table corresponding to is used to determine the type of continuous notice to be derived for variable display, to determine the derivation of notice production different from the continuous notice, and to display corresponding to the operation of the production button 125 or the like. Or Furthermore, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing an effect control during a big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command for notifying the start of the hit state has been received from the main control device 261. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when not only the opening command received at the start of the big hit state but also the small hit opening command received at the start of the small hit state, a positive determination is made in step S4701.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4701, then in step S4702 a "10RS" or "10RN" is sent to the round grasp counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds, based on the information contained in the opening command. If there is, "10" is set, and if "4RS", "4" is set. Alternatively, “1” is set to the round grasp counter based on the information included in the small hit opening command.

After that, in step S4703, if it is a big hit, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the setting of the lighting state of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is ended. Alternatively, if it is a small hit, the opening effect for 1 second is set, and then this processing is ended. It should be noted that the sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes during the jackpot state. You will choose and let it run.

When a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether a round command is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if it is a big hit, the production is set during a round of up to 30 seconds, and then this processing is ended. Alternatively, if it is a small hit, the effect is set during the round of 1.8 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4706, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if it is a big hit in step S4708, the effect is set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

If a negative decision is made in step S4706, it is decided in step S4709 whether or not an ending command is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4709, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if it is a big hit in step S4711, the ending effect is set for 10 seconds, and then this processing is ended. Alternatively, if it is a small hit, the ending effect is set for 0.4 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, the effect is set by being divided into each period such as an opening period (1 second), a round period (1.8 seconds), and an ending period (0.4 seconds). Instead, the setting is made so that the production (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

If a negative decision is made in step S4709, it is decided in step S4712 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If a negative decision is made in step S4712, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4712, then in step S4713 the ending display is immediately terminated, and setting is made such that it is in the normal gaming state in which variable display is carried out. In other words, it is determined whether the time saving start command or the probability variation start command is received, and if the probability variation start command is received, the probability variation uninstructed flag is confirmed and whether or not it is set to ON. Determine whether. When the time saving start command is received, the pullback stage is derived, and when the probability variation start command is received and the probability variation uninstructed flag is set to OFF, the probability variation stage is derived, and the probability variation stage is derived. When the start command is received and the probability variation uninstructed flag is set to ON, processing for deriving the pullback stage is performed. After step S4713, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3908, a variation stop process relating to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4401, in step S4402, processing for stopping and displaying the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is carried out.

After step S4402, in step S4403, it is determined whether the pullback stage is derived and the probability variation uninstructed flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, that is, if it is instructed that the variation display is in the probability variation mode this time, in step S4404, processing for changing from the “pullback stage” to the “probability variation stage” is performed. To do.

After step S4404, or if a negative determination is made in step S4403, or if a negative determination is made in step S4401, it is determined in step S4405 whether a support end command has been received. If a negative decision is made in step S4405, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the case of affirmative determination in step S4405, in step S4406, the effect stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed from the "pullback stage" to the "normal stage". After that, this processing ends.

Next, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received. If a negative decision is made in step S4501, this processing is ended as it is. The various pieces of variation information included in the variation pattern command may be stored in the execution area of the suspension information storage area or may be stored in a separate storage area. Further, for example, by turning on a flag corresponding to the case where the process corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command is performed in the holding process (see FIG. 36) and the variable display is set in the display setting process, The flag may be turned off, and by checking the flag, it may be determined whether or not the variation pattern command is received.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the variable display corresponds to the big hit or the out-of-front/reach reach. In the present embodiment, the number of seconds of the variation time corresponding to the super-reach effect that occurs when the jackpot or the out-of-front/reach reach is any one of "13, 16, 20, 22, 25, 27, 30". Therefore, "13 seconds, 16 seconds, 20 seconds" can be selected only when the handover effect (pseudo ball effect) in which the pseudo ball effect device 49 (see FIG. 4 etc.) is used is performed. .. Further, the variation time of "25 seconds, 30 seconds" can be selected both when the hand-over effect is performed and when the super reach effect is performed in which the hand-over effect is not performed. On the contrary, "22 seconds, 27 seconds" is a variable time that can be selected only when the super reach effect in which the hand over effect is not performed is performed.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4502, then in step S4503, it is decided whether or not the variation time is "25 seconds" or "30 seconds". If an affirmative decision is made in step S4503, a succession effect lottery (using a corresponding random number counter and a table for judging a win) is carried out in a step S4504, and it is judged in a step S4505 whether or not the win is made.

When a negative determination is made in step S4503, it is determined in step S4506 whether or not the variation time is "13 seconds", "16 seconds", or "20 seconds".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4505 (when winning is performed in the takeover effect lottery), or when an affirmative determination is made in step S4506, the takeover effect flag is set to ON in step S4507.

In a succeeding step S4508, processing for deciding a pattern of the hand-over effect is performed. That is, basically, it is determined in what combination and how long the pseudo-ball effect is continued according to the variation time, and the end of the takeover effect is determined according to whether or not it is a big hit. In this example, 1 to 6 (this value sets the upper limit for each model, corresponding to each scene of the hand-over effect. In this example, the pseudo-sphere effect is the maximum as the hand-over effect corresponding to one variable display. A scenario progress storage area having a storage area divided into 6 addresses) is provided, and the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, and the fourth effect passage 424 are provided. , And which color of the lower unit 403 the pseudo-sphere of which color is to be derived are stored in order, and the storage area corresponding to the pseudo-sphere effect in progress or the subsequent pseudo-sphere effect display is indicated by the pointer. It is like this.

In addition, when the hand-over effect is generated from the mode in which the hold icon 461 is displayed, the color of the hold icon 461 (in this example, the display is a mode simulating a game ball and the color may be changed). Accordingly, the pseudo sphere FB used in the pseudo sphere effect is determined. Further, whether or not the type (color in this example) of the pseudo sphere FB (or the pseudo sphere display) is changed in the middle of the hand-over effect (refer to the content of the hand-over effect, the upper rank storage area, etc.). Decide). In addition, the details of the pattern such as the connecting effect are determined by performing a pattern lottery.

Before the pseudo ball effect is started, the launch display of the game ball (pseudo ball) on the decorative symbol display device 42, the effect display of the sub display device 48, and the display of the light emission effect part 47a are performed, and during that time. Then, preparation for the pseudo-sphere production is performed. For example, in the connection effect in the decorative symbol display device 42 between the first effect passage 421 and the second effect passage 422, when the color of the pseudo sphere display changes from silver (gray) to blue, the first effect A silver pseudo sphere FB is set at the upper end (entrance) of the passage 421, and a blue pseudo sphere FB is set at the upper end (entrance) of the second effect passage 422. In addition, when the silver pseudo sphere FB is used, it is determined whether or not the silver sphere flag is on, and when it is on, the process of using the silver pseudo sphere FB of the upper storage room 408 is performed. And a process of turning off the silver ball flag. On the other hand, when it is off, the process of using the silver pseudo sphere FB of the lower storage room 408 and the process of turning on the silver ball flag are performed.

In a succeeding step S4509, a scenario control timer as a remaining time measuring means (a remaining time grasping means, a constitution of the grasping means) and a lap timer are set. The scenario timer confirms the end timing of each scene of the hand-over effect, and here, from the start of the variable display, the decorative symbol display device 42 is launched, the sub-display device 48 is used for the effect display, and the light emission effect unit. The value corresponding to the guide display (in this example, the time is constant (for example, 7 seconds)) consisting of the display 47a is set. In addition, the scene of the hand-over effect is the first corresponding scene including the beginning scene of the guidance display, the pseudo-sphere effect of the first effect passage 421, and the subsequent connection effect (or the effect of ending the hand-over effect), the second effect passage. The second corresponding scene consisting of the pseudo-sphere effect 422 and the subsequent connection effect (or the effect of ending the succession effect), the pseudo-sphere effect of the third effect passage 423, and the subsequent connection effect (or the effect of ending the succession effect). The fourth corresponding scene consisting of a third corresponding scene consisting of, a pseudo ball effect of the fourth effect passage 424, and a subsequent connecting effect (or an effect of ending the succeeding effect), a pseudo ball effect of the lower unit 403, and the following. It is divided into a last scene consisting of a connecting production.

The lap timer is provided to grasp the difference between the target time and the actual time of the pseudo ball effect, and here, the value corresponding to the time (target time) until each pseudo ball effect is set is set. To be done. Further, the lap timer can continue counting even if the value becomes negative (even if the target time has passed). In this example, the lap timer is one, but the lap timers corresponding to the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, and the lower unit 403, respectively. May be provided.

After that, in step S4510, after setting the takeover upper limit counter and the takeover control counter for grasping how many times the pseudo-ball production is performed in total, the present process is ended. That is, the number of times of performing the pseudo sphere effect in the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, and the lower unit 403 is set. For example, in the case of the setting that the pseudo sphere effect of the first effect passage 421 is performed after the guide display (in the pseudo sphere display (joint effect) of the decorative pattern display device 42 that follows the effect), the handover effect ends. “1” is set in the handover upper limit counter. Further, for example, after the guidance display, when the pseudo ball effect is performed (one time) in the first effect passage 421 and the second effect passage 422 and the takeover effect ends, the takeover upper limit counter is set to “2. Is set, and after the guidance display, the pseudo ball effect is performed in the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, and the third effect passage 423, and when the effect transfer ends, the transfer upper limit counter is displayed. "3" is set, and after the guidance display, the pseudo ball effect is performed in the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, and the fourth effect passage 424, and the hand-over effect ends. In this case, the handover upper limit counter is set to “4”, and after the guidance display, the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, and the lower unit 403 are simulated. When the ball effect is performed and the hand-over effect is finished, the hand-over upper limit counter is set to "5". Further, "0" is uniformly set to the takeover control counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S4502, a negative determination is made in step S4505, and a negative determination is made in step S4506, an effect pattern for variable display other than the hand-over effect is determined in step S4511. After that, this processing ends.

Next, the takeover effect execution process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the handover effect flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S4601, the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4601, the scenario control timer and the lap timer are decremented by 1 in step S4602. In a succeeding step S4603, it is determined whether or not the value of the scenario control timer is 0. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4603, in step S4604, the value of the takeover control counter is incremented by 1, and the pointer indicating any of the six storage areas of the scenario progress storage area is updated.

In a succeeding step S4605, it is determined whether or not the value of the takeover control counter is larger than the value of the takeover upper limit counter. If a negative decision is made in step S4605, then in step S4606, a pattern of the joint effect is determined. Incidentally, as will be described in detail later, at this point, preparation for the pseudo-sphere effect has already been completed.

In the connection effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the takeover control counter and the value of the takeover upper limit counter are the same, and if they are the same, a pattern for ending the takeover effect is set. If different, a pattern for continuing the hand-over effect is set. Furthermore, when setting the end pattern and the continuation pattern, the value of the takeover control counter and the like are checked, and the time, content, and the like are set. In addition, regarding the place where the succeeding production is continued to the pseudo-sphere production performed and which pseudo-sphere production is connected (or not connected), the storage content of the area indicated by the pointer in the storage area of the scenario progress storage area Etc. to determine.

In a succeeding step S4607, a value corresponding to the time of the next scene is set to the scenario control timer, and a value corresponding to the time (target time) of the pseudo-sphere effect of the next scene is set to the lap timer. After that, in step S4608, a process for starting the pseudo sphere effect is performed, and the present process ends.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4605, that is, if the takeover effect is completed, then in step S4609, the takeover effect flag is turned off, and then this processing is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4603, that is, if the current scene is not at the end stage (during the pseudo-ball production), it is determined in step S4610 whether or not the end point detection switch is detected. Determine. The production passages 421 to 424 and the lower unit 403 are each provided with an end point detection switch.

If a negative decision is made in step S4610, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4610, then in step S4611, processing for calculating the time difference from the target time of the pseudo ball effect is performed. That is, by referring to the value of the lap timer, it is possible to grasp how much the time is shorter or longer than the target time.

In a succeeding step S4612, a setting is made to absorb the time lag of the pseudo ball effect calculated in step S4611 in the connecting effect. For example, when a cut-in effect in which the character is derived with a predetermined dialogue is performed in the middle of the connecting effect performed in the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, the time of the cut-in effect is adjusted. As a result, the "deviation" is absorbed, and the scene is finished at the scheduled time. Of course, the time adjustment is performed by a production other than the cut-in production (the progress speed of the pseudo sphere display is accelerated or delayed. The number of obstacles can be reduced or increased, or it can be simplified or difficult. It may be possible to introduce a disturbing character or device, or an assisting character or device, etc.). The "deviation" of the pseudo sphere effect of the lower unit 403 is eliminated by the display effect of the jackpot teaching in the decorative symbol display device 42 performed during the remaining time of the variable display corresponding to the hand over effect (the length of the display effect is changed). Adjust).

In a succeeding step S4613, processing for starting the connection effect is performed. Thereafter, in step S4614, it is determined whether or not the value of the takeover control counter and the value of the takeover upper limit counter are the same. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4614, that is, if the final scene of the hand-over effect is not present and there is no next pseudo-sphere effect, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S4614, preparation for the pseudo sphere effect for the next scene is made in step S4615. That is, the pseudo sphere effect of the present embodiment is performed by passing a predetermined type of pseudo sphere FB through the connection passage 406a of the effect passage member 406 (or by passing through the lower unit 403). Since the type is determined at the start of the variable display, the corresponding pseudo sphere FB is set at the upper end (entrance) of the corresponding effect passage member 406 based on the determination item (for the lower unit 403). Sets the corresponding pseudo sphere FB above the first connection passage 434).

As described above, in the takeover effect, it is possible to freely set which order of the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, and the fourth effect passage 424 is used. Is. For example, when the variation time corresponding to the hand-over effect is short, not only the pattern in which the pseudo ball effect ends in failure at an early stage, but also the shortcut (for example, the first effect passage 421→, the fourth effect passage 424→the lower unit 403) is selected. It is desirable to provide a pattern that is done and ends in success. That is, the connection effect (effect of pseudo-sphere display) that connects the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, and the pseudo ball effect of the lower unit 403, Since it is performed by the decorative pattern display device 42, it is possible to freely connect pseudo-sphere effects without difficulty. Further, by providing a pattern for performing the reverse flow of the pseudo sphere FB (for example, the first effect passage 421→the third effect passage 423→the second effect passage 422), the effect variation can be significantly increased (however, here. The "backflow" does not mean that backflow from the lower end side to the upper end side of the connection passage 406a of the effect passage member 406).

If the final result of the hand-over effect is “success”, the pattern taught by the decorative pattern display device 42 (the lower unit 403 is used as a jackpot type teaching), and the pseudo sphere FB is derived to the lower unit 403. There is one or both of the patterns to be taught by that, and in the case of “failure”, the decorative pattern display device 42 teaches (it is difficult to understand just by not displaying the pseudo sphere FB). Further, regarding the instruction whether to continue the pseudo-sphere effect on the way to the next, in the case of “success (continuation)”, the pattern taught by the decorative symbol display device 42 and the next movable accessory moving region 404. There is one or both of the patterns to be taught by deriving the pseudo sphere FB in (effect passage member 406), and in the case of “failure”, the decorative symbol display device 42 is taught.

For example, a scenario storage area for storing which of the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, and the lower unit 403 is used in which scene is provided, At the start of the variable display (in the transfer effect pattern determination process), the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, and the fourth effect passage 424 are stored in the storage area corresponding to each scene. Also, a value indicating the use of the lower unit 403 is stored, and with the progress of the hand-over effect, the storage of the scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the hand-over control counter is referred to (or, corresponding to each storage area of the scenario storage area). A pointer may be provided, and the pseudo ball effect and the connection effect may be set based on the information in the storage area indicated by the pointer).

In addition, in the present embodiment, with respect to the difference between the remaining time of the hand-over effect that may occur in the pseudo sphere effect and the remaining time of the corresponding variable display, it is configured to be completely eliminated during the variable display. It may be configured to carry over the elimination of “(at least part of) the deviation” after the variable display. For example, after the variable display, adjustment may be made to shorten or shorten the time (the beginning of the big hit state) for notifying the start of the big hit state, or when the time shifts to the longer side, the change of the next special display device 43a, 43b. Even after the display is started, the hand-over effect may be continuously performed (the next variable display of the decorative pattern is shortened), and when it is shifted to the shorter side, the next special display device 43a, 43b is displayed. Even if the variable display is not started, the variable display of the next decorative design may be started (the variable display of the next decorative design becomes long).

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3909, the lighting pattern of the lamp/illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a command related to voice such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from main controller 261, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S3910.

In step S3911, other processing such as control setting for customer waiting effect is performed. That is, when the player is not playing the game for a prescribed time, it is configured to shift to the customer attraction mode or the energy saving mode, and the decorative symbol display device 42 does not display the decorative symbol as a customer waiting effect (instead of A series of moving images are displayed, or still images are displayed), and a demo screen display is displayed such that the screen becomes dark.

In step S3912, an external output process of transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to S3912 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3912 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3914 to determine whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3915. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After the power-off process is executed, the process loops endlessly.

As described in detail above, according to the first embodiment, a display device (a liquid crystal display device, a dot display device, or the like) is provided by a pseudo-sphere effect (movable accessory effect) using the pseudo-sphere FB as a movable accessory. It is possible to enjoy a production with a different taste from the production display by ). Further, any one of the first effect passage 421 and the third effect passage 423 of the left unit 401, and the second effect passage 422 and the fourth effect passage 424 (and the lower unit 403) of the right unit 402. The behavior of the moving pseudo sphere FB is taken over, and the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB of the other effect passages 421, 422, 423, 424 is taken over, and the connection by the pseudo-sphere display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed. The production will be performed. Therefore, although the pseudo-sphere effect in each of the effect passages 421, 422, 423, and 424 may have less effect patterns than the effect by the display device, a plurality of effect paths 421, 422, 423 are provided. , 424 can be combined to achieve a variety of effects, and even in a connection effect that connects the pseudo ball effects in the plurality of effect passages 421, 422, 423, 424, further effect variations. Can be increased. Therefore, while suppressing the complication of the configuration of each of the production passages 421, 422, 423, and 424, an analog production that makes the viewer visually overwhelmed by the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB and a virtual behavior of the pseudo sphere that is physically difficult. Can be displayed, and a series of magnificent productions can be derived that fuses with a digital production that connects the behavior of the pseudo-sphere well (allowing for flexibility in time and position etc.) with the pseudo-sphere production, It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, by dividing the pseudo sphere effect into a plurality, it is possible to suppress the deviation of each pseudo sphere effect. Furthermore, by sandwiching the connecting effect in the pseudo ball effect, it is possible to eliminate the deviation of the pseudo ball effect in the connecting effect. In addition, since the connecting effect is performed by the decorative pattern display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a bold connecting effect that cannot be executed by analog (for example, physically impossible) is derived. It is possible to broaden the range of productions. As a result, the game can be smoothly advanced while incorporating the analog effect, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the start point and the end point of each movable accessory moving area 404 including the connecting passages 406a of the effect passages 421, 422, 423, and 424 are located behind the decorative symbol display device 42 and visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Impossible or difficult Therefore, the pseudo sphere FB can be made to stand by at the starting point before the pseudo sphere effect, and the pseudo sphere effect and the connecting effect before and after the pseudo sphere effect can be more smoothly connected.

Further, an end point detection switch 416 for detecting the pseudo sphere FB approaching the end point of each movable type accessory movement region 404 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the pseudo sphere FB has reached the end point of the mobile accessory moving area 404, and the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB in the mobile accessory moving area 404 and the connection effect following the pseudo sphere effect. Can be connected more smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to perform a magnificent effect that is a combination of the pseudo-sphere effect and the connecting effect while the timings are properly adjusted, and it is possible to improve the effect of production. Further, it is possible to grasp that the pseudo sphere FB is caught in the middle of the movable accessory moving area 404.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the two effect passage members 406 (the first effect passage 421 and the third effect passage 423) of the left unit 401 and the two effect passage members 406 of the right unit 402 (the second effect passage). 422 and the fourth effect passage 424), four effect passage members 406 are provided, and the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 respectively provide the pseudo sphere FB. For this reason, the configuration for operating the pseudo sphere FB in each movable type accessory movement region 404 is simplified, and the time for circulating the pseudo sphere FB (after using the pseudo sphere FB in the pseudo sphere production, it is possible to set the start point) It is possible to reduce the time required until). Further, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the pseudo sphere FB and improve the convenience when the mobile accessory moving region 404 and its related members need to be replaced.

In addition, in this embodiment, each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 includes two silver (gray) pseudo spheres FB used as default pseudo spheres FB. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pseudo sphere FB, which is frequently used, is significantly deteriorated and the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 cannot be used due to the deterioration (need to be replaced). Further, the diameter of the pseudo ball FB is configured to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the pseudo sphere FB can be made relatively easy to see, and the pseudo sphere effect can be more thoroughly enjoyed.

In addition, in the connection effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42, the pseudo-sphere effects performed in the order of the first effect passage 421 →the second effect passage 422 →the third effect passage 423 →the fourth effect passage 424 are connected ( Not only the basic movement pattern), but also the second effect passage 422→the first effect passage 421 from the lower movable movable accessory moving area 404 to the upper movable accessory moving area 404. The sphere display is moved, or the procedure is skipped, such as the first effect passage 421→the third effect passage 423, or the first effect passage 421→the fourth effect passage 424 (or the lower unit 403) ( Application movement pattern) is possible. Therefore, it is possible to relatively increase the variation of the hand-over effect in which the pseudo-sphere effect and the connection effect are integrated, and to bring out the goodness of the pseudo-sphere effect device 49 sufficiently, suppress the monotonous feeling, and improve the interest. And so on.

Further, if a deviation occurs between the pseudo ball effect and the variation time (the value of the lap timer capable of measuring the difference from the target time of each pseudo ball effect is other than “0” at the end of each pseudo ball effect). If it becomes), the temporal deviation of the pseudo-sphere production will be eliminated in the subsequent joint production. For this reason, it is possible to connect the pseudo sphere effects more preferably, for example, when matching the period of the pseudo sphere effect and the fluctuation time, the temporal deviation or contradiction of the pseudo sphere effect, in the connection effect, It can be resolved as comfortably as possible. Therefore, the difference between the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the takeover effect is too large, or the predetermined takeover effect is not in time for the end of the corresponding variable display, and the next change display is started. After a while, it ends after a while, and the correspondence between the hand-over effect and the variable display is lost (it becomes impossible to determine what the hand-over effect suggests or teaches). It can be avoided.

In addition, in the case of eliminating the "deviation" of the time of the pseudo sphere effect in the connecting effect, it is necessary to generate the "pseudo sphere display" corresponding to the pseudo sphere after urgently calculating the time of the deviation. In this regard, in the connection effect, a still image such as a cut-in display is interposed, and the time is adjusted here. As a result, the burden of display control can be reduced.

A starting solenoid 413 is provided corresponding to the starting point of each movable accessory moving region 404 of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the pseudo sphere FB stays at the starting point, and the pseudo sphere can be made to stand by at the starting point shortly before the pseudo sphere effect. Further, the movement of the pseudo sphere FB (pseudo sphere effect) can be started at a timing matched with other effects or the like. Further, for example, compared to a configuration in which the pseudo sphere FB naturally (immediately) moves to the connecting passage 406a when the pseudo sphere FB reaches the starting point, the initial movement of the pseudo sphere FB in the movable accessory moving region 404 is stabilized. In addition, it is possible to adjust the moving speed of the pseudo sphere FB to be moved to each mobile type accessory moving area 404.

Further, the hand-over effect is to be carried out in such a manner as to take over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the start winning devices 33a and 33b located below the variable display device unit 35. Therefore, when a game ball enters the starting winning device 33a, 33b in a state where the variable display is not held, when the handing over effect is performed, the light emitting means built in the starting winning device 33a, 33b emits light. The decorative pattern display device 42 displays a game sphere (pseudo sphere) up to the upper sub display device 48, and the sub display device 48 displays the pseudo sphere to the left unit 401 or the right unit 402. Light emission display of the light traveling from the sub display device 48 to the left unit 401 or the right unit 402 is performed in the light emission effecting unit 47a. On the other hand, when the suspended variable display is executed and the hand-over effect is performed, the hold icon 461, which is a display of a pseudo sphere, is displayed to be launched up to the upper sub display device 48, and the sub display is displayed. A display for sending the pseudo sphere to the left unit 401 or the right unit 402 is performed by the device 48, and a light emission display of light traveling from the sub display device 48 to the left unit 401 or the right unit 402 is performed by the light emission effecting unit 47a.

In this way, from the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b to the moving type accessory moving area 404 (starting point of handing over effect) of the left unit 401 or the right unit 402 (the attention portion is moved to guide the player's line of sight). By a series of effect displays (guidance display), it is possible to further strengthen the connection between the ball entering the starting winning devices 33a and 33b and the pseudo ball effect of the left unit 401 or the right unit 402. Therefore, it is possible to make it clearer that the behavior of the game balls that have entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is carried over to the hand-over effect, and it is possible to make it easier to understand what kind of effect the hand-over effect is. .. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize the start point and the start timing of the takeover effect, so that the takeover effect can be enjoyed more reliably. Further, even if the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b and the starting point of the hand-over effect are separated from each other, the two can be connected to each other. Therefore, the arrangement of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b and the starting point of the hand-over effect are designed. The degree of freedom can be improved.

Further, by using the guide display, it is possible to change (adjust) the time from when the game ball enters the starting winning devices 33a and 33b until the hand-over effect is started without a feeling of strangeness. In that case, the takeover effect can be derived at a suitable timing. Further, for example, compared to the case where the hand-over effect is always immediately started when the hand-over effect is determined to be executed, the hand-over effect is another effect (especially, a variable display is stored on hold). In the case of), it is possible to avoid such a situation that Furthermore, it is possible to select the optimum start timing (taking into consideration the length of the hand-over effect, etc.) as the hand-over effect, and for example, in the case where the hand-over effect is unnecessarily extended by waiting for the start of the pseudo-ball effect. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the performance is deteriorated. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that raises the degree of expectation that a predetermined suggestion/teaching will be performed in the takeover effect, for example, by making a start of the takeover effect.

Further, when the time from the game ball entering the starting winning devices 33a, 33b until the start of the hand-over effect is extended, "guidance display" indicates that the start of the hand-over effect is waiting. It becomes a "standby display". For this reason, it is possible to make it easier for the user to understand that the start of the hand-over effect is waiting.

In the present embodiment, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 each include the storage member 408, and the storage member 408 is operated to move the pseudo sphere FB in the predetermined storage room 408 of the storage member 408. It is provided with a mechanism for moving to the starting point of the formula accessory moving area 404 and firing it toward the connecting passage 406a, or returning the pseudo sphere FB used for the pseudo sphere production to the original storage room 408. Therefore, the cycle of use of the pseudo sphere FB can be formed reliably and relatively smoothly. In particular, due to the presence of the storage member 408 in which the pseudo spheres FB can be put in and taken out, it is possible to use a plurality of pseudo spheres FB, and it is possible to improve the convenience and the performance.

Furthermore, since the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 each include two movable role moving regions 404 (rendering passage members 406), it is possible to achieve diversification of the pseudo ball rendering and the like. It can be suppressed. In particular, for example, after performing the pseudo sphere effect in the first effect passage 421 of the left unit 401, and while performing the pseudo sphere effect in the second effect passage 422 of the right unit 402, the third effect passage of the left unit 401. The preparation for the pseudo-sphere production in 423 can be sufficiently prepared. Therefore, it is possible to relatively smoothly perform the magnificent pseudo-sphere effect by the plurality of movable role moving areas 404. In addition, in each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, the pseudo sphere FB, the storage member 408, and the mechanism for operating the storage member 408 are commonly used in the plurality of movable accessory moving regions 404. , The left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are increased in size, the number of parts is increased, the manufacturing workability is reduced, and the convenience of managing the pseudo sphere FB can be improved. Further, in the present embodiment, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are basically the same, and are basically arranged to be vertically reversed with respect to each other. Therefore, it is possible to suitably and diversify the pseudo ball effect while reducing the manufacturing cost.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by displacing the storage member 408 itself, the pseudo sphere FB reaches the starting point of the movable accessory moving region 404 while being stored in the storage member 408, and the pseudo sphere FB moves. It has already been stored in the storage member 408 when the end point of the formula accessory moving area 404 is reached. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exchange the mobile accessory between the storage member 408 and the mobile accessory moving area 404 while suppressing the complexity of the pseudo ball rendering device 49.

In addition, the storage member 408 projects downward from the side portion of the lower surface on the side of the effect passage member 406, and even when the storage room 408 at the bottom is located at the start point of the movable accessory movement region 404, An auxiliary plate portion 412 that can close the lower end portion of the connection passage 406a is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo sphere FB that has passed through the connection passage 406a falls into the inner space of the main body portion 405 below the storage member 408. Further, since the auxiliary plate portion 412 is provided in the storage member 408, the passage on the end point side of the movable accessory moving region 404 can be opened and closed in conjunction with the displacement of the storage member 408, for example, separately. It is possible to simplify the configuration and control as compared with the case where the shutter or the like is provided.

Further, each storage room 408 of the storage member 408 is associated with the type of the pseudo sphere FB. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the pseudo sphere effect and the like while orderly managing the pseudo sphere FB in the pseudo sphere effect device 49, and it is possible to more easily give a predetermined suggestion or instruction in the pseudo sphere effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance and the like while suppressing a mistake in the type of the pseudo sphere FB to be used and an increase in the time required for selection when taking out. Further, although changing the type of the pseudo sphere FB is not so easy as compared with the case of using a predetermined display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the player can be more interested in the change. Further, it is possible to avoid contact between the pseudo spheres FB, reduce damage and deterioration of the pseudo spheres FB, and improve durability. It should be noted that examples of different types of mobile accessory include those having different colors, patterns, sizes, shapes, materials, and the like.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 53, the pseudo sphere effect device 801 of the present embodiment includes a vertically-extending rectangular tube-shaped main body portion 802 and a substantially U-shaped tubular effect passage member 803 whose both ends are connected to the main body portion 802. , A storage member 804 (rotary storage board) for storing the pseudo sphere FB that is not used. The effect passage member 803 is the same as the effect passage member 406 of the first embodiment, includes a connection passage 805 through which the pseudo sphere FB can pass, and has one main body portion as in the first embodiment. A pair is provided above and below 802. Hereinafter, the upper effect passage member 803 is also referred to as an “upper effect passage member 806”, and the lower effect passage member 803 is also referred to as a “lower effect passage member 807”.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the storage member 804 of the present embodiment, the portion between the double annular shapes in the front view is evenly divided into eight along the circumferential direction, and each of the divided areas is divided into eight parts. , A storage room 808 capable of storing the pseudo sphere FB. As shown in FIG. 53, a storage motor 810 including a stepping motor is connected to the central portion of the storage member 804 via a shaft 809.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 53, in each of the storage chambers 808, the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the storage member 804 are the back surface of the storage member 804 that is connected to the shaft 809. Inclining toward the center side of the storage member 804 toward the surface side opposite to the side. further. In the storage room 808, the front side of the storage member 804 is open and the back side of the storage member 804 is closed. However, the storage member 804 is made of a transparent material, and the pseudo sphere FB stored in the storage room 808 is visible from the outside of the storage member 804.

In the present embodiment, the storage member 804 is provided so as to be connected to the surface of the main body 802 on the opposite side to the side to which the effect passage member 803 is connected. Further, in the main body 802, a predetermined storage room 808 which is the highest position for rotating the storage member 804, a predetermined storage room 808 which is the lowest position, and the inside of the main body 802. A receiving port 811 and a returning port 812 are provided so as to communicate with the space. In addition, in the present embodiment, the lower surface (inner bottom surface) of the storage room 808 at the lowest position and the lower edge of the return port 812 are the floor of the lower end of the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807. It is located slightly below the plane. The receiving port 811 is provided at a height between the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807.

In addition, the pseudo-sphere rendering device 801 of the present embodiment includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped first movable floor 813, a second movable floor 814, and a third movable floor 815 that are vertically displaceable in the internal space of the main body 802. I have it. The second movable floor 814 is arranged below the first movable floor 813, and the third movable floor 815 is arranged below the second movable floor 814. The first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 have substantially the same shape and substantially the same size. In addition, although the outer dimensions of the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 are configured to be one size smaller than the inner dimension of the main body portion 802 in the horizontal direction, It is impossible for the floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 to be placed upside down.

As shown in FIG. 55, the first movable floor 813 has a connecting rod 816 connected at one side, and the connecting rod 816 is inserted through a slit (not shown) formed in the main body 802 and extending in the vertical direction. .. Further, adjacent to the main body portion 802, a pair of upper and lower pulleys 817 and a pair of upper and lower pulleys 817 are hooked, and a rubber annular belt member 818 (for example, a timing belt) and one pulley. An elevating motor 819 composed of a stepping motor connected to 817 is provided (a roller chain, a sprocket, or the like is also possible). The connecting rod 816 is connected to a part of the annular belt member 818, and when the elevating motor 819 is driven to rotate the annular belt member 818, the first movable floor 813 is vertically displaced.

The second movable floor 814 is also provided with the same drive mechanism as that of the first movable floor 813, and is provided on the opposite side of the drive mechanism of the first movable floor 813 with the main body portion 802 sandwiched therebetween. On the other hand, with respect to the third movable floor 815, the lifting solenoid 820 is only connected to the lower surface side.

The first movable floor 813 is at a position aligned with the floor surface of the upper end portion of the connection passage 805 of the upper stage production passage member 806, that is, the movable role moving region 821 (hereinafter, referred to as “the movement stage” including the connection passage 805 of the upper stage production passage member 806. A position that is aligned with the start point position of the upper movable type accessory movement area 822) and the floor surface of the upper end portion of the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807, that is, the movement including the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807. A position aligned with the starting point position of the formula accessory moving area 821 (hereinafter, referred to as “lower movable formula accessory moving area 823”) and the lower edge of the receiving port 811 of the main body 802 (hereinafter, referred to as “reception position”). ) Is displaceable between.

Further, a discharge prevention shutter 824 capable of restricting the movement of the pseudo sphere FB is provided corresponding to the receiving port 811. Further, an ejection sensor 825 capable of detecting the pseudo sphere FB in the storage room 808 which is the highest position among the storage members 804 is provided. That is, since the floor surface of the storage room 808 at the highest position is inclined downward toward the receiving port 811 side, the discharge prevention shutter 824 is opened to open the storage room at the highest position. The pseudo sphere FB 808 is led out to the first movable floor 813 (or the second movable floor 814) at the receiving position via the receiving port 811.

In addition, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 (the upper surface and the mounting surface of the pseudo sphere FB) of the present embodiment include the storage member 804 from the effect passage member 803 side. It inclines downward toward the side. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the first movable floor 813 (or the second movable floor 814) at the receiving position is located slightly below the lower edge portion of the receiving port 811, and is led out from the receiving port 811. It is difficult for the simulated sphere FB to return to the receiving port 811. Further, when the discharge sensor 825 detects that the pseudo sphere FB is discharged from the storage room 808, the discharge prevention shutter 824 is closed. As a result, the pseudo sphere FB placed on the first movable floor 813 (or the second movable floor 814) does not return to the receiving port 811.

The second movable floor 814 is at a position aligned with the floor surface of the lower end portion of the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807, that is, the end point position of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, the receiving position, and the upper stage production passage member 806. It is provided so as to be displaceable between a position aligned with the floor surface of the lower end of the connection passage 805, that is, the end position of the upper movable accessory moving region 822.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second movable floor 814, which is the end point position of the lower mobile accessory movement region 823, is continuous with the floor surface of the lower end portion of the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807 (or 2 The movable floor 814 is slightly lower than the movable floor 814) and is continuous with the return port 812 provided in the main body 802 and the floor of the storage room 808 which is the lowest position of the storage members 804. (Or the second movable floor 814 is located slightly above). That is, the end point position of the lower mobile accessory movement region 823 of the present embodiment is also a “return position” at which the pseudo sphere FB can be returned to the storage member 804. In addition, as described above, the upper surface of the second movable floor 814 is inclined downward toward the storage member 804 side, and the floor surface of the storage room 808 at the lowest position is also separated from the main body 802. Since it inclines downward to the side to be separated, the pseudo sphere FB placed on the second movable floor 814, which is the end position of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, is the most likely to come through the return port 812. The data is stored in the storage room 808 at a low position, and after being stored in the storage room 808, it does not return to the return port 812 side.

Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the pseudo spheres FB located at the start points of the upper mobile type accessory moving region 822 and the lower mobile type accessory moving region 823 are respectively connected to the connecting passage 805 side. A start solenoid 826 is provided as a start assisting means for displacing the start solenoid 826. Therefore, even if the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 incline upward toward the effect passage member 803 side, the pseudo sphere FB can be reliably sent to the connection passage 805 side. Further, an end point detection switch 827 is provided as an end point detection means capable of detecting the pseudo sphere FB immediately before reaching the end points of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822 and the lower movable type accessory movement region 823.

In the present embodiment, the inner space of the main body 802 corresponds to the communication passage. Further, the highest position of the storage room 808 in the storage member 804 corresponds to the discharging position, and the lowest position of the storage room 808 corresponds to the receiving position. Further, the upper mobile accessory movement region 822 corresponds to a first mobile bonus movement region (of means C described later), and the lower mobile bonus movement region 823 corresponds to a second mobile bonus movement region. Equivalent to.

The third movable floor 815 is located below the end point position of the lower movable type accessory moving area 823 and the end point position of the lower movable type accessory moving area 823, and at the end point position of the lower movable type accessory moving area 823. It is configured such that it can be displaced between the displaced second movable floor 814 and the retracted position that does not interfere. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the configuration for raising and lowering them constitute the preparation assisting means, and the second movable floor 814, the third movable floor 815, and these. The structure for moving up and down constitutes storage assisting means.

Here, a description will be given of a mode of putting in and taking out the pseudo sphere FB when both the upper movable type accessory movement region 822 and the lower movable type accessory movement region 823 are used in one handover effect. For example, in the case where the pseudo sphere FB of the same color (for example, blue) is used in the pseudo sphere effect of the lower movable type accessory movement area 822 after the pseudo sphere effect of the upper movable type accessory movement area 822, FIG. As shown in FIG. 56, first, in order to perform a pseudo sphere effect in the upper movable accessory moving region 822, after receiving the blue pseudo sphere FB at the receiving position on the first movable floor 813, it is shown in FIG. As described above, the first movable floor 813 is moved to the start point of the upper mobile auditors product moving region 822, and the second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the upper mobile auditors product moving region 822. Then, the blue pseudo sphere FB is moved to the end point of the upper movable type accessory moving region 822 via the connection passage 805 of the upper stage production passage member 806, whereby the blue pseudo sphere FB becomes the second movable floor 814. It will be in the state of being placed on.

Subsequently, in order to perform the pseudo-sphere effect in the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, the second movable floor 814 is moved to the start point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, as shown in FIG. 56(c). The third movable floor 815 is moved to the end point of the lower movable accessory moving region 823. Then, the blue pseudo sphere FB is moved to the end point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823 via the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807, so that the blue pseudo sphere FB becomes the third movable floor 815. Will be stored in the storage member 804 via the. A storage sensor 828 capable of detecting the pseudo sphere FB in the storage room 808 at the lowest position among the storage members 804 is provided. In this example, the storage of the pseudo sphere FB is based on the detection information of the storage sensor 828. Is confirmed, the succession production is completed normally.

Next, a case will be described in which, after the pseudo sphere effect of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822, a pseudo sphere FB of a different color (eg, green→red) is used in the pseudo sphere effect of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823. .. First, as shown in FIG. 57(a), after receiving the green pseudo ball FB at the receiving position on the first movable floor 813 in order to perform the pseudo ball effect in the upper movable accessory moving region 822, FIG. As shown in (b), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the start point of the upper mobile auditors movement region 822, and the second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the upper mobile auditors movement region 822. Then, the green pseudo sphere FB is moved to the end point of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822 via the connection passage 805 of the upper stage production passage member 806, so that the green pseudo sphere FB becomes the second movable floor 814. It will be in the state of being placed on.

Then, in order to perform the pseudo sphere effect in the lower movable type accessory movement area 823, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the receiving position to receive the red pseudo sphere FB. Let Further, the second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the lower movable type accessory movement area 823, and the green pseudosphere FB is stored in the corresponding storage room 808. The second movable floor 814 remains at the end point of the lower movable accessory movement region 823 as it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the start point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, and the red pseudo sphere FB is passed through the connection passage 805 of the lower stage passage passage member 807. Then, the red pseudo sphere FB is stored in the storage member 804 via the second movable floor 814 by moving to the end point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823.

Next, a case will be described in which the pseudo sphere FB of a different color (for example, green→red) is used in the pseudo sphere effect of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822 after the pseudo sphere effect of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823. .. First, as shown in FIG. 58A, after receiving the red pseudo-sphere FB at the receiving position on the first movable floor 813 for the pseudo-sphere effect in the rear upper movable type accessory moving area 822, As shown in FIG. 58( b ), the first movable floor 813 is moved upward (for example, to the start point of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822) and at the same time, the pseudo-sphere effect is produced in the lower movable type accessory movement region 823. In order to do so, the second movable floor 814 receives the green pseudo sphere FB at the receiving position. Then, as shown in FIG. 58( c ), the second movable floor 814 is moved to the start point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, and the third movable floor 815 is set to the end point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823. To move. Then, the green pseudo sphere FB is moved to the end point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823 via the connection passage 805 of the lower stage production passage member 807, so that the green pseudo sphere FB becomes the third movable floor 815. Will be stored in the storage member 804 via the.

Subsequently, in order to perform a pseudo-sphere effect in the upper mobile accessory movement region 822, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the start point of the upper mobile accessory movement region 822. , The second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the upper mobile accessory movement region 822. Then, the red pseudo sphere FB is moved to the end point of the upper movable type accessory moving region 822 via the connection passage 805 of the upper stage production passage member 806, so that the red pseudo sphere FB becomes the second movable floor 814. It will be placed in the state.

In the present embodiment, after the pseudo sphere effect of the lower movable accessory moving region 823, the succeeding effect of using the pseudo sphere FB of the same color in the pseudo sphere effect of the upper movable accessory moving region 822 is 2 This is done only when using a certain silver-colored pseudosphere FB. Regarding the manner of putting in and out of the pseudo sphere FB in such a handover effect, different colors (for example, green → in the pseudo sphere effect of the upper movable type accessory moving area 822 after the pseudo sphere effect of the lower movable type accessory moving area 823). It is similar to the case of using the red-colored pseudo sphere FB (in the pseudo sphere effect of the lower mobile type accessory movement region 823, one of the pair of silver-colored pseudo spheres FB is used, and the lower mobile type accessory movement region is used). The other pseudo-sphere FB of the pair is used in the pseudo-sphere production of 823). The third movable floor 815 can be moved to the end point of the upper mobile accessory movement region 822, and the first movable floor 813 can be moved to the second movable floor 814 located at the start point of the upper mobile accessory movement region 822. When it is configured to be displaceable to a position where interference with the placed pseudo sphere FB can be avoided, after the pseudo sphere effect in the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, the upper movable type accessory movement region 822 It is also possible to execute the succession effect such as using the pseudo sphere FB of the same color in the pseudo sphere effect by using the pseudo sphere FB other than the two silver pseudo spheres FB.

As described above in detail, also in the second embodiment, basically, the same operational effect as that of the first embodiment is obtained. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by using the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814, each mobile accessory moving area 821 (upper mobile accessory moving area 822 and lower mobile accessory moving area 821) is moved. 823) and the storage member 804, the pseudo sphere FB can be moved in and out relatively smoothly, and the pseudo sphere effect can be relatively smoothly advanced. Also, for example, as in the case of one movable floor, the movable floor does not arrive in time by the time the pseudo sphere FB that has started moving from the start point reaches the end point (or the movable floor is moved quite quickly in order to make it in time). It is possible to more reliably avoid situations such as the need). Further, the mechanism for moving the pseudo sphere FB to the starting point of the mobile accessory moving area 821 and the like can be shared by the upper mobile accessory moving area 822 and the lower mobile accessory moving area 823. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience and performance while avoiding complication of the configuration.

Further, in the present embodiment, between the upper stage production passage member 806 (upper movable type accessory movement region 822) and the lower stage production passage member 807 (lower movable type accessory region 823) and the storage member 804, The main body 802 (inner space) communicates with each other, and a first movable floor 813 and a second movable floor 814 are provided in the inner space of the main body 802. Therefore, it is possible to more smoothly transfer the mobile accessory between the storage member 804 and the start point and the end point of the mobile accessory moving area 821. In addition, since the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 are provided in the inner space of the common main body portion 802, the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 are also movable up. The accessory moving area 822 and the lower moving type accessory moving area 823 can be commonly used. Therefore, the effect of increasing the convenience of the management of the pseudo sphere FB can be more remarkably achieved while suppressing an increase in the size of the pseudo sphere production device 801, an increase in the number of parts, a decrease in manufacturing workability, and the like. Becomes

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a third movable floor 815 that is displaceable between the end point of the lower movable type accessory movement area 823 and the retracted position below the end point is provided. Therefore, the first movable floor on which the pseudo sphere FB is mounted and the second movable floor 814 on which the pseudo sphere FB is not mounted are arranged at the start point and the end point of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822. Then, after displacing the pseudo sphere FB from the start point to the end point of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822, the second movable floor 814 is displaced to the start point of the lower movable type accessory movement region 823 to thereby generate the pseudo sphere FB. In the upper movable type accessory moving region 822 and the lower movable type accessory moving region 823, it is possible to move them without opening a space as much as possible. Therefore, for example, the pseudo sphere FB which has moved to the end point after moving in the upper movable accessory moving region 822 reaches the starting point of the lower movable accessory moving region 823 after passing through the storage member 804 once. It is possible to diversify the production compared to the configuration.

In addition, due to the presence of the third movable floor 815, the pseudo sphere FB placed on the second movable floor 814 arranged at the start point of the lower movable type accessory movement area 823 becomes the end point of the lower movable type accessory movement area 823. Even when it reaches, the pseudo sphere FB can be received by the third movable floor 815 and reliably returned to the storage member 804. Furthermore, for example, after the pseudo sphere effect in the lower movable type accessory movement region 823, the effect of performing the pseudo sphere effect in the upper movable type accessory movement region 822 can be performed relatively smoothly.

The starting point of each of the upper movable type accessory movement region 822 and the lower movable type accessory movement region 823 is different from the receiving position. Therefore, the starting solenoid 826 can be suitably installed (while avoiding interference with the storage member 804) corresponding to each start point, and the pseudo sphere FB discharged from the storage member 804 remains its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the mobile accessory moving region 821 starts passing through the starting point of the mobile accessory moving region 821.

Further, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 are inclined upward toward the connecting passage 805 side. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo sphere FB is inadvertently displaced into the connecting passage 805 when the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 move to the starting point. Further, when the second movable floor 814 and the third movable floor 815 move to the end point, the second movable floor 814, while preventing the pseudo sphere FB reaching the end point from returning to the connecting passage 805 side, Also, when the third movable floor 815 moves to the return position, the placed pseudo sphere FB can be guided to the storage room 808 of the storage member 804, and the pseudo sphere FB can be moved to the storage room 808 side. It is possible to avoid the situation in which a separate drive mechanism is required.

Further, the storage room 808 of the present embodiment is formed in a disk shape in a front view, and the storage rooms 808 are arranged side by side in a ring shape. Therefore, in a configuration that handles a plurality of types of pseudo spheres FB, the size of the storage member 804 can be suppressed, and the target pseudo sphere FB can be efficiently taken in and out of the storage member 804 that stores a plurality of pseudo spheres FB. be able to. That is, for example, when eight storage rooms for the pseudo sphere FB are provided and the storage rooms are arranged in a straight line, the discharge unit spans seven storage rooms from the storage room at one end to the storage room at the other end. However, when they are arranged in a circular shape, they need only be relatively displaced so as to straddle the four storage chambers 808.

Further, each storage room 808 of the present embodiment is set to a discharge position (highest position in this example) which is a position where the pseudo sphere FB is discharged (leaded out to the main body 802 side). The floor surface of 808 is inclined downward toward the main body 802. Therefore, in order to discharge the pseudo sphere FB stored in the storage room 808 displaced to the discharge position from the storage room 808, a drive mechanism for moving (for example, pushing out) the pseudo sphere FB to the main body 802 side is provided. It is possible to avoid the situation where it is necessary separately.

Further, when each storage room 808 is set to the receiving position (the lowest position in this example) which is the position for receiving the pseudo sphere FB, the floor surface of the storage room 808 moves downward to the side away from the main body 802. It is designed to incline. Therefore, in order to maintain the storage state of the pseudo sphere FB stored in the storage room 808 displaced to the receiving position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a separate shutter for regulating the displacement of the pseudo sphere FB is required separately. it can. Therefore, the pseudo sphere effect can be relatively smoothly executed while the configuration is simplified.

In addition, a discharge prevention shutter 824 is provided corresponding to the receiving port 811 provided in the main body 802 so that the storage room 808 at the discharge position is communicated with the internal space of the main body 802. By providing the discharge prevention shutter 824, the pseudo sphere FB stored in the storage room 808 at the discharge position is carelessly discharged (the pseudo sphere FB which is not scheduled to be discharged) from the storage room 808, or It is possible to prevent the situation in which the pseudo sphere FB is displaced from the main body 802 side in the direction in which it is stored in the storage room 808 at the discharge position. Therefore, the management control of the pseudo sphere FB can be performed more reliably and smoothly.

In addition, if it is only to prevent the pseudo sphere FB discharged from the storage room 808 at the discharge position to the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 from returning to the storage room 808 at the discharge position, It is also possible to displace the storage member 804 to a position that does not match the storage position 808 of the storage chamber 808, but in the process of positioning the predetermined storage chamber 808 to the discharge position, a storage chamber 808 other than the predetermined storage chamber 808 is disposed. It is not possible to prevent the pseudo sphere FB stored in the storage room 808 from being discharged to the main body 802 when it is in a state of matching the discharge position.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on the characteristic part. As shown in FIG. 59, the variable display device unit 851 of the present embodiment moves (flows down) the decorative pattern display device 852 as a takeover effecting means provided in the center of the game area (game board 30) and the game area. It is provided with a specific area entering means having a specific area 854 into which a game ball can enter and a specific winning unit 853 as a lottery means. The specific winning unit 853 is arranged on the upper area 855 provided above the decorative symbol display device 852, on the side of the decorative symbol display device 852 (on the right side when facing), and behind the semitransparent game board 30. A separation area 856 that configures a handover effect corresponding section and a lower area 857 that is arranged behind the lower portion of the decorative pattern display device 852 are provided.

In the upper area 855, a pair of left and right entrance openings 861 (entrances) are formed on both left and right sides, which are entrances into which the game balls moving in the game area enter the specific area 854. Further, the specific winning unit 853 opens and closes the pair of left and right blade members 862 (entrance opening/closing means) that are displaced between a closed position that closes each of the ball entrance openings 861 and an open position that opens. And a blade solenoid (not shown) to be operated. When the blade member 862 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entrance opening 861 is closed, the specific winning unit 853 is closed, and it is impossible to enter the specific area 854. On the other hand, when the blade member 862 is displaced to the open position and the ball entrance opening 861 is opened, the specific winning unit 853 is opened, and the ball is allowed to enter the specific area 854.

It should be noted that the blade member 862 is only for a predetermined time when there is a ball in the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b and a small hit is won in a win/loss lottery based on the winning. For example, it is opened for 1.8 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 862 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, and when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position and one is in the closed position. If it does, the other is also closed.

In addition, a ball entrance detection switch 864 capable of detecting a game ball entered through the left and right entrance openings 861 is provided. Whichever of the left and right ball entry openings 861 enters the upper area 855, it is discharged from the upper area 855 through the common discharge hole 865. A takeover detection switch 866 for detecting a game ball that has entered the discharge hole 865 is provided.

The game ball discharged from the upper area 855 is guided to the separated area 856. The separation area 856 includes a first branch 871 in which the game ball passage is branched into two, a second branch 872 in which the game ball passage is branched into three, and a sub-sorting device 873. In the first branch 871, the state that periodically guides the game ball to the side of the second branch 872 and the state where the gaming ball is guided to the outside of the specific winning unit 853 and further to the outside of the game area are changed. A distribution device 874 is provided. In this example, the first branch 871 is guided at a rate of 1/2 to the safe passage leading to the second branch 872.

Further, a first safe ball detection switch 875 that detects a game ball moving in a game ball passage (safe passage) that follows (connects or communicates with) the second branch 872 of the first branch 871, and a first branch 871. Among them, a first out ball detection switch 876 for detecting a game ball moving in a game ball passage (out passage) connected to the outside of the specific winning unit 853 is provided. When the game balls are guided to the out passage, 15 prize balls are played.

The second branch 872 is provided with a second distribution device 877 having a disk shape with a slope that lowers the center. The second distribution device 877 has a chance hole 878 leading to the lower area 857, a sub-challenge hole 879 leading to the sub-allocating device 873, three outside holes 880 connected to the outside of the specific winning unit 853, and further outside the game area. And are provided. The chance hole 878, the sub-challenge hole 879, and the three removal holes 880 have the same size, and are provided at equal positions centering on the central portion of the second distribution device 877. In the present example, in the second branch 872, the game ball passage (chance passage) leading to the lower area 857 is guided at a rate of 1/5, and the game ball passage leading to the sub-sorting device 873 at a rate of 1/5. You will be guided to (Challenge Passage).

Furthermore, a chance ball detection switch 881 that detects a game ball that has entered a chance hole 878, a challenge ball detection switch 882 that detects a game ball that has entered a sub-challenge hole 879, and a game ball that has entered a removal hole 880. And a second out-ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting. When a game ball enters the removal hole 880, 15 prize balls are played.

The game ball that has entered the chance hole 878 is launched by the chance solenoid 883 that changes its state between the excited state and the non-excited state at regular time intervals, and is guided to the lower region 857. That is, the game ball that has entered the chance hole 878 is guided to a position substantially the same as the lower stage region 857 or a position lower than the game ball rolling surface of the lower stage region 857. Therefore, the chance solenoid 883 is used to deliver the game ball to the lower area 857. It should be noted that instead of the solenoid, another driving mechanism (such as a device such as a conveyor) may be used to guide the game ball to the lower region 857, or the game ball may be guided to the lower region 857 only by potential energy. It may be configured to be possible.

The lower portion of the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 852 is a transmissive liquid crystal display portion (hereinafter, referred to as “transmissive display area 891”). Normally, an opaque display is derived also in the transparent display area 891, and together with other areas, effect display is performed on the entire display portion of the decorative symbol display device 852. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the chance ball detection switch 881 is detected, the transparent display area 891 becomes transparent, and the lower stage area 857 of the specific winning unit 853 arranged on the back side thereof is seen from the front. It is made visible. In addition, an immediately preceding detection switch 892 which is guided from the second branch 872 and detects a game ball immediately before entering the lower area 857 is provided at a position higher than the transparent display area 891. Illumination (not shown) that illuminates the lower region 857 is provided, and the lower region 857 is illuminated as the lower region 857 becomes visible from the front based on the detection by the immediately preceding detection switch 892. Is lit.

In the lower area 857, there is provided a final distribution device 893 in the form of a disk with a slope that lowers the center. The final distribution device 893 is provided with a V winning hole 894 and two removal holes 895. The V winning hole 894 and the two removal holes 895 have the same size as each other, and are provided at equal positions centering on the central portion of the final allocating device 893. In this example, in the lower area 857, the game balls enter the V winning holes 894 at a rate of 1/3.

Further, although not shown, a V winning detection switch for detecting a game ball entering the V winning hole 894, and a detachment detecting switch for detecting a game ball entering the detaching hole 895 are provided. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 894 (when the V winning detection switch is detected), 15 prize balls are played and the jackpot state (the first round of the jackpot state is The ball entry opening portion 861 corresponds to a small hit state in which the opening portion 861 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the second and subsequent rounds are derived). In addition, even when a game ball enters the removal hole 895, 15 prize balls are played.

In addition, the sub-sorting device 873, which guides the game balls that have entered the sub-challenge holes 879 of the second branch 872, has a disk shape with a slope that lowers the center. The sub distribution device 873 is provided with a sub V winning hole 896 and five removal holes 897. The sub-V winning hole 896 and the five removal holes 897 have the same size as each other, and are provided at equal positions around the center of the sub-sorting device 873. In this example, in the lower area 857, the game balls enter the sub-V winning holes 896 at a rate of 1/6.

Although not shown, a sub-V winning detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the sub-V winning hole 896 and a detachment detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the detaching hole 897 are provided. .. When a game ball enters the sub-V winning hole 896 (when the sub-V winning detection switch is detected), 15 prize balls are played and a jackpot state (first round of the jackpot state) Corresponds to a small hit state in which the ball entrance opening 861 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the second and subsequent rounds are derived).

In addition, the game ball passage in the remote area 856 is made of a transparent member, and the second distribution device 877 and the sub distribution device 873 have a shape that is open to the front and move in the remote area 856. The ball is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. However, the semi-transparent game board 30 is located in front of the distant area 856, and the visibility is lowered. Further, depending on the light emitting condition (reflection of light or the like) of various light emitting means, the visibility is more improved. It may decrease.

It should be noted that even when a game ball enters the removal hole 897, 15 prize balls are played. Further, in the present embodiment, the V winning hole 894 and the sub V winning hole 896 correspond to the second special ball entering portion, and the discharging portion from the other specific region 854 corresponds to the first special ball entering portion. .. Further, the V winning switch and the sub-V winning switch correspond to the second special ball detecting means, and the switch provided corresponding to the discharging portion from the other specific area 854 is the first special ball detecting means. Equivalent to. In addition, the big hit state (continuation from the small hit state to the big hit state and 15 prize balls) corresponds to the second prize, and the 15 prize balls correspond to the first prize. Further, various detection switches provided corresponding to the remote area 856 correspond to the progress detection means. Further, the lower area 857 corresponds to the finalizing section, and the immediately preceding detection switch 892 corresponds to the takeover effect end detecting means. In addition, the passage leading to the V winning hole 894 and the sub V winning hole 896 in the specific area 854 corresponds to the main passage, and the other passages correspond to the outside passages, and the first sorting device 874 and the second sorting device 877. Corresponds to the distribution means.

Next, the playability of the present embodiment and the presentation mode of the variable display device unit 851 will be described. First, also in this example, the first start winning device 33a without the blade member is disposed below the variable display device unit 851, and the second starting winning device with the blade member is disposed below the first starting winning device 33a. 33b, a variable winning device 32 arranged below the second start winning device 33b, and a through gate 34 arranged in a left side region (left side of the variable display device unit 851). In the winning/winning lottery, which is performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting winning device 33a or 33b, the jackpot is won at 1/300 (so-called direct hit jackpot), and when the jackpot is not won. , 1/5 will win the small hit state. Further, in this example of the mode, there is no probability variation mode, and there are a normal mode and a time reduction mode (for 20 times of fluctuation display or for 50 times). As the jackpot state, there are a 7-round jackpot state in which the time reduction mode for 20 times of variable display is given after the jackpot state ends, and a 7-round jackpot state in which the time reduction mode for 50 times of variable display is given, the second round From the 7th round, the variable winning device 32 (15 prize balls per winning prize) is opened for 30 seconds or 10 prizes are used as an opportunity to end the round.

When the small hit is won, the blade member 862 is set to the open position for 1.8 seconds, and the ball can enter the specific area 854. The game ball that has entered the specific area 854 through the entrance opening 861 is detected by the entrance detection switch 864, and the behavior in the upper area 855 is visually recognized from the front. Based on the detection of the ball entry detection switch 864 in the upper area 855, the effect display for notifying the start of effect is derived in the decorative symbol display device 852 (entire display section). A game ball moving in the upper area 855 enters the separation area 856 by entering the discharge hole 865.

The remote area 856 arranged on the side of the decorative symbol display device 852 and behind the semitransparent game board 30 has low visibility from the front, and the game ball moving in the remote area 856 is hard to see. Has become. In particular, in the state where the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 852 is being performed, the frame surrounding the decorative symbol display device 852, the upper area 855, and the lower area 857 emits light, which makes it more difficult to visually recognize (approaching closer). You can see it).

In addition, when the game ball enters the discharge hole 865 (when the takeover detection switch 866 is detected), the decorative symbol display device 852 starts the takeover effect for taking over the behavior of the game ball. For example, as the effect display of the hand-over effect, an effect display in which a pseudo sphere (pseudo sphere display) may be dropped from the route, an effect display in which a character appears to compete for the pseudo sphere display, or the pseudo sphere has its own will An example of such a display is a display that allows the user to overcome obstacles (variable display of decorative patterns may be displayed in parallel). In the present embodiment, the takeover detection switch 866 of the discharge hole 865 constitutes the entrance detection means, but the entrance detection switch 864 serves as the entrance detection means and the decoration is triggered by the detection of the entrance detection switch 864. The symbol display device 852 may be configured to start the hand-over effect, and the game ball detected by the ball detection switch 864 may be configured to directly enter the separated area 856.

After that, either the first safe sphere detection switch 875 or the first out sphere detection switch 876 of the first branch 871 is detected. Change. That is, when the detection of the first out-ball detection switch 876 is performed, the effect display is terminated in the decorative symbol display device 852 in a mode indicating “disengagement”. On the other hand, when the first safe ball detection switch 875 is detected, the effect display is continued (a display for clearing a small obstacle is derived, etc.).

In addition, when the game ball that reaches the second branch 872 enters the chance hole 878 of the second distribution device 877, based on the detection of the chance ball detection switch 881, the corresponding takeover by the decorative symbol display device 852 is carried out. After performing an effect (for example, a display effect that the lower area 857 is focused and a game ball may come out), based on the detection of the immediately preceding detection switch 892, the transparent display of the decorative symbol display device 852 is performed. The region 891 is made transparent (transparent), and the lower region 857 is visually recognized. In this example, when the game ball is led out to the lower area 857, the jackpot is most likely to be expected.

After that, if the game ball led out to the lower area 857 enters the V winning hole 894, a display for teaching the occurrence of the big hit state is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 852 (for example, only the area above the transparent display area 891). Or the entire display unit), and the jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the game ball reaching the second branch 872 enters the sub-challenge hole 879 of the second distribution device 877, the decorative pattern display device 852 responds based on the detection of the challenge ball detection switch 882. Display effect. In this example, even if the game ball enters the sub-challenge hole 879, the transparent display area 891 of the decorative symbol display device 852 is not set to the transparent state (transparent), and the effect display on the entire display portion of the decorative symbol display device 852 is performed. To continue. Then, when the game ball enters the sub-V winning hole 896, the decoration symbol display device 852 (entire display section) is displayed to teach the occurrence of the big hit state, and the big hit state is started. In this example, the challenge ball detection switch 882 includes an upstream first challenge ball detection switch 882a and a downstream second challenge ball detection switch 882b. Further, when the game ball is in the specific area 854, the next variable display is not performed.

Here, a mode example of the hand-over effect will be described. At the timing when the game ball enters the discharge hole 865 (when the transfer detection switch 866 is detected), the game ball (display of the game ball) starts gliding in the transfer effect that is started in the decorative pattern display device 852. , The production of jumping over the cliff starts. Then, when the detection of the first safe ball detection switch 875 is performed, the effect display that jumps over the cliff and proceeds further down is derived (the next mission starts), and the detection of the first out ball detection switch 876 is performed. When it is performed, an effect display that falls on a cliff is derived.

Further, after the detection of the first safe ball detection switch 875 is performed, the effect of proceeding through the forest starts. Then, when a game ball enters the out-hole 880 of the second sorting device 877 (when the second out-ball detection switch is detected), the player cannot reach the dead end, and an effect display captured by someone is derived. R. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the chance hole 878 of the second sorting device 877 (when the chance ball detection switch 881 is detected), it appears in an open position, but is attacked by a monster and decorated. The effect display that escapes to the front side of the screen (the lower area 857 side) of the symbol display device 852 starts. After that, based on the detection of the immediately preceding detection switch 892, the effect display that jumps into the screen front side (the lower area 857 side) of the decorative pattern display device 852 (then, whiteouts once) is derived. This is the end of the hand-over effect, and after that, an effect that excites the behavior of the game ball in the lower region 857 that is visible, is performed, and a display that teaches that a big hit occurs or does not occur. Is done.

Further, when the game ball enters the sub-challenge hole 879 of the second distribution device 877 (when the first challenge ball detection switch 882a is detected), the same as when the game ball enters the chance hole 878. Then, although it appears in the opened place, a demonstration display is started in which the monster attacks and escapes to the front side of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 852 (the lower area 857 side). After that, based on the detection of the second challenge ball detection switch 882b, the effect display jumping to the front side of the screen (the lower area 857 side) of the decorative pattern display device 852 is derived. Further, the handing over effect of the decorative symbol display device 852 continues, and the display effect in which the game ball and the monster face each other is derived. Then, when the game ball enters the sub-V winning hole 896, a successful effect is derived in which the game ball slips past the side of the monster and escapes, and when the game ball enters the escape hole 897, the game ball is caught by the monster. Failure production is derived.

As described above in detail, also in the third embodiment, instead of the game ball that has entered the specific area 854, a takeover effect (display of the decorative pattern display device 852 that inherits the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific area 854) ), it is possible to derive a bold effect that cannot be executed with a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability and the playability, and thus to improve the entertainment.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the hand-over effect is started, the game balls that have entered the specific area 854 are not discharged to the outside of the game area (the V winning hole 894 and the respective deviation holes 880, 895, 897). There is a grace period before entering the ball), the result of whether or not the jackpot state is granted is still undecided. Therefore, the time length (timing of the end) of the hand-over effect is determined according to the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area 854, so that the hand-over effect is already determined. It is possible to eliminate the impression (what is called a finished race feeling) that only the behavior corresponding to the result that is present is shown. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest in the hand-over production.

On the other hand, of the passages of the game balls in the specific area 854, for the section (the separation area 856) through which the game balls pass during the period when the hand-over effect is derived, the shape of the passage, and thus the game balls passing through the passage. Even if the behavior of is simple (for example, a shape that does not easily clog a ball), it is possible to excite the game with a hand-over effect instead of the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to preferably derive an effect in which the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854 and the takeover effect are entwined while suppressing the complication of the configuration.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the game ball that has entered the specific area 854 enters the chance hole 878 of the second distribution device 877, the takeover effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 852 is that the game ball is the lower area 857. It ends at the point of time when the game ball is derived to, and the aspect of the takeover effect is inherited by the game ball moving in the specific area 854 (lower area 857) that is the trigger for starting the takeover effect. Further, as a matter of course, the actual result will differ depending on whether the game ball enters the V winning hole 894 of the final allocating device 893 or the deviation hole 895. For this reason, it is possible to dispel the sense of success of the succession production, and it is possible to have a stronger interest in the succession production.

In addition, when the game ball that entered the specific area 854 enters the sub-challenge hole 879 of the second distribution device 877, the game ball moves to the sub-distribution device 873 and enters the sub-V prize hole 896. If a big hit occurs, if you enter the out hole 897, the big hit will not occur, but the handing over effect of the decorative pattern display device 852 is continued even if the game ball enters the sub challenge hole 879. When the player enters the V winning hole 896 or the removal hole 897, the result of whether or not a big hit is given in the handing over effect is taught, and the big hit state effect display is directly displayed. In other words, the behavior of the game balls of the sub-sorting device 873 is not designed to be visually recognized by the player, and the game balls enter the specific area 854 (in this example, the upper area 855 It is after entering the discharge hole 865, but it may be entered after entering the ball opening 861.) Suggestion/teaching whether or not the game ball has won the prize corresponding to the jackpot until it is discharged. The effect for is to be performed (indirectly expressed) by the display effect of the decorative symbol display device 852. Therefore, the number of effect patterns can be increased and the effect can be flashy.

The actual movement distance of the game sphere from the ball entrance opening 861 to the final distribution device 893 is greater than the straight distance from the ball entrance opening 861 of the specific region 854 to the final distribution device 893 in the lower area 857. It's getting longer. For this reason, it is possible to carefully take over.

Further, in the remote area 856, a first branch 871, a second branch 872, and a sub-sorting device 873 are provided, and a transfer effect of the content according to the detection of the detection switch provided in the passage after the branch is provided. Is configured to derive. Therefore, it is possible to derive an effect as to whether or not the succession effect fails (continues). Therefore, the value of the hand-over effect can be increased and the interest in the hand-over effect can be further increased. Furthermore, according to the detection of each detection switch, the game ball moving in the specific area 854 and the takeover effect can be more surely linked, and the takeover effect can be progressed at any time as the game ball progresses. it can. In other words, the progress (speed) of the game ball and the timing of the start and end of the predetermined effect of the handover effect are matched, the result selected by the behavior of the game ball, and the contents of the suggestion/teaching by the handover effect are displayed. Can be matched. Therefore, the hand-over effect can be made more realistic and interesting. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered the specific area 854 does not reach the V winning hole 894 or the sub V winning hole 896, the (off) effect is performed, and it is unclear whether or not the player has come off. It is possible to prevent a situation where the game progresses.

In the present embodiment, there is no illumination of the remote area 856 and the like, and the state of the game ball moving in the remote area 856 is a behavior in the dark, in particular, compared with the succession effect in the decorative symbol display device 852. Therefore, it is inconspicuous. Therefore, while the hand-over effect is derived, it is possible to concentrate on the hand-over effect. Further, even during the handover effect, a player who wants to grasp the behavior of the game ball can confirm the behavior of the game ball.

On the other hand, the lower region 857 is provided with illumination, and when the transmissive display region 891 is in the transmissive state, the illumination is illuminated. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball in the lower area 857 can be more surely enjoyed.

In addition, a part of the passage for guiding the game balls that have entered the chance holes 878 of the second distribution device 877 is located below the entrance to the lower area 857 of the game balls. In this respect, the third embodiment is provided with a chance solenoid 883 for firing the game ball that has entered the chance hole 878 to the lower area 857 side. For this reason, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the distant region 856 and make the space of the distant region 856 wider. Therefore, the stay time of the game ball in the remote area 856 can be earned, and the hand-over effect can be sufficiently performed. Further, the hand-over effect can be separated from the position where it is conspicuous to the player, and the hand-over effect can be concentrated.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 852 that takes over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific area 854 and performs the takeover effect that allows the behavior to be transferred to the game ball moving in the specific area 854 is the entrance of the game ball to the specific area 854. Between a certain ball opening 861 (the upper region 855 that is immediately guided thereafter), the V winning hole 894, and the release hole 895 (the lower region 857) (particularly in this example, the position between the straight lines is set). It is arranged so that the hand-over effect can be derived. Therefore, the hand-over effect and the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854 can be continued more smoothly.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A; Pseudo Sphere Rendering, Pseudo Sphere) In the above-described first embodiment, the pseudo sphere rendering device 49 for performing the rendering using the pseudo sphere FB includes the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and, for example, a pseudo-ball production device 49 having a movable accessory moving area 404 may be added separately, or the lower unit 403. May be omitted. Further, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 each include two effect passage members 406, but there may be three or more, or one.

Further, the shape of the effect passage member 406, the behavior of the pseudo sphere in the pseudo sphere effect, and the like are not particularly limited, and for example, the final distribution device 893 of the third embodiment is configured to have a structure. Good. In addition, with respect to the connection passage 406a of the first embodiment as well, like the first branch 871 and the second branch 872 of the third embodiment, a branch path is provided, and the pseudo sphere FB is provided at the branch point. It is also possible to provide switching means for switching the destination of the movement. Further, the discharge opening is provided in the connection passage 406a, and the shutter capable of opening and closing the discharge opening is opened, so that the pseudo sphere FB moving in the connection passage 406a is discharged from the discharge opening to the outside of the connection passage 406a. (Returned to the storage member 408 that stores the pseudo sphere FB).

Further, the number, size, shape, pattern, material, combination, etc. of the pseudo spheres FB used in the pseudo sphere effect are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed according to the content of the pseudo sphere effect. For example, there may be a silver-colored pseudo sphere FB that is larger or smaller than a normal one (if a type other than the default is derived, it will be an instruction to increase the chance). Further, a resin pseudo sphere and a metal pseudo sphere may be used together. In addition, irregularities may be provided on the surface of the pseudo sphere. The size of the pseudo sphere FB (the one used by default) is preferably set to have a diameter slightly larger than that of the game sphere in order to improve the visibility.

Further, the suggestions made in the form of the pseudo sphere FB are not particularly limited. For example, in the left unit 401, the right unit 402, etc., prepare five pseudo spheres FB each having the same size and the same silver color, and one of them has a size within 2 mm 2 The other one is marked with a "black dot" within a size of 1 mm2, and the other is marked with a "golden dot" within a size of 1 mm2. The "true" pseudo sphere FB is derived only when there is a win, and the "black point" and the "golden point" pseudo sphere FB can be set, for example, in 6 stages of winning probabilities in the winning/winning lottery. In the above, it can be derived only when it is equal to or more than a predetermined setting (for example, "black point" indicates that the setting is one other than the setting that is hard to win first, and "gold point" is the one that wins first. It is suggested that it is either the easy setting or the second easy setting for winning). In this case, the pseudosphere FB can be used to make more interesting suggestions and teachings. Further, since the mark cannot be seen even when the pseudo sphere FB is viewed from a direction other than the predetermined direction, even if the marked pseudo sphere FB is led to a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, There is a possibility that the mark is attached because it may be impossible to confirm (a mark is on the back side of the pseudo sphere from the player's perspective, or the pseudo sphere FB is rotating at a high speed and cannot be confirmed well). When a certain type of pseudo sphere FB is derived, a new enjoyment of confirming the mark can be added.

Also, the number of pseudo spheres FB used by default prepared in each of the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 is not particularly limited, and the frequency of use is lower than that of other types of pseudo spheres FB. If it is high, the number of default pseudo spheres FB may be increased more than the number of other types of pseudo spheres FB, and if the usage frequency does not change so much, the number may be the same. Note that all of the plurality of pseudo spheres FB may be the same. Also, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a replacement pseudo ball FB.

(B; Details of the pseudo ball production device)
In the above embodiment, the end point detection switch 416 is provided so as to be able to detect the pseudo sphere FB that has passed the position immediately before the end point of the mobile accessory moving area 404, but is provided so as to be able to detect the pseudo sphere located at the end point. May be. The type of the end point detection switch 416 is not particularly limited, but a sensor that can detect the pseudosphere in a non-contact manner is desirable.

Further, although not mentioned in the above-mentioned embodiment, when a pseudo-sphere effect is performed in each movable type accessory movement region 404, the setting is turned on based on the detection of the start point detection switch 415 and the detection of the end point detection switch 416. In addition to providing a pseudo-ball production flag that is set off based on this, a pseudo-sphere production timer that counts down the time when the pseudo-sphere production flag is on is provided, and when the pseudo-sphere production flag is set to on, A value corresponding to 5 seconds may be set for the ball effect timer. Then, when the pseudo sphere production flag is on, the value of the pseudo sphere production timer is periodically subtracted and confirmed, and when it becomes "0", an error state corresponding to the ball clogging of the pseudo sphere is generated. It may be configured so as to allow it. In this case, it becomes possible to immediately grasp the ball clogging. In particular, when the moving path of the game ball in the movable accessory moving area 404 is more complicated than that in the above-described embodiment, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited.

In addition, in addition to this, a configuration capable of detecting a failure, a malfunction, or the like of the pseudo ball rendering device 49 may be provided. For example, even if the value of the scenario timer is set to "0" in order to detect the case where the pseudo sphere FB is not derived, the processing of steps S4611 to S4615 is performed. The error state may be generated when there is no such error, or the error state is generated when the discharge sensor 825 or the storage sensor 828 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 53) detects a change in the operation of the storage member 804. It is okay.

Further, corresponding to the end point of the mobile accessory moving area 404, a buffering means (for example, one using a spring or rubber) for buffering the pseudo sphere FB moving in the mobile accessory moving area 404 is provided. It may be done. In this case, it is possible to suppress damage to the end point of the movable accessory moving region 404, suppress the collision sound of the pseudo sphere FB, and the like.

Further, at least the orientation (tilt) of the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 arranged at the start point of the movable accessory moving region 404 may be changeable. In this case, variations can be provided in the direction in which the pseudo sphere FB emitted from the starting point is projected.

Further, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, and the decorative pattern display device 42 (at least one of these) may be configured to be relatively displaceable. In this case, it is possible to derive a novel effect in which the mobile accessory moving region 404 itself in which the pseudo sphere FB moves is displaced, or the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced. In particular, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, and the decorative symbol display device 42 (at least one of them) have the decorative symbol display device 42 and both ends of the movable accessory moving area 404. By configuring to be relatively displaceable in the adjoining range, even if the relative positions of the movable accessory moving region 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 are changed, between the plurality of movable accessory moving regions 404. By the intervening decorative symbol display device 42, it is possible to successfully connect the pseudo-sphere effects of the plurality of movable accessory moving regions 404. The "adjacent range" means that the entry side and the exit side of the mobile accessory moving area 404 and the decorative symbol display device 42 are continuous when viewed from the player side (front of the pachinko machine 10). It suffices to be such that, regardless of the relative position between each mobile accessory moving region 404 and the decorative symbol display device 42, the entrance and exit of each mobile accessory moving region 404 and the decorative symbol display device 42 It is desirable that and are configured to overlap in the front and rear. It should be noted that both ends of the movable accessory moving region 404 and the decorative symbol display device 42 may be relatively displaceable in a range exceeding the adjacent range. For example, the entrance or exit of the mobile accessory moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 are not adjacent to each other, and the effect that the effect is interrupted there may be derived. In addition, for example, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 may be displaced to a position separated from the decorative symbol display device 42, so that it is difficult to visually recognize from the front. Further, for example, the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the movable accessory moving region 404 may overlap in the front-rear direction, or may overlap in the front-rear direction and may not overlap. ..

Also, the movable accessory moving region 404 (at least one of the plurality) may be configured to be changeable in shape. In this case, it is possible to derive a bold surprise effect in which the mobile accessory moving area 404 is deformed (for example, the direction and width of the passage are changed) and the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB is also changed.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are substantially the same (the mounting position of the starting solenoid 413 is changed by turning them upside down), but another unit may be installed. Alternatively, one or both may be omitted. Further, the installation direction and arrangement of the left unit 401 and the like are not particularly limited as long as the pseudo sphere FB can operate without any trouble.

It should be noted that the game may be configured to proceed even when the pseudo ball rendering device 49 is out of order. That is, instead of the pseudo sphere effect, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to be switchable to a state in which the display effect is performed. Moreover, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are configured to be able to execute a hand-over effect using only one of them, and when one of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 fails, the other and the decorative symbol display The device 42 (and the lower unit 403) may be in a state of performing a handover effect. However, the notification of the failure state of the pseudo sphere effect device 49 (for example, because the pseudo sphere effect device 49 is in a non-variable display state in the decorative symbol display device 42, the special effect mode is displayed, It is preferable to send information to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal board.

Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, each effect passage member 406 of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 may be configured to be detachable from the main body 405. In this case, it is possible to improve the maintainability (ease of work such as repair and replacement) of each movable accessory moving region 404.

(C; Configuration other than pseudo sphere; use of mobile accessory, combination other than combination of pseudo sphere effect device 49 and decorative pattern display device 42) In the first embodiment, the mobile accessory moving region The pseudo ball FB is configured to be displaced in 404, but at a position visible from the front (from the player) as in the mobile character moving area 404, a mobile character different from the pseudo ball FB is displayed. It may be configured to be displaced (from the start point to the end point). That is, it suffices that it is configured so as to perform an effect using a movable accessory that is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy. For example, as a movable accessory, movement of rollers, wheels, balls, etc. It can be an accessory (for example, a character, a figure such as a vehicle that can run even if it is turned upside down) that has auxiliary equipment, or an oblong, oblate, cylindrical, or columnar shape You may ask.

Furthermore, an RFID tag may be incorporated in the pseudo sphere FB (mobile accessory). For example, when a reading means for reading an RFID tag is provided corresponding to each mobile accessory moving region 404, it becomes possible to know where in the mobile accessory moving region 404 the mobile accessory is moving. When the effect is derived in accordance with the moving type effect moving in the role moving area 404, the effect can be more accurately matched to the behavior of the moving type effect. Further, for example, in the case where there are a plurality of types of mobile accessories, when a reading unit for reading an RFID tag is provided corresponding to the storage member 408 for storing a plurality of types of mobile accessories, a plurality of types of mobile accessories are provided. The management of the accessory can be performed relatively easily and accurately. In other words, it is possible to take out a required mobile accessory without having to associate the room for storing the mobile accessory in the storage member 408 with the type of the mobile accessory. In addition, it is also possible to derive a complicated effect that shows a mixture of a plurality of mobile type effects.

The application of the technique of providing the "RFID tag" on the mobile accessory is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 including the plurality of mobile accessory moving areas 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42, and the mobile accessory transfer is performed. It is also possible to embody the pachinko machine 10 having only one area 404, or the pachinko machine 10 (or slot machine or the like) having no decorative pattern display device 42. Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the RFID tag is mounted on the mobile accessory, the RFID tag is mounted on the movable accessory (which is connected to the drive source through the connecting means). Good. For example, between the first position and the second position, each movable accessory is individually (or in a group unit divided into a plurality of groups) so that a plurality of movable accessory can be overlapped in the front and rear. It may be configured such that it is displaceable, and a reading means capable of reading the combination of the movable accessory at the first position may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pseudo ball effect of the pseudo ball effect device 49 (the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403) forming the first effect means and the second effect means, and the connecting effect means. Although the effect combined with the display effect of the decorative pattern display device 42 (pseudo-sphere display effect) is derived, the effect may be performed by combining other configurations. That is, the specific configurations of the first rendering means, the second rendering means, and the connecting rendering means are not particularly limited, and for example, display of a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, a dot display device, etc. Means, a motor, a solenoid, etc., an electric drive means that is operated by an electric drive means that is operated by an electric drive means, and an electric drive effect means capable of executing an electric drive effect, and a moveable movement based on mechanical energy. Movable character effect production means (pseudo-sphere effect device 49 of this example) capable of executing mobile character effect production using a formula character object, and light emitting means comprising a lamp such as an LED (group; those having a predetermined arrangement) Etc.

The electric drive unit may be drive-controlled by a production control unit (for example, the sub control device 262) that performs production control. In addition, as the electric drive means, for example, a connecting shaft is connected to a movable accessory that moves in the movable accessory moving region 404, and the connecting shaft is connected via a linkage mechanism using a gear, a roller, a belt, or the like. Alternatively, the stepping motor may be configured to be interlocked with the drive of the stepping motor, or it may be configured by movable character actors provided on the right side, the left side, and the lower side of the decorative pattern display device 42 at predetermined timings. One of the characters is configured to be visible (moves to the decorative pattern display device 42 side, or the shielding means moves, etc.), and in response to the character's arm moving to the decorative pattern display device 42 side, Corresponding display may be derived in the decorative symbol display device 42, or may be configured by a reel of a slot machine (with identification information attached to the outer peripheral surface and operated by a stepping motor). In addition, the electric driving accessory has a starting point and an ending point, and a means for grasping that the electric driving accessory is located at the starting point or the ending point is provided. May be

Regardless of the combination of the first rendering means, the second rendering means, and the connecting rendering means such as the display means, the electric drive rendering means, the movable accessory rendering means, and the light emitting means, each rendering While suppressing complication of the structure of the means, it is possible to derive a series of magnificent effects by combining effects by a plurality of effecting means, and it is possible to achieve diversification of effects and the like. R.

Even if the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 as the first effect means and the second effect means are separated from each other, the decorative symbol display device 42 as the connecting effect means connects the two effects well. You can Therefore, while improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first effect means and the second effect means, and diversifying the effect, etc., it is possible to understand the effect performed in cooperation with the first effect means and the second effect means. It is possible to improve the ease.

In addition, the number of production means (first production means, second production means, connection production means, instep production means, and second production means) for performing productions in conjunction with each other is particularly limited. Instead, the number of the first effect means and the second effect means that connect effects through the connecting effect means may be two, or may be four or more. Also, the number of the instep production means and the second production means that connect the productions based on the start winning may be one, may be plural, or may be both. Furthermore, the number of connecting effect means is two or more (for example, the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 is divided into upper and lower parts, or the front of the decorative symbol display device 42 is compared with the decorative symbol display device 42). A variable display device that is slidable (or rotatable) in parallel (upward, downward, leftward, rightward) with the display surface may be provided.

Further, at least one of the first effect means, the second effect means, and the connecting effect means (the instep effect means and the second effect effect means) is constituted by an electrically driven effect effect means or a movable type effect effect effect means. It may be that it has been done. In this case, it is possible to enjoy an analog effect that is different from the pachinko machine 10 in which only the effect display by the display device (decorative pattern display device 42 or the like) is performed. Of course, there is a concern that the effect may be monotonous with a single effect means (such as the left unit 401) that performs analog effect, but in the first embodiment, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, Also, with the decorative pattern display device 42, it is possible to derive a series of various effects, and it is possible to eliminate such concern.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the effect means for performing the hand-over effect is provided only in the game area (the area surrounded by the game area) (however, the inside of the pseudo ball effect device 49 and the front of the decorative symbol display device 42 are games. Although it is not a region), it may be provided outside the game region. For example, through the front surface of the front frame set 14 or the upper surface of the upper plate 19, a movable accessory as production means is provided which is inaccessible but visible to the player, and is linked to the operation of the production button 125. May be configured to operate. Further, by arranging the light emitting means at a position between the movable accessory and the decorative pattern display device 42, or by arranging the transmissive display device in the glass unit 137, the movable accessory. It is also possible to perform a connection effect between the effect by and the effect by the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, for example, the pseudo sphere can be led out in the upper plate 19 so as not to be contactable and visible, and the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, and the decorative pattern display device 42 of the pseudo sphere effect device 49 of the first embodiment. It may be possible to derive a pseudo sphere effect in conjunction with the above, and, for example, as an indication of the occurrence of the big hit state, on the upper plate 19 before the occurrence of the big hit state (during variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b). It is also possible to derive an effect in which a large number of pseudo spheres are visually recognized.

(D; Tethering Effect) In the first embodiment, the pseudo-sphere display on the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed as a tethering effect that connects the pseudo sphere effects. It is only necessary to produce a visual mode or a voice mode that reminds that the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB continues. For example, a car toy is used as a mobile accessory, and the pseudo ball rendering device 49 has a configuration in which the car toy can be circulated, and the end point of the first effect passage 421 and the start point of the second effect passage 422. A blind board-shaped blind part is provided between the first and the second effect passages 421, and based on the detection of the end point detection switch 416 of the first effect passage 421, as a connecting effect, a sound reminiscent of high speed running of the vehicle, a sound reminiscent of low speed running, Sounds reminiscent of normal driving, sounds reminiscent of driving in bad weather or on rough roads, etc. are randomly derived (there may be differences in the selection rate depending on whether or not to succeed). The unit may be constituted by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot display device, and a car toy may be displayed on the display means, etc.), at a timing suitable for such a linkage effect, or a timing shifted intentionally Then, the movable type effect production of the second effect passage 422 may be started.

Further, for example, in the connecting effect, an electrically driven accessory may be used, and the electrically operated accessory may be configured to operate under the control of the sub control device 262. Further, in addition to adopting a liquid crystal display device as a display device (decorative pattern display device 42) for performing a connecting effect, various display devices such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, a dot display device, projection mapping (projector (and screen ), or a device in which a light-emitting body, a movable accessory, and the like are appropriately arranged may be adopted.

In addition, although the time lag of the pseudo sphere effect is eliminated by adjusting the length of the cut-in effect of the joint effect, it may be eliminated by another method. For example, the last part of the switching of the scenes of the moving image may be cut, or a moving image that does not interfere may be added to deal with the situation. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 which is not mounted with the display means such as the decorative pattern display device 42 and the like, when performing the variation corresponding production corresponding to the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b by the plurality of production means, for example, the pseudo sphere FB It is also possible to adjust the shift by changing the moving speed (changing the firing speed, changing the easiness of traveling of the moving path, etc.) and adjusting the operation of the movable type accessory or the movable accessory.

Further, in the handover effect, first, the pseudo-sphere effect may be performed after the connection effect is performed. Incidentally, it is also possible to eliminate the connecting effect. For example, the pair of left and right pseudo sphere effect devices 801 of the second embodiment are provided in a pair, and in the left-right direction, the effect passage members 803 of the pair of pseudo sphere effect devices 801 are close to each other as viewed from the front. You may arrange so that.

(E; Trigger of hand-over effect) The timing of starting the hand-over effect is not particularly limited, and the pseudo-ball effect and the connection effect are the behaviors of the game ball as in the first embodiment. It is not limited to the configuration in which (there is also a pattern in which the hold display intervenes) is taken over. For example, the pseudo sphere effect may be started in the middle of a predetermined effect, and as a modification of the specific area 854 of the third embodiment, the game ball that has entered the specific area 854 is the upper area 855. There is a case where it moves to the away area 856 from the upper area and a case where it directly moves from the upper area 855 to the lower area 857. Furthermore, the pseudo ball effect device 49 of the first embodiment is added to separate the game ball from the away area. It may be configured such that the pseudo sphere effect is started when the process shifts to 856. In addition, when the game ball such as the through gate 34 passes through a predetermined part of the game area (when the passage of the game ball is detected), the pseudo ball effect may be started.

In addition, for example, the pseudo sphere effect or the pseudo sphere display effect may be started in the middle of a predetermined effect, and an operation unit (approach sensor) capable of detecting an object approaching in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided. Alternatively, an operation means is provided adjacent to the decorative symbol display device 42 or the movable accessory moving region 404 (having an operating portion that is displaced back and forth) (for example, the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided at the side edge of the game region). It is provided as close as possible to the rail 50 so as to sandwich only the right-handed passage, and the like, and the operation of the operation means (detection of the proximity sensor as the specific detection means, operation as the specific detection means for detecting the operation of the button) Based on the detection of the detection switch), in the movable accessory moving area 404 adjacent to the operation means or in the decorative pattern display device 42, a pseudo sphere effect or a pseudo sphere display effect (instep effect or B effect) ) Is started (for example, it is started so that something (for example, a pseudo sphere) that is a target to be connected by a connecting effect from the operation means is started).

Further, for example, in a slot machine provided with three reels and three stop buttons for stopping each reel, a transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided in front of all reels and in a range including a region above the reels. At the same time, a light-emitting means capable of deriving a plurality of patterns of visual recognition states surrounding each reel is provided (at least so that a large number of vermilion fine light-emission modes can be derived, for example, a three-color LED in each of several divided regions). Is installed so that a prism plate, a plate with a small hole, or a plate with a hole of a predetermined shape can be appropriately positioned in front of it.), and is stopped according to the stop button stop operation. After deriving a mode of light emitting means reminiscent of a spark of a fuse with a sound effect around the reel, and deriving a similar effect corresponding to the reel that is stopped at the end, a win/win lottery for the entire transmissive liquid crystal display device The fireworks may be derived according to the result of the above. In addition, if the special game state has not been won, the special game state of sequentially turning on and off the light emitting means around all reels from left to right based on the next operation of the start lever. (In this case, the display corresponding to the mode of the light emitting means may be supplemented by the transmissive liquid crystal display device in front of the reel).

Further, for example, in the front part of the slot machine, light emitting means may be provided around the start lever, stop button, effect button, etc. of the slot machine, and the surrounding light emitting means may emit light by operating the start lever. May be configured such that the light emitting means as a guiding means provided so as to connect between the light emitting means and the liquid crystal display device sequentially emits light, and the light emitting means is connected to the display effect of the liquid crystal display device. In addition, in a state in which a right (special game state such as bonus, replay time, assist time, assist replay time, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is obtained (and even if the notification is not made), credit 3 It may be configured such that a succession effect is generated based on the operation of the bet button or the operation of the credit payout button for the number of pieces or less, and the player is notified that the advantageous right is obtained.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform the hand-over effect at the start of the variable display. It is also possible to determine whether or not to perform a hand-over effect (in the hold information storage processing of FIG. 35) based on the information included in the advance command to be performed. In this case, the hand-over effect can be started before the corresponding variable display is started.

That is, for example, when the advance command includes information that is a big hit or information that is out of front and rear reach, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a takeover effect. Further, when the winning is won, it is determined how many times the transitional effect is to be derived for the variable display. However, the upper limit is the number of pending variable displays excluding the currently executed variable display. Furthermore, by checking the information stored in the other storage area of the holding information storage area, whether or not the hand-over effect is already planned, there is a fluctuation display that is a big hit, or a fluctuation display that is out of front and behind It is determined whether or not there is, and if there is, then it is decided not to carry out the takeover effect, and if there is not, then it is decided to carry out the takeover effect. In the hand-over effect, the change time of all corresponding change displays is used to teach whether or not a big hit. In the case of adopting the configuration, it is possible to derive a magnificent takeover effect using (a time period of) variable display for a plurality of times.

It should be noted that "during the execution of the handover effect, the start of another handover effect may be prohibited", or "the execution of another handover effect may be started during the execution of the handover effect (( For example, the number of pseudo spheres may increase.” In this case, during the hand-over effect that teaches or suggests the result of the predetermined win/win lottery, the hand-over effect that teaches or suggests the result of another win/win lottery is started (the hand-over effect is duplicated). It is possible to derive a novel effect that cannot occur in the variable display of identification information. In addition, a plurality of hand-over effects overlap (for example, the number of pseudo-spheres in the hand-over effect increases to two), so that the effect mode becomes more lively and the hand-over effect can be made more interesting. ..

In addition, in the state where a plurality of hand-over effects are simultaneously performed, the previous hand-over effect corresponds to the variable display that was won in the win/win lottery, and teaches that the win/win lottery was won in the previous hand-over effect. When the action is performed, a display indicating that the subsequent hand-over effect is temporarily stopped, re-executed, or merged or the order is changed may be derived, or may not be performed in the first place. In this case, even if the period during which the variable display is performed based on the winning/non-winning lottery is temporarily suspended, it is considered that there is no hand-over effect that has already been started, and the player feels uncomfortable. The situation can be avoided.

(F; Teaching Content of Handover Effect) In the first embodiment, the handing over effect is configured to teach whether or not the big hit state occurs, but the content taught and suggested in the handing over effect. Is not particularly limited and can be set for each model. For example, the suggestion of the current game mode or the game mode to be given from now on may be configured to be carried over. Further, for example, when the winning probability of the winning/winning lottery can be set in a plurality of stages, the suggestion/teaching of the setting of the current winning probability may be performed in the succeeding effect. In addition, for example, when a game ball enters the starting winning device 33a, 33b, a hand-over effect including a pseudo-ball effect is always performed, and the success of the hand-over effect causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to have a relatively large jackpot expectation. The variable display of high decorative patterns may be started. Further, for example, the taught content (privilege) may be varied depending on the type (color or the like) of the pseudo sphere FB used in the successful pseudo sphere production. For example, even if the succession effect is succeeded with the pseudo ball FB other than gold, it is not a big hit, but if the success effect is succeeded with the gold pseudo ball FB, the big hit is confirmed, or the success effect is successful with the pseudo ball FB other than gold In that case, it is not known which type of jackpot will occur, but the probability variation mode may be given when the succession effect is succeeded by the golden pseudo sphere FB.

In addition, when the variable display device unit 35 of the first embodiment is mounted on the slot machine, when the player wins in the lottery that is triggered by the operation of the start lever, a pseudo ball effect and a connection effect are provided. It may be started. Furthermore, for example, the pseudo-ball production of the stage 1 production passage 421 is started by the operation of the start lever, and the first stop button, the second stop button, and the second stop button for stopping the three reels having the plurality of symbols on the outer periphery are provided. Based on the operation of the 3 stop button, the pseudo ball effect of the second effect passage 422, the pseudo ball effect of the third effect passage 423, the pseudo ball effect of the fourth effect passage 424, and the pseudo ball effect of the lower unit 403 are started. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the transfer effect, the connection effect by the decorative symbol display device 42, or whether the pseudo sphere FB is derived to the effect passage member 406 or the lower unit 403 (the next pseudo sphere effect is started. Whether or not the succession effect is successful or unsuccessful is taught, but it may be configured to instruct whether or not the succession effect is successful during the pseudo-sphere effect.

However, in reality, it fails to make it "successful" (the corresponding variable display corresponds to the jackpot), or to "fail" (the corresponding variable display corresponds to the deviation). It is desirable to avoid such a situation (especially I want to avoid a pattern that succeeds even though it is out of order). For example, regarding the “pattern to be made successful”, the number of pseudo spheres FB increases, it is repeated until it succeeds, the goal is forcibly entered (the pseudo sphere FB is guided), and the reversal effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. Occurs, a trouble such as the bottom of the movable role moving area 404 comes off, and shifts to a special effect for notifying the success. For example, regarding the "pattern you want to fail", even if the final pseudo-ball production is successful, it is set to be 100% and it is not a big hit, the pseudo-ball FB is played, it stops, etc., the goal escapes/is hidden. -It becomes smaller, disappears, or temporarily hides the pseudo-sphere effect with a shutter, a transmissive display device, or the like so that it can be seen as a failure mode.

(G; Addition of External Force to Pseudo Sphere) It is possible to provide an external force adding means capable of adding an external force to the pseudo sphere FB moving in the movable accessory moving region 404. In this case, it is possible to diversify the pseudo ball effect. In other words, the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB in the movable type accessory movement area 404 is merely an effect, and even if an external force is applied, a substantial problem related to the jackpot state and the like cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to derive a novel effect in which the player can be deeply involved in a predetermined behavior in the game area (actually, the movable role moving area 404 is not the game area) according to the operation of the player. ..

Further, when the movement of the pseudo sphere FB is delayed in the movable role moving area 404, the pseudo sphere FB does not have to be directly touched by a person concerned such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. It will also be possible to eliminate the stagnation. As the external force applying means, a device provided with a member that changes the traveling direction of the pseudo sphere FB by contacting the pseudo sphere FB by using a solenoid, a motor, or the like, or vibrates the passage of the movable accessory moving region 404. A device (reciprocating motion, periodic motion, rotating device) or the like that changes the speed of the pseudo sphere FB by changing the inclination or blowing out the wind, or the time of the pseudo sphere effect is included. However, in order to suppress damage to the pseudo sphere FB, it is desirable to avoid strong contact with the external force applying means as much as possible. Further, the trigger of the operation of the external force adding means for eliminating the accidental stagnation of the movement of the pseudo sphere FB in the movable accessory moving area 404 may be automatic, or a predetermined operation by a person concerned such as a game hall. (Operation means for error elimination may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

The structure for moving the pseudo sphere FB located at the start point of the movable accessory moving region 404 to the side of the connecting passage 406a is not particularly limited, and in addition to the solenoid (starting solenoid) as described above, a motor and a wind pressure are also provided. Alternatively, the floor of the storage room 408 may be originally inclined to the connecting passage 406a, or the floor of the storage room 408 may be inclined after reaching the start point. Further, it is desirable that the firing speed is appropriately changeable, and basically, it is desirable to push out at a low speed in order to suppress the damage of the pseudo sphere FB. It is desirable to gradually change from a low speed to a high speed, and it is desirable that the starting solenoid 413 and the pseudo sphere FB are brought into contact with or close to each other while the pseudo sphere FB is waiting at the starting point.

(G-1; Reaction of Pseudo Sphere Rendering Device 903 to Operation by Player: Mode Example 1 of Means E to be Described 1) In the first embodiment and the like, the predetermined operation by the player is the pseudo ball rendering device 49. It may be configured to affect the movement mode of the pseudo sphere FB (reflected in the operation of the external force applying means). Hereinafter, example embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

As shown in FIG. 60, the variable display device unit 901 of the present mode example includes a decorative pattern display device 902 which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and the pseudo sphere effect device of the second embodiment arranged on both sides thereof. The same pseudo ball production device 903 as 801 is provided. In the takeover effect of the present mode example, first, an effect of delivering the pseudo sphere FB to the lower portion of the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 902 is performed.

The left and right pseudo sphere effect devices 903 are provided with a pair of upper and lower effect passage members 905 each having a connection passage 906 through which the pseudo sphere FB can pass, and a pseudo sphere effect in which the pseudo sphere FB moves in each effect passage member 905 is performed. Be seen. At the timing of the player's operation of the production button 907, a pseudo sphere FB is fired in the upper left production passage member 905 (hereinafter, referred to as “first production passage member 911”), and a pseudo sphere display (connection) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 902. The game sphere passes to the upper right production passage member 905 (hereinafter, referred to as “second production passage member 912”) through the production and the accessory behavior handover production. On the decorative pattern display device 902, a display in which the enemy soldier monitors is displayed, and the player operates the effect button 907 in consideration of the timing. Note that, also in the present mode example, an end point detection switch (not shown) that detects the pseudo sphere FB] that has reached the lower end portion (the end point of the movable accessory moving region) of the connection passage 906 of the effect passage member 905 is provided, and the end point is provided. Based on the detection by the detection switch, the pseudo-sphere display (connecting effect) on the decorative symbol display device 902 is started.

In the succession effect, first, how many pseudo spheres FB are used is determined, and when there are a plurality of pseudo spheres FB, a plurality of pseudo spheres FB are continuously drawn to each effect passage member 905. For example, at the start of the handing over effect, an effect is provided in which one to four silver game balls are provided (the first effect passage member 911 may be configured to shoot the pseudo sphere FB without the player being notified). ). Further, in the decorative pattern display device 902, when the effect display in which the movement of the pseudo sphere display is obstructed by the enemy soldier or the like is performed, the number of pseudo spheres FB used in the next pseudo sphere effect is reduced.

Incidentally, in the case where the first movable floor 813 of the pseudo sphere effect device 801 shown in FIG. Two pseudo spheres FB may be led out from the storage member 804 at positions separated by the distance of. Further, four pseudo spheres FB may be placed on the first movable floor 813, or the pseudo spheres FB may be shared with the second movable floor 814 to carry the pseudo spheres FB. It may be possible to position it above the starting point of the mobile type accessory moving area 822).

After the pseudo sphere effect of the second effect passage member 912, the effect of firing the pseudo sphere FB is performed again. On the decorative symbol display device 902, explanation of the effect, suggestion of success expectation degree, etc. are performed. Then, at the timing of the player's operation of the production button 907, a pseudo sphere FB is fired in the lower left production passage member 905 (hereinafter, referred to as “third production passage member 913”), and the pseudo sphere display in the decorative symbol display device 902 is displayed. The game ball passes to the lower right production passage member 905 (hereinafter, referred to as the “fourth production passage member 914”) via (joining production). On the decorative pattern display device 902, a display in which the enemy soldier monitors is displayed, and the player operates the effect button 907 in consideration of the timing.

After the pseudo sphere effect of the fourth effect passage member 914, the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 902 is set to the transparent state. Behind the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 902, a space (movable character moving area) in which a firing device 915 capable of firing the pseudo sphere FB and a target character 916 such as a bowling pin is provided It is provided. The firing device 915 is shaped like a cannon, and the direction of firing the pseudo sphere FB can be changed up, down, left, or right by operating the cross button 917 that can be operated by the player. A plurality of target actors 916 are provided so that the target actor 916 can stand on its own. For example, a string-shaped body is connected to the inside of the hole that opens downward in the target character 916, and when the string-shaped body is pulled downward, the lower surface of the target character 916 and the installation surface on which the target character 916 is installed. And are in surface contact with each other. Furthermore, not only the pattern in which the string-shaped bodies of all the target characters 916 are loosened or put into a tensioned state, the string-shaped members are loosened and the target characters 916 that can be collapsed and the string-shaped members are in tension. It is configured so that a state in which the target character 916 that is in the state and cannot be defeated is mixed is generated. There may be variations in which the string-like body is in a slightly loosened state, and it is likely that the string-like body will fall down, or that it took a long time to fall down but it fell down.

The decorative pattern display device 902 displays a description of the effect of firing the pseudo sphere FB, the remaining number of times the pseudo sphere FB can be fired, and the remaining time of the effect. In the explanation of the effect, the display portion of the decorative symbol display device 902 is partially made in a non-transparent state so that it can be easily visually recognized. The display of the remaining number of times and the remaining time is semi-transparent, and is displayed even after the start of the effect of firing the pseudo sphere FB. Note that the longer the corresponding variation time is, the more time the player has to operate the launching device 915, and the larger the number of pseudo spheres FB that reach the fourth effect passage member 914 is. In addition, the operation valid period is between various pseudo-sphere effects, and the display of the remaining number of times and the remaining time corresponds to the period teaching means.

Then, as many pseudo spheres FB as have passed through the fourth effect passage member 914, the pseudo spheres FB can be launched by the launching device 915, and all the target roles 916 fall (replace with another target role 916). There may be a pattern such as), and the like, which is a teaching of occurrence of a big hit state. However, the time limit for firing the pseudo sphere FB by the launching device 915 is set one by one, and when the time limit is exceeded, one right to fire the pseudo sphere FB disappears. In addition, there is a pattern in which a helper role object is configured to appear from the space above the target role object 916, and the helper role object defeats all remaining target role objects 916.

In addition, while the hand-over effect is being performed, the operation of the effect button 125 according to each part of the hand-over effect, displaces the pseudo sphere FB to the connection passage 906 side of the effect passage member 905. ) And the operation of the launching device 915 (in a linked state). On the other hand, when the hand-over effect is not performed, even if the effect button 125 is operated, the device for moving the pseudo sphere FB does not react.

As described above, an analog type effect such as a pseudo ball effect using the pseudo ball FB is originally an effect in which the player's power is easy to enter. However, according to this aspect example (g-1), the player's power is further increased. The operation is reflected in the analog effect. In the present mode example, each pseudo ball effect is started by the player's operation of the effect button 907 (the pseudo ball FB is fired by the starting solenoid or the emission device 915). For this reason, the player can start the pseudo-sphere effect more closely with expectations and the pseudo-sphere effect can be made more interesting. In addition, the operation of the effect buttons 907 and the like causes appropriate stress release, and the player can consolidate points where external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (controlling the glass unit etc. from being hit). To do. In the present mode example, whether or not the succession effect including the pseudo ball effect can be succeeded has already been determined (it has been determined at the time of starting winning), and when the jackpot state does not occur, the final pseudo ball effect (shooting) Although it is impossible to succeed, the pseudo-ball effect (shooting effect) can be succeeded when a big hit state occurs. In other words, there are cases where the player's technique can succeed in the pseudo-sphere production, and in that case, the feeling of uplifting and satisfaction are so large that they cannot be compared with other productions.

Further, also in the present mode example, the pseudo sphere effect is taken over by the pseudo sphere display of the decorative symbol display device 902, and it is possible to derive an effect which is difficult only by the analog effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effect while suppressing the monotonous feeling while utilizing the pseudo-sphere effect. Further, the pseudo sphere display is started based on the fact that the pseudo sphere FB is detected by the end point detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to the lower end of the effect passage member 905. That is, although the timing of firing the pseudo sphere FB is determined by the player, the timing of ending the pseudo sphere effect is properly reflected in the pseudo sphere display, and the pseudo sphere effect can be connected to the pseudo sphere display reliably and smoothly. You can enjoy the production with a higher degree of perfection.

Further, the pseudo sphere display of the decorative pattern display device 902 is also succeeded to the pseudo sphere effect, and the change in the aspect related to the pseudo sphere generated in the pseudo sphere display is reflected in the subsequent pseudo sphere effect. It is like this. That is, in the case where two pseudo spheres FB are continuously derived in the pseudo sphere effect of the first effect passage member 911, and in the subsequent pseudo sphere display, the pseudo sphere is decreased by one, the following sphere is displayed. Only one pseudo sphere FB is derived in the pseudo sphere effect of the two effect passage member 912. For this reason, the connection between the pseudo sphere display and the pseudo sphere effect can be improved, and the production performance can be improved.

In addition, even if the production button 907 is operated, the device for operating the pseudo sphere FB cannot be operated in a state other than the takeover production. Therefore, it is possible to surely separate the state in which the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB is enjoyed and the state in which it cannot be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened. Furthermore, for example, by enjoying the pseudo-ball production at any time, there will be some people who occupy the pachinko machine 10 without performing the normal game that is mainly performed in the win/loss lot, and the player who wants to play the game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot play the game.

Further, since the operation for operating the device for operating the pseudo sphere FB is performed by operating the effect button 907, the number of operating means (buttons) is reduced as much as possible, as compared with the case where a separate button or the like is provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and to reduce the hurdle of participation in the effect using the button, thereby making the effect easy to understand and familiar. Therefore, it is possible to allow more players to enjoy the effect of using the button, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress that may occur when a complicated operation is required to make a quick judgment.

Further, in the present example of the aspect, the decorative symbol display device 902 is a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the movable device region in which the launch device 915 and the target product 916 are arranged is provided behind the display unit. There is. Then, the decorative pattern display device 902 performs pseudo-sphere display that connects the pseudo-sphere effects of the effect passage member 905 in a non-transparent state (blindfold state), and then sets the transparent state (exposed state) by the launching device 915 or the like. It is designed to make visual effects visible. Therefore, the effect of the pseudo sphere FB can be enhanced or diversified. Furthermore, for example, when the pseudo sphere effect is unintentionally developed undesirably, it is possible to put the decorative pattern display device 902 in a non-transparent state and perform recovery or situation explanation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance from the desired development of the pseudo-sphere effect from becoming too large, which makes recovery difficult and causes trouble. In particular, when a predetermined (for example, end) timing of the pseudo-sphere effect is matched with a predetermined timing of another member, such an action and effect are more remarkably exhibited. When the decorative symbol display device 902 is in the non-transparent state, the device that operates the pseudo sphere FB may not operate based on the operation of the effect button 907.

Further, in the pseudo sphere effect (shooting effect) in which the firing device 915 aims at the target character 916 and fires the pseudo sphere FB, a time limit for firing the pseudo sphere FB is provided. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo sphere effect is delayed. Furthermore, during the shooting effect, the decorative pattern display device 902 in the transparent state displays the remaining time until the time limit for the shooting effect (the time limit for firing each of the pseudo spheres FB) is reached. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pseudo-sphere FB cannot be fired because the time limit has arrived without realizing it.

Although not particularly mentioned in the present mode example, as in the above-described embodiment, the end timing of the hand-over effect (teaching effect) including the pseudo sphere effect and the pseudo sphere display, and the corresponding end timing of the variable display. In order to match the above, the variation in the time of the pseudo sphere effect may be eliminated by adjusting the time of the pseudo sphere display. That is, for example, when the end time of the pseudo sphere effect in the first effect passage member 911 is delayed by 1 second from the target time, the length of the following pseudo sphere display is shortened by 1 second, and the first effect passage member is generated. When the end time of the pseudo sphere effect in 911 is one second earlier than the target time, the length of the subsequent pseudo sphere display may be increased by one second. In this case, the hand-over effect can be performed within a predetermined period, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which other effects are obstructed. It should be noted that the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the hand-over effect (teaching effect) may be matched at all times, or the book edge may be adjusted at the next variable display or jackpot state display. You may.

It should be noted that the attached surface to which the button (effect button 907) for operating the pseudo sphere FB is attached may not be provided with other operation means operable by the player. In this case, the other hand is operated unintentionally by the hand that has operated the pseudosphere FB, resulting in unintended behavior based on the operation of the other hand, or other operation. It is possible to avoid situations where the risk of damage to the means increases. In addition, it becomes easy to take measures for reinforcement, and damage risk and cost can be suppressed.

The attached portion to which the button (effect button 907) for operating the pseudo sphere FB is attached is a member different from the member to which the pseudo sphere producing device 903 is attached, and the attached portion and other members are A cushioning means for cushioning an impact may be provided between them. That is, in general, the button operation portion is provided with a member that absorbs the impact when the button is operated, but it is also possible that the impact is applied to the members around it. This concern becomes even more noticeable if it comes into contact with the surroundings (button case). In this respect, the member to which the effect button 907 is attached is provided in a member different from the pseudo-ball effect device 903 and the like, and when an external force is applied to the member, the buffer means applies the external force to the other member. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 907 not only moves the device for operating the pseudo sphere FB, but also avoids a situation in which the pseudo sphere FB causes an unintended behavior due to a shock. Further, in the case where a vibration detecting means for detecting the vibration of the pseudo sphere effect device 903 is provided, the operation of the effect button 907 and the pseudo sphere effect are performed in a configuration in which an error state is generated based on the detection of the vibration detecting means. The case where the device 903 is vibrated by another method can be distinguished as much as possible. As for the operation direction of the effect button 907, in order to prevent the force (impact) resulting from the operation from acting on the inner frame 12 provided with various control boards and the like, the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are as much as possible. It is desirable not to include directions.

Further, the structure is not limited to the structure in which the interlocking device capable of applying an external force to the pseudo sphere FB is interlocked with the operation of the effect button 907, and an approach operation detecting device capable of detecting an object close to the interlocking device is provided (as a touch panel. Alternatively, the interlocking device may be operated based on the detection of the approaching operation detecting device. In this case, the interlocking device can be operated intuitively. For this reason, it becomes easy to match the timing, and when a plurality of interlocking means are provided, it becomes easy to understand the operation method.

Even when the transparent plate-like body provided in front of the interlocking means is strongly contacted with the transparent body, the impact is unlikely to reach the pseudo sphere FB or the like moving in the movable accessory moving region. A two-layer structure may be used, at least one of which can be displaced forward and backward, and a cushioning material for gently restricting the displacement of the transparent body is added (a rubber material is fitted to the outer periphery of the plate-like closing means). Good.

Further, the effect passage member 905 of the pseudo sphere effect device 903 in which the pseudo sphere effect is performed and the decorative symbol display device 902 in which the pseudo sphere display (link effect) is performed may be configured to be relatively displaceable. Further, the effect passage member 905 and the decorative symbol display device 902 are arranged in a first relative arrangement in which the effect passage member 905 is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 902, and the effect passage member 905 is in front of the decorative symbol display device 902. It may be configured so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the second relative arrangement which is a deviated position.

In this case, the pseudo-sphere effect can be made more visible at a position where it can be seen more easily, and the support of the decorative symbol display device 902 can be obtained to make it more exciting (derivating the background of the pseudo-sphere effect on the decorative symbol display device 902. Display, teach how to operate and timing, etc.). Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the effect passage member 905 interferes with the field of view in a state where the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 902 is visually recognized without using the pseudo sphere FB. As the operation of the effect passage member 905 and the decorative symbol display device 902, for example, a pair of left and right pseudo-sphere effect devices 903 can slide in the left and right directions, and the decorative symbol display device 902 moves in the front-rear direction. It is slidable, and in the first relative arrangement, the pair of left and right pseudo sphere effect devices 903 come into contact with or come close to each other, and in the second relative arrangement, the pair of left and right pseudo sphere effect devices 903 are separated from each other to the left and right, and between them. The decorative pattern display device 902 is displaced forward and positioned in an empty space.

Further, for example, one of the effect passage member 905 and the decorative symbol display device 902 is in a display state in which it can be visually recognized from the player side in front of the pachinko machine 10 (the entire site where the effect is produced becomes good in visibility). Alternatively, the state may be changed to a non-display state body which is invisible or difficult. In this case, it is possible to enhance the easiness of viewing and the power in each effect state while diversifying the effect. One of the effect passage member 905 and the decorative pattern display device 902 is configured to be displaceable, and a displacement drive means for displacing the one and a drive control means for performing drive control of the displacement drive means are provided. The production passage member 905 and the decorative symbol display device 902 may be provided with a covering means capable of covering the front side (the production passage member 905 and the decorative symbol display device 902 may be displaceable). It may be non-displaceable).

(G-1-1; Modification of g-1) There are a plurality of types of pseudo spheres FB as movable type objects, and the interlocking means for applying external force to the pseudo spheres FB is based on the operation of the effect button 907. Then, different changes may be generated in the movement mode of the pseudo sphere FB depending on the type of the pseudo sphere FB. For example, when a non-default pseudo sphere FB (for example, a red pseudo sphere) is prepared and the pseudo sphere FB is launched by the launching device 915, the firing speed is higher than that of the default pseudo sphere FB. It may be configured to be fast.

In this case, the type of the pseudo sphere FB and the operation pattern of the interlocking means are associated with each other to change not only the appearance of the pseudo sphere FB (they may have the same appearance) but also the behavior. The development of can be diverse. Therefore, the effect of improving the interest by the pseudo-sphere effect is further exhibited.

It should be noted that the type of the mobile accessory and the operation pattern of the interlocking means based on the operation of the operation means do not have to be in one-to-one correspondence, and the operation pattern is configured to be selected from a plurality of types. May be. It is also possible to incorporate the RFID tag in the mobile accessory, read the information of the RFID tag by the reading means, and drive the interlocking means based on the type information and the position information.

(G-1-2; Modification of g-1) There are a plurality of types of pseudo sphere effects, and the interlocking means is based on the operation of the effect button 907 or the like, and the pseudo sphere is changed with respect to the movement mode of the pseudo sphere FB. Different changes may be generated depending on the type of effect. For example, there are a plurality of types of launching devices 915 and target role objects 916 (for example, different sizes, etc.), and the ease with which the target role object 916 falls down (forcibly defeat the pachinko machine 10 side while encouraging the surrounding production, etc.) ), etc. In this case, the pseudo sphere effect can be various. Therefore, the effect of improving the interest by the pseudo-sphere effect is further exhibited.

(G-2; Aspect Example No. 2, Confirmation Operation of Mark) For example, in each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, six black polka dot pseudo spheres FB are prepared, and one of them is one of the pseudo spheres FB. Mark the word "Continued" with a size within 10 mm2, write the "whale shape" with a size within 1 mm2 on one of the polka dots of another pseudo sphere FB, and One of the polka dots on the pseudo sphere FB is marked with a "star shape" within a size of 1 mm2, and another polka dot on the pseudo sphere FB is marked with a size of less than 1 mm2 on the "crown". The shape of ". The "continue" pseudo-sphere FB is derived only when the pseudo-sphere production continues, and the "whale-shaped" pseudo-sphere FB is derived only when the jackpot is hit, "star shape", "crown shape" The pseudo sphere FB can be derived only when the winning probability of the winning/winning lottery can be set in six stages, and can be derived only when the winning probability is equal to or more than a predetermined setting (for example, the “star shape” is the first winning). It is a suggestion that it is a setting other than the difficult setting, that the "shape of the crown" is either the first win-winning setting or the second win-winning setting. In each pseudo sphere FB, an RFID tag is embedded at a position displaced from the center of the pseudo sphere in a fixed orientation with respect to the marked area. The pseudo sphere FB is set such that various “marks” face the rear of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the starting point of the movable role moving area.

Furthermore, a blower device is provided as an interlocking device capable of sending wind to each movable accessory moving area (connection passage), and the blower device is operated based on the operation of the effect button during the pseudo ball performance period. The air is blown. The pseudo sphere FB may change its direction or slow down when it receives wind from a blower. In the case of adopting the configuration, the player operates the effect button 907 in the pseudo sphere effect in order to find information (small mark) that may be written on the pseudo sphere FB. Therefore, a new way of enjoying can be added to the game, and the interest can be improved. In other words, the pseudo-sphere production can be considered as an opportunity to know the result of the winning/winning lottery in advance or to overlook the winning probability setting of the winning/winning lottery. Therefore, it is possible to add more fun and excitement. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the mark of the pseudo sphere FB is arranged in the posture of facing rearward at the stage where the pseudo sphere FB is led out to the movable type accessory movement region, the operation of the effect button 907 can be performed more reliably. You can enjoy it.

Further, since the air blower can change the movement mode of the pseudo sphere FB while moving in the movable accessory moving area, the influence of the operation of the effect button 907 on the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB. Can be made large and easy to understand, and it is possible to further make the player feel that the operation of the player is reflected in the pseudo ball effect. Furthermore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period in which the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB changes in response to the operation of the effect button 907. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the monotonous feeling of the game by the pseudo ball effect and improving the interest is further exhibited.

It should be noted that the movement mode (ease of progress, etc.) of the pseudo sphere FB may be changed by a means other than the blower, and a protrusion or the like appearing and disappearing in the movable accessory moving area by driving a solenoid or a motor. A part of the floor surface of the movable accessory moving area provided may be slid/rotated, or the movable accessory moving area may move (vibrate, tilt, etc.). Further, as a suggestion or instruction for setting the winning probability, regarding a pattern of change in the movement mode of the mobile auditors, if a specific pattern is derived, setting of a specific winning probability is certain (specific It may not be derived if a setting other than the winning probability has been made), or a specific winning probability may have been set if a specific pattern has been derived (because settings other than the specific winning probability have been made. It can be higher than when you are there.

(G-3; Aspect example 3, winning/winning lottery, teaching of the result, and a game different from the normal game centered on granting of a privilege corresponding to winning) The game is not related to the result of the winning/winning lottery, and is a game. It may be configured such that an effect in which a predetermined mobile accessory is interlocked (movable accessory challenge effect) is performed based on an operation of the effect button 907 or the cross button 126 of the person. By performing the mobile role object challenge effect, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game. For example, a pseudo sphere FB and a device for bouncing the pseudo sphere FB into the air are provided, and the pseudo sphere FB jumps over an obstacle approaching the pseudo sphere (for example, a jump rope effect) or a plurality of rotatable targets. Aiming to shoot a pseudo sphere FB (shooting effect), changing the inclination of the plate on which the pseudo sphere FB is placed and carrying the pseudo sphere FB to the goal (transportation), and the lower end of the slope where the pseudo sphere FB rolls There is an effect (jump effect) or the like in which a rotatable jump table is provided in the section, the inclination of the jump table is adjusted by the cross button 126, and the pseudo sphere FB is appropriately jumped. Even if the mobile role object challenge production succeeds, it has nothing to do with the occurrence of the jackpot state.・Receiving specific data in a mobile interlocking game that teaches or exchanges data between the pachinko machine 10 and the server via the player's mobile communication terminal (the player can freely disclose the data. And the ability to update the record of mobile role challenge production.

The special display devices 43a and 43b may not be progressed if the mobile auditors' challenge production is enjoyed even if the game is not in progress (the win/no win lottery is not made). The operation of the effect button 907 or the like for the mobile accessory challenge effect may be valid during the variable display of No. 1 or until a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop. That is, by limiting the period in which the operation of the player is reflected in the mobile role object challenge production, the player who does not play the game occupies the pachinko machine 10, and the player who wants to play the game cannot play the game. Such a situation can be prevented.

(G-4; Aspect Example 4) A dish-shaped pseudo-ball rolling portion having a low center is provided, and a rotating body is provided in the central portion, and a V winning hole is provided in front of the pseudo-ball rolling portion. And a release hole. The pseudo sphere is led to the pseudo sphere rolling part so that the pseudo sphere rolling part can be turned, and the momentum of the pseudo sphere disappears, so that the pseudo sphere is repelled by the rotating body and the V prize in the front is won. It is configured to be able to enter the hole or the release hole. By operating the effect button, the player can change the rotation mode of the rotating body (for example, stop the rotation while pressing, rotate at low speed, rotate at high speed, etc.). However, if it is a pseudo sphere effect corresponding to the variable display teaching the big hit, the pseudo sphere can enter the V winning hole, but if it is the pseudo sphere effect corresponding to the variable display teaching the deviation, the pseudo sphere effect. Is impossible to enter the V winning hole (for example, a transparent protrusion is projected from the inside of the V winning hole so as not to be seen as much as possible).

It should be noted that an effect of acquiring a ball entry assistance option may be performed as a connecting effect in the middle. As a ball entry assistance option, it is possible to use a guide that projects upward from the floor of the pseudo ball rolling part and guides the pseudo ball to the V winning hole side, the V winning hole expands, the out hole narrows, and the V winning prize The position of the hole changes (teach the placement of the V winning hole in the roulette with a lamp), increase the number of pseudo spheres, temporarily build a wall when it is about to fall into the out hole, or blow out the wind (number of times limit) Yes) and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, it is also possible to provide the starting points of the movable role moving object region of the pseudo sphere effect at a plurality of locations (random).

In addition, when performing a relatively complicated pseudo sphere effect, the pseudo sphere effect may not proceed because the movement of the pseudo sphere stops or does not move in the desired direction even if it is moving. It is also possible to do it. In this respect, an exclusion means may be provided to remove the pseudo sphere from the mobile accessory moving area when the stay of the pseudo sphere in the mobile accessory moving area is detected. In this case, the clogging of the pseudo sphere can be eliminated. In addition, even when the movement of the mobile accessory for the pseudo ball production is too slow, the mobile accessory can be positively discharged from the mobile accessory moving area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap from the desired development of the mobile accessory production from becoming too large, and to eliminate the retention (clog) of the mobile accessory production. In particular, when a predetermined (for example, end) timing of the mobile auditors effect is matched with a predetermined timing of another member, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited.

The interlocking device may be used as the excluding device, and, for example, the floor of the movable accessory moving region is removed (by configuring the floor of the movable accessory moving region by a shutter and opening the shutter). , The mobile accessory existing in the mobile accessory moving area is discharged to the outside).

(G-5: Aspect example 5) A state in which the pseudo sphere FB can be visually recognized inside the effect button 907 may be generated. In this case, the performance is improved by, for example, making a difference in the degree of expectation at which the player gives a preferred instruction depending on whether or not the pseudo sphere FB can be confirmed via the effect button 907. Can be planned. In particular, instead of using the pseudo sphere FB, when performing a mobile character effect using another mobile character effect (for example, a mobile character effect in which a figure of a car passes through the mobile character effect moving area is performed. , The degree of expectation changes according to the type of vehicle), such an effect is more prominently exhibited. In addition, regarding the act of operating the production button 907 that the mobile accessory looks into, the production button can be interested in a novel change in the appearance of the production button 907 itself, and the appearance change and the expected occurrence degree of a predetermined state, etc. By associating with each other (increasing the expectation of a big hit), it is possible to improve the performance. In addition, since the mobile accessory appears on the effect button 907 that the player touches, it is possible for the player to feel the mobile accessory (mobile accessory effect) more closely, and to the mobile effect effect. Can raise the interest of. For example, when a big hit state occurs, a mobile accessory appears inside the effect button 907 (a mobile accessory flows in, a mobile accessory that is installed in advance with the blindfold removed (not actually used. The dummy) may be exposed). In this case, in a part of the pachinko machine 10 that is familiar to the player, it is possible to enjoy a new effect of relatively quietly grasping the occurrence of a big hit state.

It should be noted that the type of the jackpot state may be taught or suggested depending on the type of the mobile type accessory visually recognized inside the effect button 907. Furthermore, when the mobile accessory is switched to a state where it is visually recognized inside the effect button 907, a predetermined vibration (vibration due to the mobile accessory flowing into the effect button 907, or exclusive The vibrating means may be provided to cause the vibrating means to vibrate, etc.), or voice or the like may be derived.

It should be noted that as a state in which the movable accessory is visually recognizable in a specific manner inside the effect button 907 and success of the movable accessory effect are associated (one of success patterns). Good. In this case, it is possible to look forward to the derivation of the mobile accessory in the player's hand, and in the event of derivation, operating the effect button 907 can be made much more enjoyable. it can. By the way, the success of the mobile accessory production may provide the big hit state or the probability variation mode, or may increase the expectation of occurrence of the big hit state or the like. Further, it is desirable to provide it at a position outside the pachinko machine 10 or as far as possible outside the mounting surface on which the effect button 907 is attached, rather than at the back of the effect button 907. However, a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the mobile accessory collides with the effect button 907 when the effect button 907 is operated (even if the operation button 907 is operated, the operation unit of the effect button 907 and the mobile accessory are The movable accessory is fixed so that it does not abut and the movable accessory is not relatively displaced, and the movable accessory does not move even if the production button 907 is operated. Alternatively, when the effect button 907 is operated, it is desirable that the operation unit of the effect button 907 and the movable accessory be displaced similarly.

In addition, it is desirable that the mobile accessory that appears inside the effect button 907 be a real mobile accessory that is used in the mobile accessory effect (the mobile accessory can be displaced to the inside of the effect button 907. ), a mobile accessory that is the same as the real thing is prepared only for showing inside the effect button 907, a smaller size than the original is prepared, or a mobile accessory with built-in display means. May be displayed, or a member on which a mobile accessory is printed may be prepared so that an effect similar to that of the present means can be obtained. Further, when an effect that makes the movable accessory visible is derived inside the effect button 907, the operation of the effect button 907 may be restricted until the effect is made visible. However, it does not have to be regulated.

In addition, the configuration in which the movable accessory is visually recognizable inside the effect button 907 of the example of the present embodiment is the same as that of the firing device 915 or the like that can change the movement mode of the movable accessory based on the operation of the effect button 907. It may be embodied in a pachinko machine or a slot machine that does not have an interlocking device. Furthermore, for example, it is applied to a configuration in which an object, which is a motif of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine, changes between a visible state inside the effect button 907 and an invisible state. Is also possible.

Further, for example, an operation measuring unit capable of measuring the strength with which the effect button 907 is operated or the displacement speed of the operated effect button 907 is provided, and the operation of the effect button 907 is performed based on the measurement result of the operation measuring unit. The operation pattern of the interlocking means capable of changing the operation of the pseudo sphere FB (movable accessory) may be changed according to the above. For example, in the case of fast and strong, the interlocking means may be configured to operate quickly and strongly. In this case, although the interlocking means is not directly operated, the interlocking means operates in a manner similar to the feeling of the operation, so that the pseudo-ball effect interlocked with the operation of the effect button 907 can be more thoroughly enjoyed. You can get it. In addition, it is possible to grasp the condition of the operation on the effect button 907 by the operation measuring means. For example, when the effect button 907 is struck, it is possible to prevent the succession effect from being unsuccessful. It is also possible to take measures to suppress damage. In addition, as the operation measuring means, a pressure gauge capable of contacting a portion of the effect button 907 inside the pachinko machine 10 which is not touched by the player, a speed sensor capable of detecting a passing speed, and the like can be mentioned.

Further, at least in the interlocking state in which the operation of the effect button 907 can operate the interlocking means, between the effect button 907 and the interlocking means, there is a subordinate effector means for interlocking at least one of the effect button 907 and the interlocking means. It may be provided. For example, a combination of dial-type and push-type production buttons (operating means) is used, and in the pseudo-sphere production, movable parts of cranes (at least a part of which was normally hidden) appeared. However, it is also possible to perform a pseudo sphere effect in which the crane accessory moves in accordance with the movement of the dial, and the operation of catching the pseudo sphere FB is performed by operating the push button. The accompanying effect means may be configured to display the display means, turn on the light emitting means, or a combination thereof in addition to the movable accessory.

(G-6; Application of interlocking operation means and mobile accessory production) With respect to the configuration (interlocking means) that can cause a change in the movement mode of the pseudo sphere FB (mobile accessory) of (g) above, Although it is interlocked with the operation of the player's effect button 907, it may be configured not to be interlocked. For example, a configuration (interlocking device) that can cause a change in the movement mode of the pseudo sphere FB (movable accessory) may be configured to be appropriately operated according to the decision on the pachinko machine 10 side.

In addition, the mode of the region that can be operated by the player may be changed according to the behavior of the mobile accessory such as the pseudo ball FB. For example, the handle 18 and the effect button 907 may vibrate when the pseudo sphere FB rides on a step or hits a wall. Further, the handle 18 and the effect button 907 are configured such that the protruding length from the mounting portion can be changed, the inclination with respect to the mounting portion can be changed, and the handle can be rotated. For example, it may be configured such that it can be displaced (uphill, downhill, moving in a spiral path, etc.). Further, the displacement amount (vibration, protrusion amount, tilt amount, etc.) of the handle 18 or the effect button 907 may be increased stepwise according to the effect that the jackpot expectation level is stepped up. .. In addition, various lamps provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 may be bright when the pseudo sphere FB passes through a bright passage, and may be dark when passing through a dark passage. When these configurations are adopted, it is possible to make the pseudo-sphere effect (movable accessory effect) feel closer and to enjoy the pseudo-sphere effect more. It should be noted that a configuration in which a member operable by the player is operated according to the behavior of the mobile accessory corresponds to the sensation means.

(G-7; Application 2 of interlocking operation means and movable accessory production) A pair of left and right shutters is provided in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and a boxer is provided for each of the left and right shutters. A movable accessory imitating the upper half of the body is provided, and the boxer accessory on the left side is configured such that the right arm portion and the left arm portion can appear left and right in conjunction with the operation of the effect button 125, and the head of the boxer accessory. The boxer part on the left side is almost the same as the one on the right side, but the sub-control device 262 is drive-controlled to play a boxing game in the mobile part production. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the punch of the boxer role hits the head or body of the opponent boxer role, the boxer role is mechanically transformed into a form corresponding to down. The decorative pattern display device 42 may display a boxing background or various auxiliary displays associated with punching and down. It is also possible to incorporate electric drive means such as a solenoid for making the boxer accessory into a down state inside the boxer accessory, and drive the electric drive means at an appropriate position.

(H; Auxiliary display) In front of the mobile accessory moving area (effect passage member), the pseudo sphere FB moving in the mobile accessory moving area while visually recognizing its own aspect from the front of the pachinko machine 10. A transmissive display means (for example, a transmissive liquid crystal panel or an EL panel) that is visible may be provided (installed between a pair of transparent plates of the glass unit 137). In this case, the behavior of the pseudo sphere FB and the display mode of the transmissive display means can be combined (overlapped) to make the pseudo sphere effect more interesting. Further, it is also possible to perform a connection effect between the pseudo-sphere effect in the movable accessory moving area and the connection effect in the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, in front of the frame portion of the decorative symbol display device 42). .. In the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42, a light emitting means, a movable accessory (a structure that turns and turns over), and the like are provided so that the visual aspect can be visually recognized from the front, and the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42. You may perform the effect of joining in the section.

(I; Guidance display, hold icon) In the first embodiment, when there is no hold, the mobile prize moving area 404 in which the pseudo ball effect is performed from the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b into which the game balls enter Between the attention part is moved to guide the player's line of sight over a period of time, and when there is a hold, between the hold icon 461 corresponding to the variation display to be exhausted and the movable role moving area 404 in which the pseudo ball effect is performed. Guide display is performed to move the attention area to guide the player's line of sight. Here, the mode of the guide display is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed according to the arrangement of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b and the mobile accessory moving area 404, the concept of the model, and the like. .. In addition, for example, the guide display may be performed by a transmissive display unit that is arranged in front of the game area and allows the game area to be visually recognized. The guidance display may be omitted.

Further, a predetermined suggestion or teaching may be configured to be executable according to the mode pattern of the guidance display. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect value of the guide display that is performed when the player enters the start winning devices 33a and 33b, and to make the succession effect series more magnificent and interesting. Further, although the hold icon 461 and the mode of the light emitting means (three-color LED in this example) built in the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b, the guidance display and, by extension, the suggestion of the hand-over effect are performed. The contents and the like are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, in the above-described embodiment, even if the color of the hold icon 461 is changed to a color other than the default (silver), the hand-over effect is not necessarily performed, but the hold icon 461 is provided only when the hand-over effect is performed. May be configured so as to change (a change to a mode other than the default mode), or a mode indicating that a hand-over effect is performed may be separately prepared.

(J; Movable Range of Movable Floor of Second Embodiment) In the second embodiment, the second movable floor 814 and the third movable floor 815 located at the end point of the movable accessory moving region 821 are connected passages. The lower end of 805 may be located slightly below the floor surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the pseudo sphere FB reaching the end point from running backward to the connection passage 805 side. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the connection of the production is deteriorated and the like because the pseudo-sphere FB reaching the end point is returned to the connection passage 805 and is visible, and the performance of the pseudo-sphere production is improved. You can

Further, in the second embodiment, the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 located at the start point of the movable accessory moving region 821 are slightly above the floor surface of the upper end portion of the connection passage 805. It may be located. In this case, when the pseudo sphere FB is fired toward the connecting passage 805 side, the pseudo sphere FB collides with the peripheral portion of the upper end portion of the connecting passage 805, and the pseudo sphere FB is damaged or the starting pseudo sphere FB is connected to the connecting passage 805. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the 805 side is no longer displaced.

Further, the second movable floor 814 can be arranged at the start point of the upper movable role moving area 822, the third movable floor 815 can be arranged at the end point of the upper movable role moving area 822, and the first movable floor 813 can be arranged. It may be arranged such that the upper movable type accessory moving area 822 can be arranged at the upper retracted position retracted to a side (information) different from the start point to the end point side. In this case, without passing through the storage member 804, the second movable floor 814 receives the pseudo sphere FB that has moved in the lower movable role moving area 823, and the second movable floor 814 remains as it is in the upper movable role moving area. It is possible to move to the starting point of 822 and perform a pseudo-sphere effect in the upward moving accessory moving region 822.

A plurality of pseudo balls FB may be placed on the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 at one time. For example, in the case of deriving the pseudo sphere FB in the order of white→blue in the upper mobile type accessory moving area 822, the first movable floor 813 takes a position where two diameters of the pseudo sphere FB are lowered from the receiving port 811. , The pseudo sphere FB is received from the storage member 804 in the order of blue→white. After that, the position lower than the starting point of the upper movable type accessory moving area 822 by one diameter of the pseudo sphere FB is set, and the white pseudo sphere FB is fired from the starting point of the upper movable type accessory moving area 822. Then, the upper movable type accessory moving region 822 is displaced to the starting point, and the blue pseudo sphere FB is fired from the starting point of the upper movable role moving region 822.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 incline upward toward the connecting passage 805 side, but do not incline upward. Good. For example, the center of the upper surface of the first movable floor 813 may be recessed (positioning recesses may be provided) to position the pseudo sphere FB.

In the second embodiment, the storage member 804 and the effect passage member 803 are provided on the opposite sides of the main body 802, but they may not be arranged on the opposite side. Further, the inclinations of the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 may be changeable. In other words, while the pseudo sphere FB is positioned at the starting point (or in the vicinity thereof) of the movable accessory moving area 821 from the storage member 804 and is on standby, the pseudo sphere FB is tilted downward in a direction away from the effect passage member 803, and the pseudo sphere effect is produced. It is also possible to incline downward to the effect passage member 803 side at the start. In this case, the starting solenoid 826 is unnecessary.

In addition, when the end timing of the hand-over effect is matched with the end timing of the variable display, not only the adjustment of the time of the connection effect (pseudo-sphere display effect) of the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed, but also the time of the pseudo-sphere effect is changed. Adjustment may be performed. That is, for example, the movement of the pseudo sphere FB may be accelerated or delayed by adjusting the operation of the starting solenoid 826 (if the solenoid is unreasonable, the drive source is appropriately replaced with a motor or the like).

(K; Handover effect of the third embodiment) In the third embodiment, the handing over effect of taking over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific area 854 is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 852, but in such a configuration Additionally or alternatively, as in the first embodiment, a hand over effect is performed by using an effect that uses a movable role (pseudo ball FB), or a hand over effect is performed by using a movable role. It may be that. Further, the switching timing (the number of times, the order, etc.) between the state of visually recognizing the game sphere moving in the specific area 854 and the state of visually recognizing the takeover effect of the decorative symbol display device 852 is not particularly limited, and for example, A state in which the game ball in the specific area 854 is visually recognized may be sandwiched between the hand-over effects.

In addition, since the type of the big hit state given when the player enters the V winning hole 894 at the time of winning the small hit, the game ball moves in the specific area 854 (away area 856, etc.). The decorative pattern display device 852 may be configured to give a suggestion of a big hit state when there is a ball in the V winning hole 894 while it is being played.

Further, the configuration of the specific winning unit 853 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of distribution devices in the remote area 856 may be increased to increase the number of branch effects for notifying whether the succession effect is successful (effect continues). Further, for example, the sub-V winning hole 896 of the sub-sorting device 873 may be a hole for guiding the game ball to the lower area 857 instead of the hole to which the big hit state is given.

Incidentally, regarding the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area 854 (remote area 856) while the hand-over effect is being performed, it is possible to completely make it invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 on which the player is located. It is desirable that the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 for a player who is anxious. Furthermore, the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area 854 while the hand-over effect is performed is not so conspicuous, while the visibility of the game ball is reduced so that the hand-over effect is conspicuous (for example, , A semi-transparent member is provided in front of the game sphere moving in the specific area 854, a plate-like body for refracting or irregularly reflecting light to the front is provided, a beam splitter is provided, and a transmissive display device is provided. It may be provided, and a display that is relatively difficult to visually recognize at the corresponding portion) may be provided.

In addition, the brightness of the game area (the brightness of the light emitting means provided in or near the game area) can be adjusted based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the cross button 126) that the player can operate. (The function of adjusting the brightness constitutes the brightness adjusting means). In particular, by adjusting the brightness, the brightness of the specific area 854 can be adjusted, and the game ball moving in the distant area 856 may be easily visible or difficult to see. Further, only the brightness of the remote area 856 can be changed, the brightness of both the upper area 855 and the lower area 857 can be adjusted at once, or the upper area 855 and the lower area 857 can be adjusted. Regarding the above, the brightness may be adjusted individually. In addition, a light emitting means (brightness adjustable) may be provided so as to irradiate the game board 30 with light at an irradiation angle that makes it difficult to see the area 857 away from the rear of the game board 30. In this way, by making the brightness of the specific area 854 changeable, the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854 and the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854 (remote area 856) can be changed more clearly. It is possible to adopt a display mode that meets the demands of players and the like who do not want to be distracted.

In addition, for example, in the first branch 871, there is a safe passage (main passage) that leads to the second branch 872, and an out passage (outgoing passage) that leads to the outside of the specific area 854 and thus to the outside of the game area. With regard to the out passage, a first section extending in parallel with the safe passage in the front-rear direction and a second section for guiding the game ball moving in the first section to the discharge passage leading to the outside of the gaming machine are provided. Good. In this case, even if the game ball moving in the safe passage and the out passage is visible to the player, immediately after the game ball enters the out passage, the fact that the game ball enters the out passage is minimized. It can be confusing. This makes it possible to postpone the announcement of whether the game ball has moved to the branch or not, and has a stronger interest in teaching whether the game ball has entered the out passage or not, which is performed by the transfer effect. You can get it.

Note that the passage in the separated area 856 does not necessarily have to be transparent, and it suffices that the moving game ball can be visually recognized, such as the height of the side wall of the passage is relatively low.

(L; Switching from a state of visually recognizing the takeover effect of the third embodiment to a state of visually observing the behavior of the game ball in a specific area) In the third embodiment, the lower area 857 is arranged behind the transmissive liquid crystal, The game ball is configured to be visible only when it enters the lower area 857, but may be configured to be visible at all times. Further, as a part of the effect, the lower region 857 arranged behind the transmissive liquid crystal is in a visible state, but a pattern such that the game ball is not led out to the lower region 857 may be provided (in that case). Teaches that the jackpot state does not occur in the decorative pattern display device 852).

In the third embodiment, the sub-sorting device 873 is omitted, and when the big hit state is generated by the behavior of the game ball entering the specific area 854, the game ball is always moved to the lower area 857. Good. In such a configuration, a state in which the behavior of the game sphere in the lower region 857 is visually recognized and a state in which it is not visually recognized may be switchable, or may be configured to be visually recognized. Furthermore, regarding the switching between the state in which the behavior of the game sphere in the lower region 857 is visually recognized and the state in which the game sphere is not visually recognized, when the lottery is selected, the number of fluctuations or the number of times the player enters the specific region 854 is equal to or more than a specified number. If it is (reset when the number of times reaches the specified number), it is executed when a player clears a predetermined condition such as a corresponding operation (such as operating the effect button 125 at a predetermined timing or clearing the operation effect). May be In addition, the visibility of the remote area 856 can be changed (the amount of light irradiation is changed, a polarizing plate, a shutter, etc. are provided in front of the remote area 856), and the game ball moving in the remote area 856 is positively viewed. It may be possible to switch between a state and a state in which it is not visually recognized. Further, such switching may be possible by the player's operation, or the route may be visually recognized when there is a plurality of routes of which the jackpot expectation degree changes and the route is advantageous.

In addition, based on the detection of the immediately preceding detection switch 892, the lower sphere area 857 is not switched to a visually recognizable state immediately before the game sphere is led to the lower tier area 857, but is switched by the detection of the chance ball detection switch 881. Alternatively, the lottery may be performed to determine the time from when the immediately preceding detection switch 892 or the chance ball detection switch 881 is detected until the lower area 857 is visible. In addition, as an effect, there is a pattern in which the transmissive liquid crystal gradually changes to transparent, or after the transmissive liquid crystal is switched between transparent and opaque multiple times, it is kept transparent or opaque. Good.

In addition, the switching between the first effect state and the second effect state is performed based on a predetermined trigger of the gaming machine (e.g., winning in a corresponding lottery, the number of games exceeds a set value). Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed based on the corresponding operation of the operation means operable by the player. Further, for example, instead of the hand-over effect, an effect state in which the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area is directly visually recognized may be provided (switchable automatically or manually).

Further, in the third embodiment, when the game ball is drawn out to the lower area 857, the game ball is drawn out from the decorative pattern display device 852 side that is adjacent to the upper part of the game ball. It may be configured to be derived from the location. However, in order to improve the connection with the hand-over effect, it is desirable that the game ball be led out from the member side that performs the hand-over effect. In addition, although not particularly mentioned in the third embodiment, the game ball moving in the remote area 856 (the game ball moving in the specific area 854) is almost always visible, and for example, a decorative pattern display. It may be configured so that it does not pass through a hidden position behind the device 852. For example, the portion between the discharge hole 865 and the first branch 871 in the upper area 855, the portion between the chance hole 878 and the immediately preceding detection switch 892 is arranged behind the semitransparent portion of the frame surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative symbol display device 852. It may be done.

(M; Detection Switch of Third Embodiment) The installation location and the number of detection switches provided in the specific area 854 of the third embodiment for grasping the whereabouts of the game ball are not particularly limited and may be appropriately set. It can be changed. For example, in the first branch 871, a detection switch may be provided in a passage before branching and a main passage after branching (a passage leading to the second branch 872).

Further, for example, a second out ball detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball that has entered the out hole 880 of the second distribution device 877 is, for example, a chance ball detection switch 881 or a challenge ball detection switch 882. A pre-detection switch provided relatively close to the second distribution device 877 and a main detection switch provided downstream of the pre-detection switch are provided, and the immediately preceding detection switch 892 after the game ball enters the chance hole 878. It is also possible to minimize the difference between the time until it is detected and the time from when the game ball enters the detachment hole 880 until it is detected by this detection switch. In this case, an effect as to whether or not the game ball is led to the lower area 857 can be surely performed (time can be surely secured).

(N; Handover effect that does not take over the behavior of the game sphere of the third embodiment) In the third embodiment, the behavior of the game sphere that enters the specific area 854 and enters the discharge hole 865 of the upper area 855 is taken over. In this way (based on the detection of the hand-over detection switch 866), the hand-over effect in the decorative symbol display device 852 is performed, but the game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b (start ball entering means). When a big hit is won in a win/loss lottery performed when a ball is hit (so-called direct hit) or when the fake is performed, a display effect similar to the takeover effect may be executed.

In this case, even if the game ball has not entered the specific area 854 (even if there is no detection information of the handover detection switch 866 corresponding to the discharge hole 865 of the upper area 855), the handover effect may be executed. Yes, it is possible to increase the chances of deriving the takeover effect. In particular, the succession effect that is performed based on a win or a win or the like can be determined more freely regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854, and a variation of the transfer effect that has an impact can be provided. it can. By the way, when the hand-over effect is started by the win/loss lottery or the like, there is no game ball that moves in the specific area 854 in parallel with the progress of the hand-over effect (the hand-over effect is a game ball that entered the specific area 854). Since the behavior of is not taken over), the jackpot state is taught in the takeover effect.

In addition to the winning/winning lottery that was won in the jackpot state, the succession effect can be derived by using the winning/winning lottery that is not won in the jackpot state. Even if there is no entry of the game ball into the specific area 854, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hand-over effect is performed, and the lottery is won in the lottery (for example, about 1/200 is won). Regardless, when it is possible to confirm that the hand-over effect has started, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is always understood that the jackpot state will occur.

(O; Peripheral configuration of the V winning hole of the third embodiment) In the third embodiment, until the gaming ball enters the V winning hole 894 of the final sorting device 893, the gaming ball is in the V winning hole 894. It is not clear whether or not the player will enter the ball, and immediately after the game ball has entered the V winning hole 894, the game ball is invisible. May be provided, and the game ball moving in the special guide passage may be configured to be visible.

In this case, it is possible to more surely see how the game ball moving in the specific area 854 enters the V winning hole 894. Therefore, it is possible to firmly recognize the development of the game as to whether or not the jackpot state is given (avoiding the progress of the game without knowing it well), and the game ball has entered the special guide passage. In this case, it is possible to secure time to have the game balls moving in the special guidance passage viewed with pleasure. As a result, interest can be improved. In particular, it is considered that the takeover effect is derived in a visual mode that is easier to see than the behavior of the game ball, and as described above, the mode of the takeover effect moves in the specific area 854 that is the trigger for starting the takeover effect. When it is configured to be taken over by the game ball, it may be relatively difficult to follow the game ball with eyes (it happens that some players happen to be in such a situation). By adopting the configuration, such concern can be eliminated.

Further, for example, instead of showing the behavior of the game ball that almost always enters the V prize hole 894, the game ball that entered the V prize hole 894 or the deviation hole 895 may be shown for a while. .. In this case, it is possible to confirm which one of the V winning hole 894 and the removal hole 895 the player has entered, which makes it easier to understand which one the player has won.

(P) A form and display position of the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and an effect using the hold icon 461 (the contents of the change information are grasped when the change information is held and stored, and the hold icon is displayed. The corresponding production (holding prefetching production for suggesting the jackpot expectation, etc.) in the form of 461 can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode of the hold icon 461 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variable display based on the entered ball. The holding icon 461 has a mode in which it has information as to whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, or may be configured to have such a mode. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to detect the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of positions of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the proximity detection means (for example, the light emitting unit) connected to the input/output port 554 of the sub control device 262. Also, a proximity detection sensor having a light receiving unit, a touch panel, or the like) may be provided. For example, when the player brings his finger or the like close to the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42, the mode of the hold icon 461 is based on the detection of the finger or the like. It may be configured so that it may change or move. In this case, interest in the hold icon 461 can be improved.

(Q) In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the timing of firing (the firing interval) of the launching device 60, but the invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the firing control circuit 312 may fire the firing. It may be configured to measure timing (interval between firings). In this case, the control load on main controller 261 can be suppressed.

(R) In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement and number of the first starting winning device 33a, the second starting winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable winning device 32, etc. are not particularly limited and can be appropriately arranged for each model. Is.

For example, a first variable winning device that can be entered when the game ball is passed through at least the left side region of the game area, and a first variable winning device that can be entered only when the game ball is passed through the right side region. A two-variable winning device may be provided. Furthermore, for example, both the first and second variable winning devices are arranged in the right side area, and the gaming ball entered in the second variable winning device is configured to be enterable, and the probability variation winning device. The second variable winning device may be opened only when a probability variation jackpot is detected by a probability variation winning detection switch for detecting whether the player has entered the game.

Further, for example, a game ball that opens upward and can always enter a game ball that moves in the game area, and a pair of left and right first prize holes into which the game ball that entered the ball part can enter, , A second winning opening and a first passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the winning portion to the first winning opening or the second winning opening, and a second passage, a first passage and a second passage A distribution device that is provided at the branch point of the game ball and that alternately guides the game balls that have entered the ball entrance section to the first passage and the second passage, and a left start that detects the game balls that have entered the first winning opening A start winning device unit including a winning switch and a right starting winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the second winning opening is provided, and the first variation display is based on the detection of the left starting winning switch (for example, at maximum. Up to four) may be suspended, and the second variation display may be suspended (for example, up to four) based on the detection of the right start prize switch.

Further, for example, the first start winning device 33a is arranged so as to be able to enter when the game ball passes through at least the left side region of the game area, and the second starting winning device 33b places the game ball in the right side region. It may be arranged such that it can enter the ball only when it is passed through. In addition, the second starting winning device 33b may be configured such that the game ball can be entered at all times (in this case, in the normal mode in which the game ball is launched in the left side area, The variation time of the second variation display is long (for example, 1 hour or 2 hours), and the variation time of the second variation display is compared in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode in which the game ball is launched in the right side area. (For example, 2 seconds to 3 minutes), and when the big hit state occurs, the first variable display or the second variable display that was being displayed may be deleted). In the first embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a (and the second starting winning device 33b) is provided in the upper center of the variable display device unit 35 (the position where the sub display device 48 is provided), and the Even if there is no effect of the decorative symbol display device 42, the behavior of the game ball that has entered the first starting prize device 33a may be smoothly transferred to the transfer effect. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation mode is configured to be maintained until the big hit state occurs, but the upper limit may be set by the number of variations, for example. Furthermore, in the probability variation mode, a falling lottery may be performed based on a winning prize for starting to determine whether or not the probability variation mode is switched to the normal mode.

(S) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the open/close pattern of the variable jackpot 32 of each jackpot type, etc. are not particularly limited and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the variable winning device 32 may perform the same operation as in the “4RS” jackpot state, and set the jackpot to which the “normal mode” is given after the jackpot state ends. Further, for example, the “latent probability mode” may be added after the jackpot state of “4RS” ends.

The decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured such that the instruction about winning the probability variation jackpot is always performed until the corresponding jackpot state ends at the latest, or the corresponding jackpot state ends. Even if it is not performed (even in the probability variation mode internally, the decorative pattern display device 42 moves to the same pullback stage as the time reduction mode, and in the time reduction mode, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is changed to the time display. If the upper limit number (100 times) of the shortening mode is exceeded, the transition to the probability variation stage may be performed).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the win/loss lottery is changed, but the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high-income state given after the jackpot state ends ( The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of variation times) are prepared. Further, in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b, the "small hit" may be won, or the "small win" may be omitted.

In addition, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, the opening/closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when the player wins, and the like can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the winning upper limit of the game ball in one opening to the second starting winning device 33b may be set. More specifically, a starting winning upper limit counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second starting winning device 33b up to the winning upper limit is provided, and when the second starting winning device 33b is opened, it is started. A value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set in the winning upper limit counter, and when the detection of the second starting prize switch 224b is performed, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the starting winning upper limit counter is performed, and the second starting winning Even when the timing of closing the device 33b has not yet arrived while the device 33b is in the open state, if the value of the starting winning upper limit counter becomes "0", the second starting winning device 33b is immediately opened. It may be configured to be in a closed state.

(T) In the above-described embodiment, the second variation display that is retained after the first variation display that has already been retained is displayed in the reserved order such that the second variation display is digested before the first variation display. The second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display in a backward and forward manner, but the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning a prize device 33a, And, regardless of whether it is the second variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b. The corresponding variable displays may be held in order, and the previously held variable displays may be sequentially consumed.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the big win is won in the winning/winning lottery performed based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, and the winning is based on entering the second starting winning device 33b. The distribution ratio of the jackpot types that can be given is different from that when the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery, but the jackpot types may be the same. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the prize balls to be given to the player depending on whether there is a ball to the first starting prize device 33a or a second starting prize device 33b. Although the numbers are different, they may be the same.

(U: Mobile interlocking game) In the above-described embodiment, data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine maker via a communication portable terminal owned by the player (so-called mobile game). It may be configured to be able to play (interlocking game). Furthermore, when terminating the mobile linked game, a two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the mobile communication terminal, and at the same time, the mobile communication terminal In a configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of fluctuations of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the number of occurrences of various jackpots. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game may be configured to include information indicating the values of various counters. Further, information on the total number of shots of the game balls, the type of derived effect, the number of times, the number of times the player has operated the effect button 125 during the button effect, and the like are also included in the two-dimensional code. Good. In this case, the gaming machine manufacturer can grasp the gaming status. The value of the counter may be erased by being two-dimensionally encoded, and the other values may be stored (even if the power is turned off).

(V) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the main process (see FIG. 9) and then the normal process (see FIG. 10). However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after the step S111 of the main process, the process of updating the counter value and the like performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above-described embodiment is performed. For example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec, The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. As the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring circuit 542 outputs the power failure signal SK1 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which a flag indicating occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

(W) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the checking process (whether the win/fail flag or the like). It may be configured such that whether or not the big hit state is generated, the pattern of variable display, and the like are determined according to the (state).

(X; Simultaneous change) In the above embodiment, when one of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is performing the variable display, the other variable display is not performed (standby). However, the variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b may be configured to be simultaneously executable. That is, if there is a hold for each of the first variable display and the second variable display, the corresponding variable display is executed (except during the hit state). It should be noted that, in the state where the variable display for teaching the occurrence of the big hit state is being performed, the variable display overlapping the variable display may not be newly started. Furthermore, when one variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner that teaches the occurrence of a big hit state, the other variable display is interrupted even if the other variable display is changing (restart after the big hit state ends. ), or may be deleted.

Further, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the first variable display and the variable display by the decorative symbol corresponding to the second variable display (hereinafter, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display) at the same time. It may be displayed, or either one (the second variable display or the one stopped and displayed first) may be preferentially displayed, or both may be viewed and only one may be viewed. It may be configured to appropriately switch to the state described above.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially display the effect variation display for which the specific character display is derived on the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, when one of the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display is started, it is determined whether or not the other effect is being varied. Confirm whether it is derived, do not display the one in the negative determination, check whether the specific character display is derived in the other production variation display in the positive determination, do not display one when derived, If not derived, one may be displayed (the mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched from one effect variation display to the other effect variation display somewhere). In this case, it is possible to increase the chances of deriving the specific character display.

It should be noted that whether or not a specific character display is derived in the other effect change display is not only a condition for the visible display of one effect change display, but also (when a big hit goes through the out-of-front/reach reach). Whether or not the out-of-front/rear reach is derived may be set as the condition for the visible display of one effect variation display.

Further, a specific character display is derived in one of the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display, and the teaching of the occurrence of the jackpot state is given in the other effect variation display overlapping with the one effect variation display. When the one effect variation display ends later than the other effect variation display when performed, the one effect variation display is shortened to the end timing of the other effect variation display (forced termination). If the one effect change display ends earlier than the other effect change display, the one effect change display is configured to be extended to the end timing of the other effect change display. Good. In this case, it is possible to suggest and teach that the jackpot state has been won by utilizing the display of the specific character. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific character from being replaced with another effect display.

In addition, the specific character display includes an extension effect display used when extending the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display, and a shortening effect display used when shortening. May be prepared. In this case, while suppressing the discomfort, it is possible to suddenly extend or shorten the effect variation display from which the specific character display is derived (connect to a mode that suggests and teaches the winning in the jackpot state).

In addition, in the high-ball entering state, the variation times of the first variation display and the second variation display may be set to be relatively short, or only the variation time of the second variation display may be relatively set. It may be configured to be set short. Further, the second variation time may be set to be relatively long in the low entry state, and the first variation time may be set to be relatively long in the high entry state. The remaining time display may be performed to suggest or teach the remaining time of the first fluctuation time and the second fluctuation time.

(Y) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state in which entry into the specific area is allowed, and a closed state in which entry into the specific area is prohibited ( Detecting the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means, the specific ball entering means and the non-specific ball entering means that can enter the game ball that entered the specific area Specific entrance detecting means (condition establishment detecting means), special starting means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and detecting a game ball entering the special starting means Equipped with a special starting detection means and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entering means, when the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is a specific ball entering means and a non-specific ball entering means. Whichever of the following cases, the player is given a predetermined number of game values (gaming balls), and the main control means, based on the detection of the special start detecting means, the variable entrance means for the first time. Only a small hit state in which it is opened once or a plurality of times, or the variable ball entering means is opened for a second time longer than the first time, or a specified number of variable winning means are opened. One round until the game ball is entered, repeat this for a specified number of times to win or lose the jackpot. If you win the jackpot in the lottery, the jackpot state is generated. The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a big hit state is generated when a big hit is won in a win/win lottery, and when the specific entrance detection means is detected.

(Z) In addition to a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, various game machines such as a sparrow ball, a slot machine as a spinning machine, and a game machine of a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. You may implement as.

(Z-1) As a basic configuration of the slot machine (turning type gaming machine), there is provided "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and thereafter displaying the identification information for starting. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

For example, “a box-shaped main body having an opening on the front side, a door body provided to be able to open and close the front side opening of the main body, and a start-up operation means provided on the front side of the door body for the player to operate. , And a stop operation means, a bet means capable of betting a game value, and an operation of the start operation means in a state where a necessary number of game values are bet, to generate a special game state advantageous to the player. Main control means for performing a win/no win lottery, and variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information (for example, a plurality of annular reels having symbols as identification information of a plurality of types on the outer periphery at predetermined intervals are provided. Display unit), the identification information of the variable display means is variably displayed based on the operation of the start operation means in a state where a required number of game values are bet, and the operation of the stop operation means is triggered. As a gaming machine in which the identification information can be stopped in a stop mode corresponding to the result of the win/no win, a pseudo ball effect device 49 is provided (for example, above the variable display means, the decorative symbol display of the above embodiment is displayed. The device 42 may be configured to include a display unit (connecting production unit) and pseudo-ball production devices 49 provided on both sides thereof. Of course, it is also possible to provide an effect button such as the effect button 125 of the above embodiment on the front side of the slot machine. Also, a medal or a model imitating a medal may be used as the mobile accessory.

(Z-2) As a basic configuration of a gaming machine (ball-using spinning type gaming machine) in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, "identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string including a plurality of identification information A variable display means for confirming and displaying, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) is performed. Alternatively, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of the stop is the specific identification information. With a special game state generating means, a ball is used as a game medium (the game ball of a pachinko machine is shared), and a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. When it occurs, the game machine is configured so that many balls are paid out.

(Aa) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided, and an effect mode according to the date and time information of the real-time clock may be derived. Further, it may be configured such that the effect that is easily selected changes depending on the time or the date (the table for the effect that is easily selected changes).

(Bb) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the win/loss lot may be set in multiple stages. That is, for example, when it is possible to set the winning probability of the winning/winning lottery in six stages, a first winning/winning determination table and a second winning/winning determination table that store a value corresponding to a “big hit” (each as a value corresponding to a big hit The number of random number counters C1 to be stored is different, provided that one of the first and second determination tables of a predetermined set is the same as the first or second determination table of another predetermined set. 6) may be provided. Furthermore, a setting flag indicating which win/loss determination table set is referred to, and a function of changing the win/loss determination table set indicating that the setting flag refers to (operable by game hall personnel on the back side of the inner frame 12). Setting operation means, setting lock means for switching between a state in which setting change based on the setting operation means is permitted and a state in which the setting change is not permitted, and a setting confirmation means for confirming (displaying) the hit/miss determination table set to be referred) Etc. may be provided.

In addition, when adopting the said structure, you may be comprised so that the setting estimation element production|presentation which can perform the estimation of the set hit/miss determination table set can be derived. For example, winning/winning lottery can be set in 6 stages of settings 1 to 6, and an effect that the possibility of appearing as the number of settings becomes smaller (or larger) can be provided, or can be derived only with predetermined settings. It may be possible to provide an effect with a certain effect.

(Cc) In the above-described embodiment, the first win/fail flag, the second win/fail flag, and the small hit flag are the first win/fail flag and the second win/fail for the win/fail random number storage area of the corresponding holding area of the special variation holding area. By overwriting information corresponding to the flag and the small hit flag, the first hit/miss flag, the second hit/miss flag, and the small hit flag are configured to be turned on. Separately, a first win/fail flag, a second win/fail flag, and a small hit flag may be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the 10RS flag, the 4RS flag, and the 10RN flag are the first winning/disabling flag, the second winning/disabling flag, and the small value with respect to the winning type random number storage area of the corresponding holding area of the special variation holding area. By overwriting the information corresponding to the hit flag, the 10RS flag, the 4RS flag, and the 10RN flag are configured to be turned on. However, in addition to the winning type random number storage area, the 10RS flag, the 4RS flag, Also, a 10RN flag may be provided.

Further, at the time of starting the variable display, it may be possible to refer to the corresponding hit/miss judgment table based on the value of the hit/nozzle random number counter C1 stored in the hit/miss random number storage area to determine whether or not a big hit. Further, at the start of variable display, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the corresponding type determination table based on the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the winning type random number storage area.

In addition, at the time when the variable display is stored in a reserved state, it is determined whether or not a big hit, and the like, and the configuration for sending the information to the sub control device 262 is simplified (first win/fail flag, second win/fail flag, Also, the small hit flag or the like is omitted, or not provided in each holding area, but a first winning/failure flag, a second winning/failing flag, and a small hit flag are provided separately from the special variation holding area. , May be deleted when the advance command is sent) or may be omitted (the success/failure determination process, the type determination process, the reach determination process, and the advance command setting process are omitted).

(Dd; Means F corresponding, alternative effect) In the first embodiment, the predetermined effect means of the variable display device unit 35, that is, the decorative symbol display device 42, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 of the pseudo ball effect device 49, Trouble occurs in the lower unit 403 (each production passage member 406 for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402), the sub-display device 48, the light emission production unit 47a (and the LEDs built in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b). In this case, the effect may be covered by another effect means, and the variation corresponding effect (handover effect) performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information on the special display devices 43a and 43b may be continued. The process (effect error process) when a trouble occurs in the variable display device unit 35 will be described below with reference to FIG. 62. The production error process is regularly performed in the normal process of the sub control device 262. Further, in the above-described first embodiment and the like, the combination of the hand-over effect and the guidance display is the change-responsive effect.

Incidentally, as a means (grasping means) for detecting the occurrence of trouble (abnormality, error) in the rendering means, first, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403 (for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, When detecting an error in each effect passage member 406), if a negative determination is made in step S4610 of the transfer effect execution process in FIG. 52, a process of adding an error determination timer (reset at the start of the transfer effect) is performed, and then It is determined whether or not the value of the error determination timer exceeds a specific value. Here, when it is determined that it has exceeded, after setting the error occurrence flag to ON, the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, and the lower unit 403. The effect error flag is set to be ON, which corresponds to the abnormal part storage means indicating that an error has occurred. In this case, it is conceivable that the pseudo sphere has not been fired, the firing of the pseudo sphere is delayed, the ball is clogged, the movement of the pseudo sphere is blurred, or a combination of these occurs. Further, for example, when the specific value is set to a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, the deviation within 0.5 seconds is due to the effect time of another effect means (the decorative drawing is the display device 42 in this example). A deviation that is eliminated (absorbed) by adjustment and exceeds 0.5 seconds is treated as an error.

Regarding the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-display device 48, and the light emission effect producing part 47a (and the LEDs built in the starting winning devices 33a, 33b), normal modes are derived in the process of performing respective controls. If it is determined that it is not normal, the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub display device 48, and the light emitting effect part 47a (and start). The effect error flag as an abnormal portion storing means that indicates that an error has occurred is set to be ON and the error occurrence flag is set to be ON, corresponding to each of the winning devices 33a and 33b.

Although illustration is omitted, in the present mode example, before step S4610 of the takeover effect execution process of FIG. 52, or when a negative determination is made, a pseudo-sphere start indicating that the start point detection switch has been detected Whether the flag is on or not is determined. If the determination is negative, it is determined whether the start point detection switch has been detected. If the determination is affirmative, the pseudo ball start flag is turned on (end point detection). The switch is on; it is turned off when a positive determination is made in step S4610), and when the negative determination is made, the scenario control timer is confirmed, and one second has elapsed from the start. Whether the value is less than or equal to the value is determined, and when the determination is affirmative, the error occurrence flag and the effect error flag are set to ON. As a result, it is possible to detect earlier that the pseudo sphere is not fired, and to derive the connecting effect earlier.

Note that the effect error flag is set in the process of determining the pattern of the hand-over effect in the variable display setting process of FIG. 51 (step S4508) and the process of determining the connecting effect pattern in the hand-over effect execution process of FIG. 52 (step S4606). By referring to this, the variation corresponding effect is set so as not to intervene the corresponding effect means.

First, in step S4801 of the effect error processing, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S4801, this processing is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made, then in a step S4802, it is decided whether or not the handover effect flag is set to ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, that is, if a trouble with the rendering means is found during the variable display of the identification display of the special display devices 43a and 43b in which the handover effect is performed (during variation response performance), step S4803. In, it is determined whether or not the value of the takeover control counter and the effect error flag corresponding to the effect means indicated by the stored contents of the storage area indicated by the pointer of the scenario progress storage area are turned on. For example, if the value of the takeover effect counter is "0", the effect image flags corresponding to the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub display device 48, and the light emitting effect part 47a are referred to, and the value of the takeover effect counter is "0". Other than, the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, and the lower direction stored in the storage area indicated by the pointer of the scenario progress storage area The production error flag corresponding to any of the units 403 and the decorative symbol display device 42 is referred to.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4803, then in step S4804, a production means to be performed next (following) to the production means corresponding to the production error flag specified in step S4803 is specified, and the production means is responded to. It is determined whether or not the effect error flag is turned off. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 42) scheduled to be produced following the production of the production means (for example, the first production passage 421) in which the trouble has occurred can be used.

When a negative determination is made in step S4804, it is further determined in step S4805 whether or not the production error flag corresponding to the next production means is turned off.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4804 or step S4805, in the effect means confirmed to be usable in step S4806, an alternative effect which is to be performed instead of the effect which should have been performed by the effect means in which trouble has occurred. Perform processing for performing.

The alternative effect is started immediately when the effect error process is performed. For example, in step S4806 after the affirmative determination is made in step S4804, in the case of a trouble of the decorative symbol display device 42, the pseudo ball effect of the fourth effect passage 424 which should be subsequently performed is moved forward. Be started. Further, in the present mode example, as a countermeasure when a trouble occurs in the decorative symbol display device 42, a light emitting means (three-color LED corresponding to the color variation of the pseudo sphere is used on the entire circumference of the frame portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. (Preferably) is embedded and turned on to make it visible from the front, and the behavior of the pseudo sphere effect is taken over, and the line of sight is guided (joint effect) to the sub display device 48 in the light emitting mode of the frame portion. It is possible to display the result at 48 (to complete the variation response effect).

On the other hand, in step S4806 after the affirmative determination is made in step S4804, when a trouble occurs in the pseudo ball effect device 49, the connection effect of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started.

In addition, for example, a movable display means (a liquid crystal display device or the like) or a movable accessory (electrically driven effect means, movable accessory effect means) can be arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the decorative symbol can be arranged. When trouble occurs in the display device 42, in the front of the place where the effect should have been performed in the decorative symbol display device 42, the alternative effect may be performed by the movable display means or the accessory.

If a negative determination is made in step S4802, step S4803, or step S4805, or after step S4806, the error occurrence flag is turned off in step S4807. In the following step S4808, the error explanation flag is turned on, and then this processing ends. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S4805, when the next connecting effect pattern is set, the variation corresponding effect is set (in search of usable effect means) and restarted.

Further, the error explanation flag is for executing a display for explaining to the player that a trouble has occurred in the rendering means. In this mode example, when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is set in the display setting process of step S3907 of FIG. 32, or when the jackpot state display setting is performed, or when the demonstration screen display setting is performed. To determine whether or not the error explanation flag is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, in order to inform that a predetermined effect means has a trouble in the lower portion of the decorative pattern display device 42, "○○ is out of order, and we are currently producing without using ○○. If you would like to solve it, please call a clerk. Also, if you want to play games in this state If you do, please operate the button for performance and delete this display." Then, when the effect button 125 is operated during the error explanation display, the error explanation flag is turned off and the error explanation display is erased.

It should be noted that when the demo screen display is set, the error explanation display is not derived by referring to the error explanation flag, but the error explanation display may be derived when the production error flag is turned on. Good. In this case, when the demonstration screen display is derived with the effect error flag being turned on, the error explanation display can be derived every time, not only once. Therefore, even if the player is replaced, the error explanation display can be surely confirmed. Further, in the present mode example, the decorative pattern display device 42, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403 of the pseudo sphere effect device 49 (each effect passage member 406 for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402), the sub-display Of the device 48 and the light-emission production section 47a, one of which is provided adjacent to each other (abutting or close to each other) and can be derived by interlocking production is equivalent to the instep production means, and the other is the second production means. Constitute. Further, a function of notifying a player or a person involved in the game hall of an error state generated in the rendering means constitutes error notification means.

As described above, in the present mode example, the decorative pattern display device 42, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 of the pseudo sphere effect device 49 (for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, each effect passage member 406). In the case where a predetermined trouble occurs such that a normal behavior is not derived in any of the production means of the sub-display device 48 and the light emission production unit 47a (and the LEDs incorporated in the start winning devices 33a and 33b), the production is performed. It is possible to perform an alternative effect in place of the effect at a predetermined position of the means, and continue (complete) the variation corresponding effect performed corresponding to the variation display of the identification information of the special display devices 43a and 43b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the change-adaptive effect from being interrupted or the dynamic force of the change-accepting effect from decreasing.

That is, even if a trouble occurs in the predetermined effect means, the result of the win/loss lottery does not change, and in addition to the effect means, special display devices 43a and 43b for teaching the result of the win/loss lot are provided. In, there is no need to interrupt the game, only the production is interrupted. However, if the variation response effect is interrupted, it is feared that the player will be greatly confused. In particular, in the case where a large number of directing means for directing are provided in order to improve the directivity and, by extension, the entertainment, the risk of failure of the directing means is increased, and depending on the directing means that fails, the directing performance is greatly reduced. However, there is concern that it may cause a decline in interest.

In this respect, by making it possible to derive the alternative effect, the variation response effect is not interrupted, and the game can be proceeded with peace of mind. Furthermore, for example, in a situation where the effect is produced by two effect means, if one effect means fails, there is a concern that the force of the effect may be reduced or a sense of discomfort may occur. Such a concern can be suppressed by performing the effect that the effect means of one effect means covers as much as possible, or by adding (substituting) the effect by another effect means. it can. As a result, it is possible to perform a relatively large-scale production by providing a plurality of effecting means and to improve the interest, while suppressing a decrease in the interest and the like when a failure occurs in the effecting means.

In addition, in the present mode example, the variation response effect is performed by a plurality of effect means, and the alternative effect is basically the effect means next to the effect means in which the trouble has occurred (the effect after the effect by the effect means in which the trouble has occurred. The production means scheduled to be performed). As a result, it is possible to connect the alternative effects with a relatively uncomfortable feeling, and it is possible to proceed with the variation response effect without significantly disrupting the flow. Further, by providing a plurality of rendering means, the risk of failure may be increased, but the risk of failure of all and rendering cannot be performed can be reduced.

Further, the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, the fourth effect passage 424, the lower unit 403, the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub display device 48, and the light emission effect part 47a (and, An effect error flag indicating that an error has occurred is provided corresponding to each of the LEDs incorporated in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the error location after the error has been grasped once. In addition, after creating the variation response effect or the alternative effect, it is found that the predetermined effect means cannot be used, and the variation response effect or the alternative effect is re-created (remove the effect means in which the trouble occurs). Can be suppressed (it can be avoided except when the production means in which a trouble has occurred is first grasped).

Further, when the abnormality of the rendering means is detected, the fact is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (the error explanation display is derived). For this reason, it is possible to notify that a trouble has occurred in the rendering means, and it is possible to obtain a clue for maintenance or the like.

In addition, the error explanation display can be erased (changed from the informing mode to the non-informing mode) by the player operating the effect button 125 as the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that a trouble has occurred in the production means, and if that is all right, turn off the error explanation display and let the game proceed.

In addition, the error explanation display is not derived during the variation response production (during the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b) in which the production means has a problem (the alternate production has been performed), but the variation response is displayed. It is derived after the end of the production. Thereby, for example, even if the trouble of the production means is grasped in the latter half of the variation response production, and even if the variation response production is somehow raised by the alternative production, it is possible to avoid the situation that the notification is annoying and ruined. be able to.

(Variation of ee; dd) The alternative effect may be configured to be derivable not only when the abnormal portion is grasped by the grasping means, but also in a normal state where the abnormal portion is not grasped. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the alternative effect is a special effect when a trouble occurs, is not derived in the normal state, and the mode thereof is not fully utilized. Further, examples of the rendering means include the display means, the electric drive rendering means, the mobile accessory production means, and the light emitting means as described above.

Further, for example, when a trouble occurs in any of the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403, one of the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 in which the trouble occurs is simulated. The displayed display may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 so that an alternative effect imitating the pseudo-sphere effect can be executed. In this case, in the decorative pattern display device 42, when trouble occurs in the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403, which may have a relatively high possibility of failure as compared with the decorative pattern display device 42. , A display close to that can be derived to entertain the player. Further, it is possible to keep good time and balance of the performance.

Furthermore, for example, when the production error flag corresponding to each production means is set to ON for the first time and when the production error flag is set to ON, the normal behavior cannot be performed again (a trouble has occurred. ), each effect error flag may be set in two steps. That is, in the ON state of the first-stage effect error flag, the process for causing the corresponding effect means to perform the effect for trial is executed again, and when the effect can be executed without any problem, the effect error is generated. If the flag is turned off and the effect cannot be executed, the effect error flag in the second stage may be turned on.

As a result, for example, if the operation of the pseudo sphere happens to be delayed, it is not a mechanical failure, but the subsequent pseudo sphere production can be executed without any trouble (when the temporary trouble is naturally resolved), It is possible to avoid a situation in which the error state is maintained (automatic recovery). Therefore, it is possible to use the production means that has been once determined to be abnormal (currently normal) effectively and quickly, and to reduce the trouble of the persons involved in the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. ..

In addition, when a problem occurs in the rendering means, the fact may be notified to the game hall side. In this case, the relevant pachinko machine 10 is checked to see if it is in an advantageous situation on the player side or the game hall side. Such a situation does not occur), various kinds of measures can be relatively smoothly performed, such as confirming whether the game hall side can respond or requesting a repair from the game machine maker. In addition, examples of the notification to the game hall side include notification to a hall computer that manages the game hall, notification to an external device provided in a place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, notification in the pachinko machine 10, and the like. To be

Further, when a problem occurs in the rendering means, the method of notifying the player of the problem is not particularly limited. For example, the error explanation display may be displayed in a place other than the lower part of the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42 or may be scrolled, or a lamp that emits light when an error occurs on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is used as each effect means. Correspondingly, a plurality of lamps may be provided, and when an error occurs, the corresponding lamp may be caused to emit light, or each effect means may be provided with a lamp that emits light when an error occurs. In addition, the timing of notification when a problem occurs in the rendering means is not limited to after the variation response performance (variation display) in which the malfunction in the rendering means is recognized, but at the time when the malfunction in the rendering means is recognized. May be performed from. Further, in a state where the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is not performed, it may be configured that the notification of the defect of the rendering means in the pachinko machine 10 is not performed (held) (on the game hall side). May be notified).

In addition, in the case where at least one of an electric drive effect production means and a mobile accessory production effect means is provided as effect means (performs change corresponding effect performed corresponding to the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b). In the above, the electric drive effect production means and the movable accessory effect production means may be provided with a lock means that can be locked with respect to itself as a reference state. More specifically, for example, the main body of the electrical drive effecting means, a connecting member that connects the main body to the mounting position so that the main body can be relatively displaced, and the main body cannot be relatively displaced with respect to the mounting position. (A relative displacement cannot be made by locking the locking portion provided on one of the main body portion and the mounting position and the locked portion provided on the other). Further, for example, the movable accessory may be configured not to be displaced to the corresponding movable accessory region (not to be displaced to the start point).

In this case, when a trouble occurs in the electric drive effect production means or the mobile accessory effect production means, it is possible to avoid a situation such as hindering the visual recognition mode of another effect production means. In addition, by forcibly locking the electric drive effect production means and the mobile accessory effect production means with a member that was not provided in the game machine at the beginning, the appearance may deteriorate and the player may feel uneasy or distrustful. It is possible to avoid such a situation. It should be noted that, while the power of the game machine is turned on, only the displacing function of the electric drive effect production means or the mobile accessory production means is turned off (installed in the electric drive production means or the mobile accessory production means). The light emitting means may be configured to emit light appropriately. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the state of being locked by the locking means.

Further, for example, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 and the decorative pattern display device 42 are configured to be relatively displaceable, or the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, and the decoration. Provided in front of each of the symbol display devices 42 is a production means capable of making a predetermined visible state visible (a transmissive liquid crystal display device or an EL display device is fixedly provided along the glass unit 137, or movable). Liquid crystal display device, movable electric drive effect producing means, or movable moving accessory effect producing means) may be provided. In this case, the abnormal place where the trouble has occurred can be made inconspicuous, and the distraction of the abnormal place can be reduced.

In addition, in the above (dd), although it is embodied in the pseudo sphere effect and the pseudo sphere display effect, the effect to be applied and the configuration for performing the effect can be appropriately set for each model. That is, even if a problem occurs in one of the plurality of configurations for performing the predetermined effect and the original effect contents cannot be executed, another configuration among the plurality of configurations for performing the predetermined effect It should be possible to continue to complete while covering with. Further, as a configuration for performing the effect, it is not necessary to employ a plurality of effect means that are adjacent to each other like the relationship between the decorative symbol display device 42 of the first embodiment and the pseudo ball effect device 49. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of rendering means separated from each other are used to perform the handover rendering, or one rendering means may be configured to perform the handover rendering.

Further, for example, when the first effect passage 421 of the left unit 401 of the pseudo-sphere effect device 49 of the above-described embodiment and the third effect passage 423 of the third effect passages 423 become unusable due to a trouble. In addition, it may be configured such that the occurrence of the trouble can be grasped and the pseudo-sphere effect using the first effect passage 421 can be executed. That is, even if a part of the predetermined rendering means fails and becomes unusable, it can be used in the rendering as long as it can be rendered in other parts, and the rendering performance deteriorates. Can be suppressed.

(Ff; Means G. Structure for suppressing deviation (time) of effect) In the first embodiment, the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, and the fourth effect passage 424. The difference between the time (target time) assigned to each pseudo sphere effect caused by each of the pseudo sphere effects of “the scenario control timer and the lap timer is used as the remaining time grasping means (grasping means). It is configured such that the deviation is eliminated by the pseudo-sphere display effect by the decorative pattern display device 42 thereafter, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the pseudo-sphere effect device. 49 (pseudo-sphere effect performed in the first effect passage 421, the second effect passage 422, the third effect passage 423, and the fourth effect passage 424), based on the deviation (to minimize the deviation). Alternatively, the time of the pseudo sphere effect may be changed. That is, it is possible to adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the firing speed of the pseudo sphere FB by the starting solenoid 413. In this case, it is possible to take measures such as sharing the elimination of the deviation or holding the important effect without changing it.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the variation response effect is divided into several scenes, and the shift is confirmed and eliminated for each scene. The configuration may be eliminated. However, by sharing the elimination of the deviation, it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling of the effect intended to eliminate the deviation and a reduction in the performance. In addition, it is possible to avoid in advance a situation where the deviation becomes too large. Furthermore, a hand-over effect (guidance) that constitutes a period corresponding effect (corresponding effect) that is performed in response to the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (starts based on the start of the variable display and ends based on the end) It is possible to prevent the display effect) from being interrupted on the way. As a result, due to a defect in the pseudo-sphere effect device 49 (left unit, right unit 402, lower unit 403), the decorative symbol display device 42, or the like, which constitutes the effect means that is the structure for performing the period corresponding effect, the period corresponding effect is large. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a sense of incongruity arises and the interest is deteriorated.

Of course, in addition to the pachinko machine 10 that performs a combination of effects by the decorative symbol display device 42 and the pseudo-ball effect device 49 (effects corresponding to fluctuations), a mobile accessory other than the electric drive effect means or the pseudo-sphere effect device 49. In the pachinko machine 10 that performs an effect combined with the effect using the effect means, it is possible to grasp the remaining time and, if there is a deviation, adopt a configuration that eliminates the deviation as much as possible. Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 42 is not (may be) involved in such an effect (variable response effect), or can be applied to a pachinko machine 10 without a (liquid crystal) display device.

In the above embodiment, in accordance with the variation period of the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the effect (variation-responsive effect) that combines the effects of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the pseudo ball effect device 49 is performed. However, it is also possible to perform the combined effect of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the pseudo-sphere effect device 49 at another timing. For example, in a period from the start to the end of a predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state, in the remaining four times in the time reduction mode, and the like, an effect that combines the effects by the decorative symbol display device 42 and the pseudo ball effect device 49 (corresponding to the period) Production) may be performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the rendering of a plurality of rendering means (decorative pattern display device 42, left unit 401 (each rendering passage member 406), right unit 402 (each rendering passage member 406), lower unit 403). It is configured to grasp as much as possible the remaining time of the variation response effect performed by combining (connecting) with each other, but also in the variation response effect (period response effect) using only one effect means (or, Even if there is originally only one rendering means), the remaining time may be grasped, and if there is a deviation, it may be eliminated as much as possible. However, by providing at least a pair of effect means for connecting the effect corresponding to the period, the other prepares while one of the pair of effect means performs the effect, and the other prepares while the other effect effects. Can share (make time to prepare). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a problem occurs in the period-corresponding effect because the preparation for the effect by the effecting means is not in time (the cause of the deviation is reduced). Furthermore, when there is a possibility that a time lag will occur in the rendering means, by using a plurality of rendering means, it is possible to minimize the deviation of each rendering means and to recover (to minimize the deviation, Alternatively, (erasing) can be performed by a rendering unit that subsequently performs rendering. Also, as the period-corresponding effect, it is possible to perform a magnificent effect using a plurality of effecting means, so that it is possible to improve the effect.

Furthermore, since the display means is included in the effect means for connecting the effect corresponding to the period, the time adjustment of the effect time is performed relatively easily or more strictly than the electric drive effect means and the movable accessory effect effect means. be able to. Therefore, the operational effect of matching the end timing of the effect period with the end timing of the effect corresponding to the period is dramatically improved.

In addition, by interposing the effect by the display means after the effect by the electrically driven effect means and the movable type effect effect means, the end of the effect period (time effect) defined as the period for performing the effect corresponding to the period At this time, it becomes easy to return the electric drive effect production means and the movable accessory production means to the reference state. Also, by interposing the effect by the display means before the effect by the electrically driven effect means and the movable accessory effect means, the electrically driven effect means and the movement at the end of the last effect period. Even if the expression accessory production means cannot be returned to the standard state, it is possible to return it to the standard state while performing the production by the display means.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the order of the effects by each effect means in the change-responsive effect and the combination of effect means used in the change-compatible effect are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. .. Further, although not mentioned in the first embodiment, means for performing effect display connecting the respective effect passage members 406 and the lower unit 403 and the sub display device 48 are provided (decorative pattern). A light emitting means is built in the frame portion of the display device 42, a movable display means or a movable accessory is provided in front of the decorative pattern display device 42), and a variation corresponding effect not using the decorative pattern display device 42 is derived. It is also possible.

It should be noted that the predetermined effect means (one, multiple, or all) may be configured to be used without fail, and the predetermined effect means (one or more may be used. However, it may be configured such that the order of all may be set (if used, the order is used).

However, at least one of the electrically driven effect producing means and the movable type effect producing means for producing an effect that constitutes the period corresponding effect is used in the effect initially performed in the period corresponding effect, and other cases. By configuring so as to be used in some cases, it is possible to perform more diverse and interesting effects by appropriately changing the order of effects performed by a plurality of effecting means, changing combinations, and the like. .. On the other hand, when the rendering means used in the relatively last order of the previous period corresponding effect is used in the relatively first order of the next period corresponding effect, preparation of the effecting means cannot be completed in time. The above concern becomes more prominent, but as described above, it is possible to eliminate the concern by taking an appropriate measure while grasping the remaining time of the period corresponding effect (effect period).

In addition, for example, at least one of the electrically driven effect means for performing an effect that constitutes the period corresponding effect and the movable type effect effect means is used in the last effect performed in the period corresponding effect, By configuring so that it may be used in other orders, it is possible to perform more diverse and interesting effects in the same manner. On the other hand, when the rendering means used in the relatively last order of the previous period corresponding effect is used in the relatively first order of the next period corresponding effect, preparation of the effecting means cannot be completed in time. The above concern becomes more prominent, but as described above, it is possible to eliminate the concern by taking an appropriate measure while grasping the remaining time of the period corresponding effect (effect period).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the sub-control device 262 is a production unit such as the left unit 401, the right unit 403, and the lower unit 404 (here, it is a mobile accessory production unit, but an electric drive production unit). It is also possible to provide a reference state determination means for determining whether or not the rendering means is in the reference state. Further, it may be provided with a preparation state storage means for storing information as to whether or not there is a rendering means that is not in the reference state when the reference state determination means makes a determination. Then, at least at the timing of the end of the production corresponding to the period (production period), the preparation state storage means is checked (if there is no preparation state storage means, the reference state determination means determines) and the state is set to the reference state. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not there is no rendering means.

That is, there is a possibility that the electric drive effecting means and the movable accessory effecting means that are not in the reference state at the timing of the end of the effect period cannot be used immediately (usually, the operation from the reference state cannot be performed). Program). Therefore, at the timing of the end of the effect period, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an effect means (electrically driven effect means and a mobile accessory effect effect means) that is not in the standard state. A countermeasure can be executed (at least when the predetermined effect means is returned to the reference state at the next use of the predetermined effect means). It is unlikely that the display means will not return to the standard state due to a factor other than the occurrence of a predetermined error at the timing of the end of the performance period, but the state in which normal processing is performed (standard state) has not been returned. The situation may be determined and the determination result may be stored.

Further, for example, when a period corresponding effect is performed subsequent to the period corresponding effect, when setting the period corresponding effect, an electric drive effecting means and a mobile accessory effect effecting means which are not in a standard state are set. Do not use, or turn the order later, lengthen the time of the performance performed before that, etc. to make the time to use enough time to return to the standard state (return It may be possible to perform a process of confirming that).

Further, by providing the preparation state storage means, it is possible to simplify the processing for determining the state of whether or not the electric drive effect production means and the movable accessory effect production means are in the reference state. In addition, for example, at the timing of the end of the effect period, although it is determined that there is an electric drive effecting means and a mobile type effect effecting means that are not in the standard state, after the effect corresponding to the period, electric Even if a situation is derived in which the dynamic drive effect production means and the mobile accessory production means are not used, the electric drive production means and the mobile accessory production effect means return to the reference state. Whether or not it can be continued. Therefore, when the performance corresponding to the next period is started during the monitoring period, the setting in consideration of the use timing and the order of the electric drive effect means which are not in the standard state and the movable accessory effect effect means should be ensured. It can be carried out.

In addition, "a plurality of effect patterns are provided in each of the effect means, the time from the effect of the first effect pattern to the reference state and the effect of the second effect pattern after the effect of the reference state" And a production pattern by the other production means of the period corresponding production when the first production pattern is derived in the period corresponding production, and in the period corresponding production. At least a part of the other production patterns of the production corresponding to the period when the second production pattern is derived may be different." That is, for example, when it takes time to return the predetermined effect means to the reference state, the time (margin) to allow the predetermined effect means to return to the reference state within the effect period in anticipation thereof By setting the period-corresponding effect with "," it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect means cannot be returned to the reference state within the effect period. However, by having an electric drive effect production means and a pattern in which the movable type effect production means are driven even just before the end of the period corresponding production to produce an effect, it is possible to greatly enhance the effectivity and variety of effects.

It should be noted that if there is a rendering means that is not in the reference state, so that the error state is surely resolved at the start of the rendering next to the variation-based rendering in which an error has occurred in the prescribed rendering means, an error will occur. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game is temporarily suspended and the error state is released and the game is restarted when the effect means returns to the reference state. However, the main control device 261 makes such a judgment (the load on the main control means 261 increases), or the sub-control device 262 informs the main control device 261 (incorrect signal is input to the main control device 261). The input from the sub-control device 262 must be undesired in order to prevent the above.

(Gg; Structure for suppressing other deviations in the effect) Further, in the succession effect, the position and the angle of the pseudo sphere or the pseudo sphere display are properly adjusted depending on not only the time lag but also the structure related to the pseudo sphere effect, for example. It may be configured so as to have no deviation. In addition, in order not to cause a deviation between the content of the hand-over effect and the content to be taught (to be taught) in the hand-over effect, the content may be eliminated even if the error occurs. For example, although the connection passage 406a of the first embodiment has one inlet (entrance side passage), a plurality of outlets (outlet side passages) (for example, first to third outlet side passages) are provided (connection passage 406a). In the middle of, i.e., at the lower end portion (branch point) of the inlet side passage, a quasi-sphere is distributed to each outlet side passage at a predetermined ratio) A plurality of exit detection means (sensors) capable of detecting each pseudo sphere may be provided, and the pseudo sphere display of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be created based on the detection information of the exit detection means. Further, for example, when the advantage and disadvantage in the present succession effect is set in a plurality of exit side passages, it is sufficient if the pseudo-ball effect corresponding to the result of the winning/winning lottery is in progress, but if not ( However, if it is likely to teach the deviation, or if it is likely to teach the hit even if it is the deviation, the correction (the trajectory correction of the pseudo sphere by the pseudo sphere display) may be performed by the pseudo sphere display effect.

That is, the hand-over effect is determined according to the result of the winning/winning lottery, and the like, and the hand-over effect (corresponding effect) corresponding to the deviation should not be taught to generate a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not there is a gap between the predetermined effect contents (planned) of the takeover effect and the actually performed takeover effect, and if there is a deviation, it is possible to correct it. desirable. Furthermore, it is desirable that the deviation be grasped not at the end of the hand over effect, but at a stage in the middle of the hand over effect, more preferably a plurality of times. In the first embodiment, by grasping the "time lag" of the pseudo sphere effect of the pseudo sphere effect device 49 (effect means), there is a time lag in the pseudo sphere display effect of the decorative pattern display device 42 (effect means). It will be resolved.

Here, there is a possibility that a shift other than time may occur depending on the rendering means (structure or the like) that constitutes the handover rendering, so a configuration that can eliminate the shift may be provided. Since the shift is grasped during the handing over effect, the storage means (check item storing means. By the way, it is possible to grasp the predetermined effect contents (target at the check point) of the handing over effect at that stage. In the first embodiment, the measurement is started at the same time as the scenario control timer and the scenario control timer that become “0” when the remaining time of each scene of the hand-over effect becomes “0”, but the measurement is stopped at the end of the scene. The lap timer is used to calculate the time difference before and after, and the time of the shift of each scene of the hand-over effect is determined one by one. For example, the first to third outlet side passages described above are provided corresponding to the first effect passage 421, and the first outlet side passage of the first to third outlet side passages approaches the jackpot teaching, and the third outlet side passages. In the case of approaching the detachment instruction and the passage on the second exit side in the middle thereof, when performing a big hit teaching, when setting the takeover effect, the check items of the pseudo ball effect of the first effect passage 421 (the third exit) The presence/absence of passage of the side passage) is stored in the corresponding check item storage means, and after the start detection switch 415 of the first effect passage 421 is detected, the outlet detection of the first to third outlet side passages of the first effect passage 421 is detected. It is confirmed whether or not the means is detected (after confirmation, the detection confirmation process is turned off), and when the detection is confirmed, the corresponding check item storage means is referred to and the passage of the third exit side passage is confirmed. The presence or absence may be confirmed, and if confirmed, a pseudo sphere display effect may be performed in which the pseudo sphere display moves to the passage corresponding to the first or second exit side passage on the decorative pattern display device 42.

In addition, for example, in the movable accessory moving region, the first hole, the second hole, and the third hole are provided, and the first hole, the second hole, and the third hole are provided. The pseudo sphere can be appropriately aimed and fired. For example, in the production (at the start) where it is convenient for the pseudo sphere to enter the first hole, the pseudo sphere can be aimed at the first hole. It is also possible to prepare an effect for the case of entering and an effect for the case of the pseudo sphere entering the second hole or the third hole. Of course, it is also possible to adopt a different configuration and prepare an effect that considers both the development as intended and the development as not intended. For example, the pachinko machine 10 throws a pseudo ball from the pitcher role object, and the player moves the batter role object with the effect button 125, and whether or not the correspondence between the batting result and the result of the win/loss lot match. Then, change the production (when the batter hits the pseudo ball when it corresponds to a big hit (there is a pocket part where the pseudo ball enters when the pseudo ball is missed, there is a detection switch, the detection switch concerned) Whether or not the pseudo sphere has hit the bat is determined by the presence or absence of the bat, and the display effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed according to the detection of the detection switch or the like), and the effect of the home run on the decorative symbol display device 42. When the display is displayed and the jackpot corresponds to a big hit (3 ball 2 strike strikes batting production start), if the player makes a missed shot, a lucky display of the running home run is displayed, and if it corresponds to a miss, the batter is simulated. When the ball is hit back, an effect display is displayed in which the ball is replenished and out, and when the ball is swung out, an effect is displayed in which it strikes out. Is).

In addition, increase the difficulty level of successful production so that it is unlikely to produce results other than planned (for example, the pitcher throws a ball faster or the trajectory changes, or the work such as light or transmissive liquid crystal causes poor visibility), It may be possible to make obstacles appear, increase them, or make them stronger (for example, the keeper gets bigger, the goal gets smaller, defenders enter, the ground leans, shakes, etc.). Also, in order to make it easier to achieve the scheduled result, the difficulty level of successful production has been reduced (for example, the pitcher's throwing ball has a slower or straight trajectory), and obstacles have been eliminated/reduced/assisted. (For example, the keeper may be small and the goal may be large, guides that guide the ball to the goal side may appear on both sides of the goal, or the player may redo until the goal is determined).

In addition, with regard to the operation effect in which the player moves the movable accessory provided in the movable accessory moving area 404 of the pseudo ball effect device 49 provided in the game area by operating the effect button 125, the operation effect (transfer effect) ), it is desirable to be configured to be forcibly ended (a forced end effect is performed). For example (when 10 seconds are left for the handover effect and 5 seconds is left for the operation effect (preparation is performed from the previous stage)), an electric kicker role and a ball role appear, and the ball role becomes the goal. A determined effect (an effect for 5 seconds, and an effect for teaching the result on the decorative symbol display device 42 for the subsequent 5 seconds) may be performed. In this case, the operation effect is prolonged and the succession effect is not ended, and the effect of deteriorating the playability and adversely affecting the progress of the game (especially, deriving a display for assisting the game method or the like (guidance operation guidance, etc.)) It is possible to prevent an adverse effect).

[Appendix]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiment will be described below.

A (connecting effect that connects effects by a plurality of effecting means). There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. Variable display is performed for this purpose (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in the pachinko machine provided with the variable display means, many players proceed with the game just by continuing to look at the variable display means. For this reason, there is a concern that the user will get bored sooner, and in the first place, the game of continuing to look at the variable display means is becoming rude.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

Means PA-1. At a position visible from the player side, a first effect means for performing a first effect and a second effect means for effecting a second effect are provided,
Between the first effect production means and the second effect production means, there is provided a connection effect production means capable of executing a connection effect connecting the first effect and the second effect. ..

According to the means PA-1, the first effect or the second effect, which has been performed by one of the first effect means and the second effect means, is succeeded, and the first effect and the second effect are It is designed so that it can be handed over to the other side, and a connecting production is performed. Therefore, it is possible to derive a series of magnificent effects by combining effects by a plurality of effecting devices while suppressing the complication of the configuration of each effecting device, and to achieve diversification of effects and the like.

Further, for example, even if the first effect means and the second effect means are separated from each other (for example, the first effect means and the second effect means are relatively displaceable, and in terms of effect, the first effect means and the second effect means). When the rendering means is in a separated state, when another configuration is installed between the first rendering means and the second rendering means, in other words, the first rendering means and the first rendering means with the other configuration sandwiched therebetween. If two effect means are arranged), the effect can be well connected by the connecting effect means. Therefore, while improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first effect means and the second effect means, and diversifying the effect, etc., it is possible to understand the effect performed in cooperation with the first effect means and the second effect means. It is possible to improve the ease.

Note that the specific configurations of the first rendering means, the second rendering means, and the connecting rendering means are not particularly limited, and for example, display of a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, a dot display device, etc. Examples include means, electric drive effecting means described later, movable type effect effecting means described later, and light emitting means (group; arranged in a predetermined manner) including lamps such as LEDs. For example, the first effect means, the second effect means, and the connecting effect means are all display means (for example, all are liquid crystal display devices, or the first effecting means and the second effecting means are liquid crystal display devices, and the connecting effect is Means may be a dot display device, etc.), or the first effect means and the second effect means may be electric drive effect means or movable type effect effect means, and the connecting effect means may be the display means. ..

Further, the first effect means and the second effect means may be arranged separately from each other, and the connecting effect means may be arranged therebetween ((first effecting means and second effecting means, connecting effect) The first rendering means and the second rendering means are arranged adjacent to each other, and the connecting rendering means is arranged from the front of the first rendering means to the front of the second rendering means (connection). The position of the rendering means may be fixed, or the front of the first rendering means (in the front-rear horizontal direction (overlapping in the vertical direction of the front surface of the pachinko machine 10)) and not at the front of the second rendering means, It is also possible to displace to a position that is in front of the second rendering device and is not in front of the first rendering device, a position that is not in front of the first rendering device, and the second rendering device).

Means PA-2. At least one of the first effect production means and the second effect production means is an electric drive effect production means capable of executing an electric drive effect using an electric drive accessory operated by the electric drive means, or , A game according to means PA-1, characterized in that it is configured by a mobile accessory production means capable of executing a mobile accessory production that uses a mobile accessory that is movable based on mechanical energy. Machine.

According to the means PA-2, it is possible to enjoy an analog effect which is different from that of the gaming machine in which only the effect display by the display device (the liquid crystal display device, the dot display device or the like) is performed. Of course, there is a concern that the performance will be monotonous with the single performance means that performs the analog performance, but with this means PA, a series of diverse effects can be achieved by the first performance means, the second performance means, and the connecting performance means. It is possible to derive various effects and eliminate such concerns.

Further, when both the first effect production means and the second effect production means are constituted by an electric drive effect production means or a movable type effect production means, an effect production means (an analog effect production means) for performing an analog effect is provided. By dividing into a plurality, it is possible to suppress the deviation of each analog effect means. Further, by interposing the connecting effect between the analog effects, it is possible to eliminate the deviation of the analog effect in the connecting effect. In addition, for example, when the connecting effect is a display effect by a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, it is necessary to derive a bold connecting effect that cannot be executed by analog (for example, physically impossible). It is possible to broaden the range of production. As a result, the game can be smoothly advanced while incorporating the analog effect, and the interest can be improved.

The electric drive means may be, for example, a configuration in which a motor, a solenoid or the like is appropriately used. Further, the electric drive means may be drive-controlled by a production control means for performing production control.

Hereinafter, as the means A, the above-mentioned means PA-1, the first effecting means described in the means PA-2, and the second effecting means are embodied in the mobile auditor effect effecting means described in the means PA-2. The “movable accessory production means” described in the following means A is referred to as “first production means and second production means”, and thus “first production means and second production means”. It is also possible to appropriately change (replace) the configuration other than the mobile auditors production means included in the two production means (for example, display means, electric drive production means, etc.).

Means A-1. A mobile accessory effect that uses a movable accessory that is derivable to a position visually recognizable from the player side (which is an object with a mass) and makes a predetermined suggestion or teaching according to the behavior of the mobile accessory Equipped with derivable mobile accessory production means,
The mobile accessory production means is provided with a mobile accessory moving region in which the mobile accessory is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy,
In the mobile accessory production, at least a part of the mobile accessory moving from the start point to the end point of the mobile accessory moving area is visually recognized,
The mobile type accessory movement region includes a first mobile type accessory movement region and a second mobile type accessory movement region,
A connection effect producing means capable of executing a connection effect for deriving a virtual movement mode of the movable type accessory between the first movable type accessory movement area and the second movable type accessory movement area; Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the means A-1, it is possible to enjoy the effect different from the effect display by the display device (the liquid crystal display device, the dot display device, etc.) by the movable accessory effect using the movable accessory. it can. Further, the behavior of the mobile type accessory that has moved in one of the first mobile type character movement area and the second mobile type character movement area is taken over, and the first mobile type character movement area, In addition, the connecting effect is performed in such a manner that the behavior of the other mobile auditor in the second mobile auditors moving area is taken over. For this reason, (there may be a smaller number of effect patterns in the mobile character effect production in each mobile character effect area compared to the effect by the display device), It is possible to diversify the production by combining mobile accessory productions, and to increase the number of production variations even in the joint production that connects mobile accessory productions in multiple mobile accessory movement areas. Can be planned. Therefore, while suppressing the complication of the configuration of each mobile type accessory movement area, the mobile type effect production in the first mobile type accessory movement area and the second mobile type accessory movement area, and the joint production. It is possible to derive a series of magnificent performances that are combined.

Further, by dividing the mobile accessory production into a plurality, it is possible to suppress the deviation of each mobile accessory production. Furthermore, by sandwiching the connecting effect in the mobile character effect, it is possible to eliminate the deviation of the mobile character effect in the connecting effect. In addition, for example, when the connecting effect is a display effect by a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, it is necessary to derive a bold connecting effect that cannot be executed by analog (for example, physically impossible). It is possible to broaden the range of production. As a result, the game can be smoothly advanced while incorporating the analog effect, and the interest can be improved.

Note that the number of movable role moving areas is not limited to two, and three or more mobile role moving areas may be provided, and a connecting effect is performed between the mobile role moving areas. The "starting point of the mobile accessory movement region" is the position where the mobile bonus is placed (standby) when the mobile bonus effect production in the predetermined mobile bonus movement region is started. The “end point of the mobile accessory moving area” is the position where the mobile accessory is located when the mobile accessory production in the predetermined mobile accessory moving area is completed, and is from the mobile accessory moving area. It is the position where it is collected. Further, the start point and the end point of the pseudo ball displacement area may be invisible or difficult from the front of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the "linking effect for deriving the virtual movement mode of the mobile auditors" is reminiscent of that the behavior of the mobile auditors in one of the first and second mobile auditors movement regions is continued. The virtual movement mode of the mobile role object, which is a visual effect, a voice mode, or the like, is carried over to the behavior of the mobile role object in the other of the first and second mobile role object movement areas. For example, a car toy is used as a mobile accessory, and a blindfold part in the form of a front view is provided between the end point of the first mobile accessory movement area and the start point of the second mobile accessory movement area. Based on the detection by the first end point detection means, as a connection effect, a sound reminiscent of high-speed traveling of the automobile, a sound reminiscent of low-speed traveling, a sound reminiscent of normal traveling, a sound reminiscent of traveling in bad weather or bad roads, etc. Is randomly derived (there may be a difference in the selection rate depending on whether or not it is finally successful) (the blindfold portion is constituted by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a dot display device, etc.). You may display a car toy with, etc.), or at a timing that is suitable for such a linkage effect or at a timing that is intentionally shifted, the mobile accessory effect in the second mobile accessory effect moving area is started. Examples of modes such as

In addition, if it is a pachinko machine, a pseudo ball that is derived by taking over the behavior of the game ball may be used as the mobile accessory. For example,
"A game area where the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
In a gaming machine provided with a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Pseudo-sphere effecting means capable of deriving a pseudo-sphere accessory effect that uses a pseudo-sphere (having mass) that can be derived to a position visually recognizable from the player side and that gives a predetermined suggestion or teaching according to the behavior of the pseudo-sphere. Prepare,
The pseudo sphere effect means, the pseudo sphere, based on mechanical energy, comprises a pseudo sphere movement region configured to be movable,
In the pseudo sphere effect, at least a part of the pseudo sphere moving from the start point to the end point of the pseudo sphere movement region is visually recognized,
The pseudo sphere movement area includes a first pseudo sphere movement area and a second pseudo sphere movement area,
It is also possible to include a connecting effect producing means capable of executing a connecting effect for deriving a virtual moving display of the pseudo sphere between the first pseudo sphere moving area and the second pseudo sphere moving area."

In addition, in the case of embodying a pachinko machine, "the movable role moving area is disposed behind a game board that forms the game area on the front side, and at least the movable role of the game board" The portion located in front of the moving region may be transparent (the movable accessory that moves in the movable accessory moving region is configured to be visible)”. In this case, it is possible to suppress the narrowing of the game area.

Means A-2. The gaming machine according to the means A-1, further comprising an end point detecting means for detecting the end point of the movable accessory moving area or the mobile accessory located in the vicinity thereof.

According to the means A-2, it is possible to grasp that the mobile accessory has reached the end point of the mobile accessory moving area, and the behavior of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory moving area and the mobile role. It is possible to connect the production following the production (connection production) more smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to perform a magnificent effect in which the movable type effect effect and the connection effect are combined with each other at a precise timing, and it is possible to improve the effect. It is also possible to grasp that the mobile accessory is caught in the mobile accessory moving area.

It should be noted that the end point detection means detects a mobile accessory that is just before reaching the end point, or a mobile accessory that is partially approaching the end point, rather than being able to detect the mobile accessory that has completely reached the end point. It is desirable to configure it so that it can be detected. In addition, “the second movable type accessory movement region is disposed on the downstream side of the first movable type accessory movement region and is located at the end point of the first movable type accessory movement region or in the vicinity thereof. A first end point detection means for detecting a movable accessory is provided, the connection effect is performed based on the detection of the first end point detection means, and the second movable effect movement is performed after the connection effect is performed. It is also possible to say that the mobile type effect production is performed in the area”.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the end point detection means be composed of a sensor or the like that can detect the pseudo sphere in a non-contact manner. In addition, it is desirable that a buffer means (for example, a spring or a rubber is used) for buffering the pseudo sphere moving in the movable accessory moving area is provided at the end point of the movable accessory moving area. .. In this case, it is possible to suppress the damage at the end point of the movable accessory moving region and the collision sound of the pseudo sphere. Furthermore, a movable accessory storage means for storing the pseudo-sphere not used for the pseudo-sphere production is provided, and the pseudo-sphere which is in contact with the buffer means is guided to the movable accessory storage means (electrically driven and controlled. Storage auxiliary means may be provided.

Means A-3. The game machine according to the means A-1 or A-2, characterized in that, in the connection effect, a change in a movement mode of the movable accessory that has occurred in the movable accessory effect can be reflected. ..

According to the means A-3, the change (a difference from the standard movement) of the mode of the mobile auditory product, which has occurred in the mobile auditory product effect, is properly reflected in the connection effect. The effect and the connecting effect can be more preferably connected, and a more interesting effect can be derived.

Means A-4. A teaching effect that teaches or suggests predetermined information is configured by the movable type effect effect and the connection effect,
The period of the teaching effect is predetermined,
The gaming machine according to means E-3, characterized in that the time for the connection effect can be changed in accordance with the time required for the movable accessory effect.

According to the means A-4, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the time of the mobile auditors product effect by adjusting the time of the connection effect, and the teaching effect can be performed in a predetermined period.

Means A-5. Means A-1 to E- characterized in that, in the movable type effect production, it is possible to reflect a change in a mode that has occurred in a virtual movement mode of the movable type effect that has occurred in the connection effect. The gaming machine according to any one of 4.

According to the means A-5, it is possible to further improve the connection between the connection effect and the mobile type accessory effect, and it is possible to improve the effect and the like. In addition, as an example of an aspect, in the first movable type effect production, two movable type effects were moved, but in the connection effect, a display in which the movable type effect (the virtual aspect thereof) is decreased by one is displayed. That is, in the subsequent second mobile type effect production, there is only one mobile type character.

Means A-6. The mobile bonus used in the first mobile bonus movement area and the mobile bonus used in the second mobile bonus movement area are separately prepared. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-5.

According to the means A-6, the structure for operating the mobile accessory in each mobile accessory moving region is simplified, and the time for circulating the mobile accessory (the mobile accessory is produced by the mobile accessory production). After using, it is possible to shorten the time until it can be set at the starting point). Further, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the mobile accessory, and to improve the convenience when the mobile accessory moving area and its related members need to be replaced.

It should be noted that, "As the mobile accessory for the second mobile accessory moving area, the same as the mobile accessory for the first mobile accessory moving area (at least one of the same or, At least all of the same things, or the same number and type of mobile amusements provided) are provided", or "as the mobile amusement for the second mobile auction movement area, It is also possible to provide a different one (at least one different one or all different) from the mobile auction for the first mobile auction movement area”. For example, a white sphere (no indication), a blue sphere (preferred satisfaction of predetermined condition: small), and a yellow sphere (preferred satisfaction of predetermined condition: medium) are prepared for the first movable accessory moving region, It may be configured such that a white sphere, a yellow sphere, and a green sphere (the degree of expectation of establishment of a predetermined condition: high) are prepared for the two-movement type accessory moving region.

Means A-7. 7. The connecting effect producing means is constituted by a display means capable of displaying a virtual mobile type accessory corresponding to the mobile type accessory, according to any one of means A-1 to A-6. Amusement machine.

According to the means A-7, it is possible to derive a bold connecting effect that cannot be executed by analog (for example, physically impossible), and it is possible to widen the range of a series of effects. Further, it is possible to connect the mobile character effects more preferably, and for example, when there is something to be matched as the period of the mobile character effects, the time lag or contradiction of the mobile character effects is minimized. It can be resolved without discomfort.

Examples of the display means include various display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, and a dot display device, and a device in which a light emitter, a movable accessory, and the like are appropriately arranged. Further, in the case where the temporal effect of the mobile character effect is eliminated in the connecting effect means (display means), the time of the deviation is calculated in a hurry, and the "movable character effect display corresponding to the mobile character effect is displayed. Need to be generated. Therefore, in order to reduce the load of the display control, the time may be adjusted by interposing a substantially still image such as a cut-in display.

Means A-8. The first movable accessory movement region is arranged on the upstream side of the second movable accessory movement region,
The connection production means, in the connection production,
A basic movement pattern for performing virtual movement display of the mobile accessory moving from the first mobile accessory moving area to the second mobile accessory moving area;
A means A-, which is capable of deriving an applied movement pattern for performing virtual movement display of the mobile accessory moving from the second mobile accessory moving area to the first mobile accessory moving area. The gaming machine described in 7.

According to the means A-8, it is possible to derive an effect in which the mobile type accessory flows backward in the game area, which is difficult in the analog effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effect while suppressing the monotonous feeling while making use of the mobile accessory effect.

Means A-9. The movable accessory movement region includes a first movable bonus movement region and a third movable bonus movement region provided at a position separated from the second movable bonus movement region,
The first mobile type accessory movement region is disposed upstream of the second mobile type accessory movement region, and the second mobile type accessory movement region is upstream of the third mobile type accessory movement region. Placed in
The connection production means, in the connection production,
A basic movement pattern for performing virtual movement display of the mobile accessory moving from the first mobile accessory moving area to the second mobile accessory moving area;
A means A-, which is capable of deriving an applied movement pattern for performing virtual movement display of the mobile accessory moving from the first mobile accessory moving area to the third mobile accessory moving area. 7 or A-8.

According to the means A-9, it is possible to easily and freely switch (display) the moving route of the mobile type accessory by the connecting effect means (display means). Therefore, it is possible to suppress monotonous feeling while diversifying the effect of the mobile accessory.

Means A-10. A connection, which is a portion that connects the movable accessory located at the start point between the start point and the end point in the movable accessory movement region, corresponding to each of the movable accessory movement regions. The game machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-9, which is provided with a starting assisting means for displacing to the passage side.

According to the means A-10, in the movable role moving area which is the target of the mobile role effect, the mobile role effect is made to stand by at the starting point just before the start of the mobile role effect, and the mobile role effect is created. Can be started at a timing matched with other effects or the like. Further, for example, compared to a configuration in which the mobile accessory naturally moves to the connection passage when the mobile accessory reaches the starting point, the initial motion of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory moving area can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to appropriately adjust the moving speed of the mobile accessory to be moved to each mobile accessory moving area.

Incidentally, the connecting passage does not have to be a single road, and it is possible to provide a switching means for switching the moving destination of the pseudo sphere at the branch point. Further, the discharge port is provided in the connection passage, and the shutter that can open and close the discharge port is opened, so that the pseudo sphere moving in the connection passage is discharged from the discharge port to the outside of the connection passage (pseudo-ball). It may be returned to the storage means for storing the sphere). In addition, the direction (tilt) of the starting point floor that supports the movable accessory placed at the starting point may be configured to be changeable. In this case, it is possible to provide variations in the direction in which the mobile accessory that is launched from the starting point is ejected.

Means A-11. Any one of the means A-1 to A-10, further comprising an external force adding means capable of applying an external force to the movable accessory moving in the movable accessory moving area. The game machine described.

According to the means A-11, it is possible to diversify the mobile accessory production. In addition, when the movement of the mobile accessory is delayed in the mobile accessory moving area, the mobile accessory does not have to be directly touched by a person concerned such as the game hall where the game machine is installed. It will also be possible to eliminate the stagnation of. As the external force adding means, a device provided with a member that changes the traveling direction of the mobile accessory by contacting the mobile accessory using a solenoid or the like, or vibrates the passage of the mobile accessory moving area, An example is a device that changes the inclination or blows air to change the speed of the mobile accessory or the time for producing the mobile accessory. Further, the trigger of the operation of the external force adding means for eliminating the accidental stagnation of the movement of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory moving area may be automatic, or a predetermined operation by a person concerned such as a game hall. (Providing operation means for error elimination on the back side of the gaming machine).

Means A-12. The first movable type accessory movement region, which is arranged in front of the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region, and allows the player to visually recognize his/her aspect from the front of the gaming machine, and , A transparent display means for visually recognizing the movable accessory moving in the second movable accessory moving area is provided. Amusement machine.

According to the means A-12, the behavior of the mobile auditors product and the display mode of the transmissive display device can be combined (overlapped) to make the mobile auditors effect more interesting. .. It is also possible to perform a connection effect between the movable effect effect in the movable effect movement area and the connection effect in the connection effect means (for example, in front of the frame portion of the display device as the connection effect means). become.

Means A-13. 13. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-12, wherein an RFID tag is built in the mobile accessory.

According to the means A-13, for example, when the reading means for reading the RFID tag is provided in correspondence with the first mobile type accessory movement region and the second mobile type accessory movement region, the mobile type accessory is movable. It becomes possible to know where in the character movement area is moving, and when deriving an effect in accordance with a moving character moving in the movable character moving area, the effect is more accurately calculated. Can be adapted to the behavior. Further, for example, in the case where there are a plurality of types of mobile accessory, when a reading means for reading an RFID tag is provided corresponding to the mobile accessory storage means for storing a plurality of types of mobile accessories, a plurality of types are provided. The mobile accessory can be managed relatively easily and accurately. In other words, it is possible to take out the required mobile accessory without having to associate the room for storing the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory storage means with the type of the mobile accessory. .. In addition, it is possible to derive a complicated effect such that a plurality of mobile auditors are mixed and shown.

The application of the technique of providing the "RFID tag" on the mobile accessory is not limited to the gaming machine including the first mobile accessory moving area, the second mobile accessory moving area, and the connecting effect means. It is also possible to embody the present invention in a game machine having only one movable role moving area or a game machine having no connecting effect means. Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the RFID tag is mounted on the mobile accessory, the RFID tag is mounted on the movable accessory (which is connected to the drive source through the connecting means). Good. For example, between the first position and the second position, each movable accessory is individually (or in a group unit divided into a plurality of groups) so that a plurality of movable accessory can be overlapped in the front and rear. It may be configured such that it is displaceable, and a reading means capable of reading the combination of the movable accessory at the first position may be provided.

Means A-14. At least one of the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region is relatively displaceable with respect to the connection production means (in a range adjacent to the connection production means). The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13, which is configured.

According to the means A-14, even if the position of the movable role moving area is changed while deriving a novel effect that the mobile role moving area itself in which the mobile role moving moves is displaced, The movable character effect in the first movable character effect moving area and the second movable character effect by the connecting effect means interposed between the first movable character effect moving area and the second movable character effect moving area. It is possible to successfully connect the mobile character effect in the moving area.

The "adjacent range" refers to the entrance and exit of the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region as seen from the player side (front of the gaming machine), and the connecting effect means. It suffices that and are continuous, regardless of the relative positions of the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region and the connecting effect means. It is preferable that the character moving area and the entrance side and the outlet side of the second movable character moving area and the connecting effect means are configured to overlap in the front and rear. It should be noted that it may be possible to move to a range beyond the adjacent range, and in that case, by providing the transmissive display means of the above-mentioned means A-12, it is possible to relatively well perform the connection of the movable accessory effect. it can.

Means A-15. The gaming machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-14, wherein at least one of the movable accessory moving regions is configured to be changeable in shape.

According to the means A-15, it is possible to derive a bold surprise effect in which the mobile character moving area is deformed (for example, the direction and width of the passage are changed) and the behavior of the mobile character is also changed. You can

Means A-16. In the range adjacent to the entrance and the exit of the first movable type accessory movement area and the second movable type accessory movement area, the connection effect producing means may include the first movable type accessory movement area, and The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-15, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the second movable accessory moving region.

According to the means A-16, it is possible to derive an effect such as displacing the connecting effect means in conjunction with the movement of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory moving area. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the cooperation of a series of effects including the mobile accessory effect and the connection effect, or derive a bolder effect.

B (Handover effect that inherits a predetermined behavior is performed by connecting effects by a plurality of effect means). There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. Variable display is performed for this purpose (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in the pachinko machine provided with the variable display means, many players proceed with the game just by continuing to look at the variable display means. For this reason, there is a concern that the user will get bored sooner, and in the first place, the game of continuing to look at the variable display means is becoming rude.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

Means PB-1. A takeover effecting means that is executed based on the detection of the specific detecting means corresponding to the specifying means, and is capable of deriving a takeover effect that inherits the behavior targeted for detection by the specific detecting means with respect to the specifying means
The hand-over effect producing means includes an instep producing means for performing instep production and an second producing means for performing second production at a position visible from the player side,
A configuration for providing a predetermined suggestion or teaching by the above-mentioned instep production and the above-mentioned second production,
Based on the detection of the specific detection means, as the takeover effect, one of the instep effect and the second effect can be started, and the end of the one can be taken over and the other can be started. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the means PB-1, the actual event and the virtual effect are further improved by performing the takeover effect in such a manner as to take over the detection (behavior related to the detection) of the specific detection means that is detected when the game progresses. It is possible to connect deeply and derive a bold effect that does not actually occur. That is, the hand-over effect is merely an effect and can be freely set. Further, it is possible to perform a variety of predetermined suggestions, teachings, and the like by the succession effect of a plurality of patterns performed based on the design. In particular, since the hand-over effect is configured by combining (connecting) the instep effect of the instep effecting means and the second effect of the second effecting means, the effect of the second effecting means continues to cooperate with each other. Based on this innovative production, it is possible to further diversify the production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability and the playability, and thus to improve the entertainment.

The specific configurations of the instep production means and the second production means are not particularly limited. For example, display means such as a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, and a dot display device, an electrical device described later. Examples thereof include drive effect means, movable accessory effect means to be described later, and light emitting means (group; arranged in a predetermined manner) including lamps such as LEDs.

Further, as the "detection of the specific detection means", for example, detection of a start ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball input means in a pachinko machine, a player in a pachinko machine or slot machine can operate Examples include detection by an operation detection unit that detects that the operation unit has been operated, or detection by an approach detection unit that can detect the proximity or contact of a predetermined object such as the player's hand. The "behavior targeted for detection by the specific detection means" means the behavior of the game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means, the behavior of the operating means that has been operated, and the behavior of the player who has approached the approach detection means. Behaviors of hands and the like can be mentioned.

Means PB-2. At least one of the instep production means and the second production means is an electric drive production means capable of executing an electric drive production using an electric drive accessory operated by an electric drive means, or a mechanics. The game machine according to the means PB-1, characterized in that the game machine is configured by a mobile accessory production means capable of executing a mobile accessory production that uses a movable mobile accessory based on dynamic energy.

According to the means PB-2, it is possible to enjoy an analog effect which is different from that of the gaming machine in which only the effect display by the display device (the liquid crystal display device, the dot display device, etc.) is performed. Of course, there is a concern that the effect will be monotonous with the effect means alone that performs the analog effect, but with this means PA, a series of various effects are provided by the instep effect means, the second effect means, and the connecting effect means. Can be derived, and such concerns can be dispelled.

The electric drive means may be, for example, a configuration in which a motor, a solenoid or the like is appropriately used. Further, the electric drive means may be drive-controlled by a production control means for performing production control.

Hereinafter, as the means B, the above means PB-1, the instep production means described in the means PB-2, and the second party production means are configured by the pseudo-sphere production means described in the means PB-2 and the display means. The following is a list of the converted configurations. The "pseudo-sphere effecting means and display means" described in the following means B is replaced with "instep effecting means and vice effecting means", and eventually "instep effecting means, And a structure other than the mobile character effecting means included in the second effect means (for example, a display means, an electric drive effecting means, a pseudo ball effecting means (or a mobile character effect effect described in the above-mentioned means A), etc.) Can be appropriately changed (replaced).

Means B-1. A game area where the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
In a gaming machine provided with a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Of the above-mentioned ball entering means, it is provided with a hand-over effect producing means capable of deriving a hand-over effect taking over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means,
The hand-over performance means is
A pseudo sphere effecting means capable of deriving a pseudo sphere effect using a pseudo sphere which is an object derived from the front of the gaming machine to a position visible.
A display means capable of deriving a pseudo-sphere display effect for displaying a virtual pseudo-sphere,
The behavior of the pseudo sphere, and a configuration for giving a predetermined suggestion or teaching by the movement display of the pseudo sphere,
One of the pseudo-sphere effect and the pseudo-sphere display effect can be started as the takeover effect based on the detection by the specific-incident ball detecting means for detecting the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means. At the same time, the gaming machine is configured to be able to take over the end of the one and start the other.

According to the means B-1, in the form of taking over the behavior of the game sphere that has been moving in the game area, the pseudo ball or a virtual ball is displayed as a hand-over effect (pseudo ball effect and pseudo ball display). By performing the effect, it is possible to derive a bold effect that cannot be executed with the game ball. That is, in general, the advantages and disadvantages in advancing the game change depending on the behavior of the game ball (which ball entering means) (for example, the game value given to the player is different). Therefore, in order to make it easy to determine that the game is being played fairly, it is impossible to arbitrarily apply an external force to the game ball after it has been launched by the launching means.

In this respect, the hand-over effect, although it seems that the behavior of the game sphere is handed over, is merely an effect, and the behavior of the pseudo sphere and the pseudo sphere display can be freely set. Furthermore, by a plurality of patterns of pseudo-sphere effects performed based on the design and pseudo-sphere display effects (for example, by associating a predetermined pattern of pseudo-sphere effects with predetermined items), a predetermined suggestion, teaching, etc. It is also possible to perform a variety of. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability and the playability, and thus to improve the entertainment.

Further, in the pseudo sphere effect, by using the pseudo sphere that is an object, it is possible to enjoy an analog effect (an analog effect part of the succession effect) in which the behavior of the pseudo sphere is visually disturbed. Further, in the pseudo sphere display effect, the virtual behavior of the pseudo sphere, which is physically difficult, is displayed on the display means, and the pseudo sphere effect is produced (with flexibility in time and position) with the pseudo sphere effect. You can enjoy the digital production (the digital production part of the succession production) that connects the behaviors of. As a result, it is possible to smoothly and smoothly provide the takeover effect in which the analog effect and the digital effect are fused, and it is possible to surely improve the interest.

As the "display means", for example, various display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, a dot display device, etc., a light emitting body, a movable accessory, etc. are appropriately arranged (a shape reminiscent of a pseudo sphere). (For example, arranging things continuously or intermittently) and the like. Further, the "specific ball entry means" may be configured to be discharged from the game area immediately after the game ball enters the ball, or constitutes an entrance to a specific area in the game area, The game ball entered may be configured to be able to remain in the game area (specific area) even if the hand-over effect is started or even if the hand-over effect is ended (or the game is played). The gate may be provided with a passage detecting means as a specific entrance detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through a predetermined part of the area). Furthermore, the hand-over effect may be started by either the pseudo-sphere effect or the pseudo-sphere display effect, and may be ended by either. In addition, the number of times of the pseudo sphere effect and the pseudo sphere display effect in the hand-over effect is not limited to one each, but can be changed appropriately (it may be two or more times respectively, the pseudo sphere effect, and The number of pseudo-sphere display effects does not have to be the same), and it is possible to move back and forth between both effects multiple times. In addition, the pseudo sphere of the pseudo sphere effect of the present means is not limited to the one that moves based on mechanical energy, and for example, a structure that is connected to a member that interlocks with the electric drive means is adopted. It is also possible to do so.

Means B-2. In the case where the hand-over effect is performed based on the detection of the specific ball-in detection means, a portion of interest from the specific ball-in means immediately after the game ball has entered to the start point of the hand-over effect in the hand-over effect means. The gaming machine according to the means B-1, further comprising a guidance display means for performing a guidance display for moving (guiding the player's line of sight).

According to the means B-2 (even if the specific ball entering means and the start position of the hand-over effect are arranged apart from each other), entering the game ball into the particular ball entering means and taking over You can strengthen the connection with the production. Therefore, it is possible to make it clearer that the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means is carried over to the hand-over effect, and it is possible to make it easier to understand what kind of effect the hand-over effect is. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize the start point and the start timing of the takeover effect, so that the takeover effect can be enjoyed more reliably. Furthermore, even if the specific entrance means and the start point of the transfer effect are separated from each other, both can be linked, so that the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the specific entrance means and the start point of the transfer effect can be increased. Can be improved.

Further, by using the guide display means, it is possible to change (adjust) the time from the game ball entering the specific ball entering means to the start of the hand-over effect without a feeling of discomfort. In that case, the takeover effect can be derived at a suitable timing. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the hand-over effect, the hand-over effect is not limited to a case where the hand-over effect is always immediately started. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the display is reserved and stored). Furthermore, it is possible to select the optimum start timing (taking into consideration the length of the hand-over effect, etc.) as the hand-over effect, and for example, in the case where the hand-over effect is unnecessarily extended by waiting for the start of the pseudo-ball effect. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the performance is deteriorated. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that raises the degree of expectation that a predetermined suggestion/teaching will be performed in the takeover effect, for example, by making a start of the takeover effect.

In addition, when the time from the game ball entering the specific ball entering means to the start of the hand-over effect is extended, the "guidance display" of the guide display means that the start of the hand-over effect is waiting. "Standby display" for teaching. For this reason, it is possible to make it easier for the user to understand that the start of the hand-over effect is waiting.

As the guidance display of the guidance display means, for example, a light emitting means is arranged from the specific entrance means to the start point of the hand-over effect (on the game board where the game area is formed on the front side or on the back side thereof), The light emitting means may be configured to sequentially emit light from the specific entrance means to the start point of the hand-over effect, and then be turned off, or an accessory movable between the specific entrance means and the start point of the hand-over effect. Is provided (on the back side of the transparent game board) to move the accessory from the specific entrance means toward the start point of the handing over effect (when the accessory is returned to the specific entrance means side, a place that cannot be seen) It is desirable to pass through), or the guide display may be performed by a transmissive display unit that is arranged in front of the game area and allows the game area to be visually recognized.

Means B-3. The gaming machine according to means B-2, wherein a predetermined suggestion or teaching can be executed by the mode of the guide display derived by the guide display means.

According to the means B-3, it is possible to enhance the effect value of the guide display performed when the player enters the specific entrance means, and to make the series of succession effects more magnificent and interesting.

Means B-4. Starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Starting ball detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball means,
A winning/winning lottery is performed based on the detection of the starting entry detecting means, and a main control means is provided for giving a special game state advantageous to the player when the winning/winning lottery is won.
The specific entrance means is configured by the starting entrance means,
The specific entrance detecting means is configured by the starting entrance detecting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3, wherein the result of the win/loss lot is suggested or taught by the takeover effect.

According to the means B-4, it is possible to make the takeover effect have a stronger interest.

Means B-5. Special display means for performing variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the win/win lottery,
A remaining time measuring means for measuring the remaining time of the variable display of the identification information,
Based on the remaining time measured by the remaining time measuring means, at least one of the pseudo sphere effect and the pseudo sphere display effect is configured to be changeable. A gaming machine described in -4.

According to the means B-5, for example, it is possible to make an adjustment such as matching the end timing of the variable display of the identification information of the special display means with the end timing of the transfer effect. Therefore, for example, the difference between the end timing of the variable display of the identification information of the special display means and the end timing of the takeover effect is too large, or a predetermined takeover effect causes the change display of the identification information corresponding to this. In time for the end, the change display of the next identification information is ended after a while after it starts, and the correspondence relationship between the hand-over effect and the change display of the identification information is lost (what is the hand-over effect? It is possible to avoid such a situation that it becomes impossible to judge whether it is suggested or taught. It should be noted that the presentation mode (length of time) of the "pseudo-sphere display presentation" that is relatively easy to adjust in time may be changeable.

Means B-6. The pseudo sphere effect means, the pseudo sphere, based on mechanical energy, comprises a pseudo sphere movement region configured to be movable,
In the pseudo sphere effect, at least a part of the pseudo sphere moving from the start point to the end point of the pseudo sphere moving region is visually recognized,
The gaming machine according to the means B-4 or B-5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with an end point detection means for detecting the end point of the pseudo-sphere moving area or the movable accessory located in the vicinity thereof.

According to the means B-6, it is possible to grasp that the pseudo sphere has reached the end point, and it is possible to relatively smoothly connect to the effect following the pseudo sphere effect (for example, pseudo sphere display effect). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance of a magnificent hand-over effect by combining the behavior of the pseudo sphere and the display of the virtual pseudo sphere of the display means. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the pseudo sphere is caught in the middle of the pseudo sphere moving area.

It should be noted that the end point detection means is configured to be able to detect a pseudo sphere immediately before reaching the end point or a pseudo sphere partially approaching the end point, rather than being able to detect the pseudo sphere that has completely reached the end point. Is desirable. The "start point of the pseudo sphere movement area" is the position where the pseudo sphere is placed (standby) when the pseudo sphere effect is started, and the "end point of the pseudo sphere movement area" is the pseudo sphere effect. This is the position where the pseudo sphere is located when it is finished, and the position where it is recovered from the pseudo sphere moving area.

Means B-7. Special display means for performing variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the win/win lottery,
When detection of the start-up ball detection means is performed, a win/loss related information acquisition means for acquiring win/loss related information used for the win/loss lottery,
In a configuration in which the special game state is started after the variation display of the identification information on the special display means is finished in the case of winning in the win/no win lottery,
When the detection of the starting ball detection unit is performed, it is determined whether or not to execute the handover effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-4 to B-6, wherein the hand-over effect ends when the variable display of the corresponding identification information ends.

According to the means B-7, the suggestion and teaching by the hand-over effect can be surely associated with the result of the win/loss lottery (variable display of the identification information by the special display means for teaching), and the hand-over effect can be selected by the win/win lottery. Can be established as an effect that suggests or teaches the result of.

It should be noted that there may be a configuration in which the hand-over effect is always performed without the hand-over effect lottery, or a time period in which the hand-over effect is always performed or with a high probability may be provided.

Means B-8. Suspended storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the win/loss related information acquired by the win/loss related information acquisition means,
A hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the win/failure related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means,
In the case where the start-up ball detection means is detected during the variable display of the identification information on the special display means, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is the change of the identification information being executed. It is a configuration that is held so that it will be done after the display,
In a stage before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined win/loss related information stored in the holding storage means is executed, the predetermined win/loss related information corresponds to the special game state. Pre-reading processing to determine whether or not there is,
In the pre-reading process, it is also determined whether or not the takeover effect lottery information acquired together with the win/loss related information is to win the takeover effect lottery, the game according to means B-7. Machine.

According to the means B-8, for example, even in the state where the hit/failure related information is stored in the holding storage means (a state in which a so-called variable display is held and stored), the detection of the start-and-input-ball detecting means is performed. Whether or not the pseudo-ball production lottery is successful is also determined at the timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance and convenience, for example, by diversifying the pseudo sphere effect and by making it easier to understand which hold the pseudo sphere effect corresponds to.

Means B-9. It is configured to be able to start the hand-over effect at the time of the variable display of the identification information performed prior to the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the win/loss related information acquired together with the hand-over effect lottery information won in the hand-over effect lottery. The gaming machine described in Means B-8, which is characterized in that

According to the means B-9, it is possible to derive a magnificent hand-over effect using (the time of) variable display for a plurality of times. It should be noted that "during the execution of the handover effect, the start of another handover effect is prohibited", or "the execution of another handover effect is also performed during the execution of the handover effect. "

Means B-10. The gaming machine according to the means B-8 or B-9, which is configured to be able to start another handover effect during execution of the handover effect.

According to the means B-10, during the hand-over effect for teaching or suggesting the result of the predetermined win/loss lottery, the hand-over effect for teaching or suggesting the result of another win/fail lottery is started (the hand-over effect is duplicated). In this way, it is possible to derive a novel effect that cannot occur in the variable display of the identification information of the special display means. In addition, a plurality of hand-over effects overlap (for example, the number of pseudo-spheres in the hand-over effect increases to two), so that the effect mode becomes more lively and the hand-over effect can be made more interesting. ..

It is to be noted that, in a state in which a plurality of hand-over effects are simultaneously performed, the previous hand-over effect corresponds to the variable display that was won in the win/win lottery, and a teaching that indicates that the win/win lottery was won in the previous hand-over effect. When the action is performed, a display indicating that the subsequent hand-over effect is temporarily stopped, re-executed, or merged or the order is changed may be derived, or may not be performed in the first place. In this case, even if the period during which the variable display is performed based on the winning/non-winning lottery is temporarily suspended, it is considered that there is no hand-over effect that has already been started, and the player feels uncomfortable. The situation can be avoided.

Means B-11. And a guide display unit for performing a guide display for moving the attention part from the hold display of the hold display unit to a start point of the hand over production of the hand over production unit (to guide the player's line of sight). The gaming machine according to any one of the features B-8 to B-10.

According to the means B-11, it is possible to perform the hand-over effect in which the correspondence with the hold is clarified. Therefore, basically, the same operation and effect as those of the above-mentioned means B-2 are exhibited. In addition, when the hand-over effect is put on standby (start is delayed), it is possible to recognize that the hand-over effect is on standby (for example, the corresponding hold display mode of the hold display means is changed). Alternatively, the content of the hand-over effect may be suggested.

Means B-12. The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-11, wherein a diameter of the pseudo sphere is larger than a diameter of the game sphere.

According to the means B-12, it is possible to make the pseudo sphere easy to see, and to enjoy the pseudo sphere effect more.

Means B-13. A plurality of the same type of the pseudo sphere, at least one of the same type of the pseudo sphere is provided with a mark that is visible when the pseudo sphere is viewed from a predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to B-12.

According to the means B-13, the pseudosphere can be used to make a predetermined suggestion. Also, if the mark is not visible even when the pseudosphere is viewed from a direction other than the predetermined direction, even if the marked pseudosphere is led to a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, If it is not possible to check (there is a mark on the back side of the pseudo sphere from the player's perspective, or the pseudo sphere is rotating at a high speed and cannot be confirmed well), there is a possibility that it is marked. When a certain type of pseudo sphere is derived, a new enjoyment of confirming the mark can be added.

Incidentally, the suggestion by the “mark” may be a suggestion or teaching of the result of a predetermined lottery together with the hand-over effect, or the winning probability in the predetermined lottery can be set in a plurality of stages. It may be a setting suggestion or teaching.

C (Structure of mobile accessory production means that commonly uses a mobile accessory in a plurality of mobile accessory moving areas). There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. Variable display is performed for this purpose (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in the pachinko machine provided with the variable display means, many players proceed with the game just by continuing to look at the variable display means. For this reason, there is a concern that the user will get bored sooner, and in the first place, the game of continuing to look at the variable display means is becoming rude.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

Means C-1. A mobile role that can derive a mobile role effect that uses a mobile role that is an object that can be derived to a position visually recognizable from the player side and that gives a certain suggestion or teaching according to the behavior of the mobile role. Equipped with means for producing things,
The mobile accessory production means is provided with a mobile accessory moving area in which the mobile accessory is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy.
In the mobile accessory production, at least a part of the appearance of the mobile accessory moving from the start point to the end point of the mobile accessory moving area is visually recognized,
The mobile accessory production means,
A mobile accessory storage means for storing the mobile accessory not used in the mobile accessory production;
Of the mobile auctions stored in the mobile acupuncture storage means, preparation assistance means for moving the mobile acupuncture to be used to the start point,
Storage auxiliary means for storing the mobile accessory that has reached the end point in the mobile accessory storage means,
The movable accessory moving regions are provided so as to be separated from each other, while the movable accessory and the first movable accessory moving region that commonly uses the storage assisting unit and the second movable type are used. An amusement machine having an accessory movement area.

According to the means C-1, it is possible to enjoy the effect different from the effect display by the display device by the movable accessory effect using the movable accessory. Further, by providing the mobile accessory storage means, the preparation assisting means, and the storage assisting means, the mobile accessory used in the mobile accessory production is taken out from the mobile accessory storage means, and the mobile accessory is used. It is possible to surely and relatively smoothly form the cycle of use of the mobile accessory, in which the mobile accessory used for the performance is stored in the mobile accessory storage means. In particular, due to the presence of the mobile accessory storage means capable of taking in and out the mobile accessory, it is possible to use a plurality of mobile accessories, and it is possible to improve convenience and performance.

Furthermore, since a plurality of mobile role moving areas in which the mobile role is moved are provided, it is possible to achieve diversification of the mobile role effect production and to suppress rut. In addition, by using the mobile accessory, the mobile accessory storing means, the preparation assisting means, and the storage assisting means in common in the plurality of mobile accessory moving areas, the size of the mobile accessory effecting means is increased. In addition, it is possible to improve convenience in management of the mobile accessory while suppressing an increase in the number of parts and a decrease in manufacturing workability.

Means C-2. The movable accessory storage means is configured to be displaceable,
A position where the mobile accessory used in the mobile accessory production can be derived from the mobile accessory storage unit, the first mobile accessory moving area, and the second mobile accessory. It is possible to match the starting point of the moving area, and the position where the mobile accessory used in the mobile accessory production can be received in the mobile accessory storing means, and the first mobile prize. The gaming machine according to means C-1, further comprising a displacing means that can match an object moving area and an end point of the second movable accessory moving area.

According to the means C-2, by displacing the movable accessory driving means itself, the movable accessory reaches the start point of the movable accessory moving area while being stored in the movable accessory storage means. However, when the mobile accessory reaches the end point of the mobile accessory moving area, it is already stored in the mobile accessory storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exchange the mobile accessory between the mobile accessory storage means and the mobile accessory moving area while suppressing the complication of the mobile accessory production means. When this means is adopted, the movable accessory storage means and the displacement means constitute a preparation assistance means and a storage assistance means.

Means C-3. A position where the mobile accessory used in the mobile accessory production can be derived from the mobile accessory storage unit, the first mobile accessory moving area, and the second mobile accessory. In the state where the start point of one of the moving areas is aligned, at least a part of the passage leading to the end point of the one of the moving areas is blocked, and the stopping means for preventing the mobile type accessory from reaching the end point is moved. The gaming machine according to means C-2, characterized in that the formula accessory storing means is provided.

According to the means C-3, in a state in which the mobile accessory storage means is arranged on the starting point side of the mobile accessory moving area, the mobile accessory moves in the mobile accessory moving area and moves. The end point where the mobile accessory storage means is not yet arranged is reached in the expression accessory movement area, and the mobile accessory cannot be stored (recovered) in the mobile accessory storage means. Such a situation can be avoided. Further, since the stopping means is provided in the mobile accessory storage means, the passage on the end point side of the mobile accessory moving area can be opened/closed in association with the displacement of the mobile accessory storage means. For example, as compared with the case where a separate shutter or the like is provided, the configuration and control can be simplified.

Means C-4. The preparation assisting means receives at least the mobile accessory discharged from the mobile accessory storing means, the first movable accessory moving area, and the second mobile accessory moving area. A first movable floor displaceable between each of the starting points of
The storage assisting means can return at least the first movable type accessory moving area and the respective end points of the second movable type accessory moving area, and the movable accessory to the movable type accessory storing means. The gaming machine according to the means C-1, which is provided with a second movable floor that is displaceable between different return positions.

According to the means C-4, by using the first movable floor and the second movable floor, the mobile accessory relatively smoothly moves between each mobile accessory moving area and the mobile accessory storing means. It is possible to move in and out of the mobile type accessory relatively smoothly. Also, for example, as in the case where there is one movable floor, the movable floor that has started moving from the start point does not arrive in time by the time it reaches the end point (or the movable floor moves fairly quickly to make it in time). It is possible to more reliably avoid such a situation. Further, the preparation assisting means can also be shared in the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region, thus improving convenience while avoiding complication of the configuration and the like. It is possible to improve the performance.

In addition, "the second movable floor located at the end point is lower than a lower edge portion of a connection path between the start point and the end point in the movable accessory moving area that is connected to the end point. It may be located below." In this case, since a step is formed between the second movable floor at the end point and the connection passage, it is possible to more reliably prevent the situation where the mobile accessory that has reached the end point returns to the connection passage side. You can Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the connection of the production deteriorates because the mobile accessory that has reached the end point returns to the connection passage and is visible, and the performance of the mobile accessory production is improved. Can be planned.

In addition, “the first movable floor located at the starting point is lower than a lower edge portion of a connecting portion between the starting point and the ending point in a connecting passage that connects the starting point and the ending point in the movable type accessory moving area. It may be said that it is located above." In this case, since the first movable floor at the starting point is set to be located above the connecting portion of the connecting passage with the starting point, for example, the first movable floor at the starting point and the starting point of the connecting passage. In the case where the connection part with the flat passage is set to be flat, the first movable floor is slightly lower than the connection portion with the start point in the connection passage due to an error in the operation of the first movable floor. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the mobile accessory is damaged, the mobile accessory at the starting point is not displaced to the connection passage side, etc.

Means C-5. The mobile type accessory production means comprises a communication path for communicating between the first mobile type accessory movement area, the second mobile type accessory movement area, and the mobile type accessory storage means,
The first movable floor and the second movable floor are configured to be displaceable in the common communication passage, and the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region. The gaming machine according to means C-4, wherein the starting point and the ending point are provided in the communication passage.

According to the means C-5, it is possible to more smoothly transfer the mobile accessory between the mobile accessory storage means and the start point and the end point of the mobile accessory moving area. In addition, since the first movable floor and the second movable floor are provided in a common communication passage, the first movable floor moving area and the second movable floor are also provided for the first movable floor and the second movable floor. It can be commonly used in the second mobile accessory moving area. Therefore, the operational effect of improving the convenience of the management of the mobile accessory while suppressing the increase in the size of the mobile accessory production, the increase in the number of parts, the deterioration of the manufacturing workability, and the like is more significantly exhibited. The Rukoto.

Means C-6. The first movable type accessory movement region is provided on the upstream side of the second movable type accessory movement region,
The second movable floor is configured to be arranged at the starting point of the second movable type accessory movement region,
At least the end point of the second movable role moving area, the return position, and the second movable floor positioned at the end point of the second movable role moving area. Equipped with a third movable floor that can be displaced between the retracted position to retract,
In the third movable floor, when the second movable floor is located at the start point of the second movable type accessory movement area (the second movable floor is arranged at the end point of the second movable role movement area). If not), the second movable type accessory moving area is arranged at the end point (if the second movable floor is arranged at the end point of the second movable accessory moving area, The game machine according to the means C-4 or C-5, characterized in that the gaming machine is disposed in a retracted position).

According to the means C-6, in the configuration including the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable role movement region on the downstream side of the first movable role movement region, the first movable role. The first movable floor and the second movable floor on which the movable accessory is placed are arranged with respect to the starting point and the ending point of the object moving area, and the moving accessory is the starting point of the first moving accessory moving area. After displacing from the end point to the end point, the second movable floor is displaced to the start point of the second movable type accessory moving area, thereby moving the movable type accessory to the first movable type accessory moving area and the second movable role. In the object movement area, it is possible to move the object movement with as little space as possible. Therefore, for example, a mobile accessory that has moved to the end point after moving in the first mobile accessory moving area passes through the mobile accessory storing means once, and then starts at the start point of the second mobile accessory moving area. It is possible to diversify the production, etc., as compared with the configuration as described above.

Further, due to the presence of the third movable floor, the movable movable object placed on the second movable floor, which is arranged at the start point of the second movable role object moving area, reaches the end point of the second movable role object moving area. Also in this case, the mobile accessory can be received by the third movable floor and reliably returned to the mobile accessory storage means. Further, for example, after the pseudo sphere effect in the second movable role moving object area, the effect of performing the pseudo sphere effect in the first movable role object moving area can be performed relatively smoothly.

It should be noted that the second movable floor can be arranged at the start point of the first movable accessory moving area, the third movable floor can be arranged at the end point of the first movable accessory moving area, and the first movable floor can be moved first. It may be possible to dispose it in an upper retreat position that is retracted from the start point of the formula accessory moving area to a side different from the end point side. In this case, it is possible to move the mobile type accessory moved in the second mobile type accessory movement area to the first mobile type accessory movement area without passing through the mobile type accessory storage means.

Means C-7. At least one of the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region is configured to be capable of deriving an effect of successively passing the plurality of movable type effects,
The first movable floor is configured to be capable of transporting a plurality of the movable accessory members at a time, and at the receiving position, the first movable member accessory moving area and the second movable accessory object moving area are provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-4 to C-6, which is configured to receive the plurality of mobile auctions in a reverse order of the order of passing.

According to the means C-7, it is possible to perform an effect such that a plurality of mobile auditors are continuously passed through the first mobile auditors moving area and the second mobile auditors moving area.

Means C-8. The first movable type accessory movement region and the movable type effects arranged at the respective starting points of the second movable type accessory movement regions are defined as the start point and the end point of the movable type accessory movement region. 8. A game machine according to any one of the means C-1 to C-7, characterized in that a start assisting means for displacing to the side of the connection passage, which is a part for connecting between and, is provided.

According to the means C-8, in each of the mobile accessory moving regions, the mobile accessory is made to stand by at the starting point just before the start of the mobile accessory production, and the movement of the mobile accessory (the mobile accessory production is performed. ) Can be started at a timing matched to other effects. In particular, sufficient measures have been taken to prevent a situation in which the mobile accessory conveyed by the first movable floor to the starting point is inadvertently moved to the connection passage side immediately after reaching the starting point (for example, (1) Even if the mounting surface (upper surface) of the movable floor inclines downward to the side opposite to the connecting passage side, etc.), the movable accessory can be moved to the connecting passage side accurately at a desired timing. it can. Further, for example, compared to a configuration in which the mobile accessory naturally moves to the connection passage when the mobile accessory reaches the starting point, the initial motion of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory moving area can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to appropriately adjust the moving speed of the mobile accessory to be moved to each mobile accessory moving area.

It should be noted that, corresponding to the means C-4, the starting point and the receiving position of the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region are different from each other. ,". In this case, the start assisting means can be suitably installed (avoiding interference with the mobile accessory storage means, etc.) corresponding to each starting point, and the mobile accessory discharged from the mobile accessory storage means can be installed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the object passes through the starting point of the mobile accessory moving area and starts moving in the mobile accessory moving area while keeping the momentum.

Further, corresponding to the above-mentioned means C-4, "the first movable floor is inclined upward toward the connection passage side that connects the start point and the end point in the movable accessory movement region, Alternatively, a positioning recess for positioning the movable accessory placed on the first movable floor is provided, and the second movable floor is inclined downward toward the movable accessory storing means. It is also possible to say. Since the first movable floor is inclined upward toward the connection passage side of the movable role moving area, the movable role is inadvertently displaced into the connection passage when the first movable floor moves to the starting point. It is possible to avoid such a situation as to end up. In addition, the second movable floor is inclined downward toward the mobile accessory storage means side, so that the mobile accessory placed on the second movable floor at the return position is returned to the mobile accessory storage means. In doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a separate drive mechanism for moving the movable accessory placed on the second movable floor to the storage room side is required.

In addition, as the “starting assisting device”, for example, an extruding device that extrudes the movable accessory mounted on the first movable floor located at the starting point toward the connecting passage can be mentioned. Further, the pushing means may be configured to be able to change the speed at which the movable accessory is pushed to the side of the connection passage. In this case, it is possible to diversify the production. Further, as the pushing means, for example, a mechanism using a DC motor, a solenoid capable of changing the moving speed of the plunger, or the like can be mentioned. Further, in order to prevent damage to the movable accessory, it is desirable that the movable accessory is basically pushed out at a low speed by the extruding means. It is desirable to gradually change from a low speed to a high speed, and it is desirable that the pushing means and the movable accessory are brought into contact with or close to each other while the movable accessory is waiting at the starting point.

Note that, for example, in the case where the movable floor storage means side and the connection passage side are on the same side of the movable floor, the inclination of the movable floor changes in the process of displacement of the movable floor. May be adopted.

Means C-9. In the mobile accessory production, a plurality of types of the mobile accessory is used,
The mobile accessory storage means comprises a plurality of storage rooms for storing the mobile accessory,
9. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-8, wherein each of the storage rooms is associated with a type of the mobile auditors.

According to the means C-9, it is possible to diversify the mobile character effect production while orderly managing the mobile character effect in the mobile character effect production means, and to make a predetermined suggestion in the mobile character effect production. Teaching and the like can be made easier. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance and the like while suppressing a mistake in the type of the mobile accessory to be used and an increase in the time required for selection when taking out. Further, the change of the type of the mobile accessory is not so easy as compared with the case of using a predetermined display means such as a liquid crystal display device, but the player can be more interested in the change. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid contact between the mobile accessory parts, reduce damage and deterioration of the mobile accessory parts, and improve durability. It should be noted that examples of different types of mobile accessory include those having different colors, patterns, sizes, shapes, materials, and the like.

Means C-10. The movable accessory storage means is provided with a rotary storage board in which the plurality of storage chambers are arranged side by side in a ring shape and configured to be rotatable,
The mobile accessory production means is a communication passage (the above-mentioned means) for communicating the first mobile accessory movement area and the second mobile accessory movement area with the mobile accessory storage means. Same as C-3),
Each of the storage rooms is provided between a discharge position at which the mobile accessory stored in the storage room can be discharged to the communication portion and a receiving position at which the mobile accessory can be received from the communication passage. The gaming machine according to means C-9, which is configured to be displaceable.

According to the means C-10, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of mobile auditors are handled, a mobile auditors storing means in which a plurality of mobile auditors are stored while suppressing an increase in size of the mobile auditors storing means. On the other hand, the target mobile accessory can be efficiently put in and taken out. For example, in the case where eight storage rooms for the mobile accessory are provided and the storage rooms are arranged in a straight line, the discharge unit may straddle the seven storage rooms from one storage room to the other storage room. However, in the case of circular arrangement, it is only necessary to make relative displacement so as to straddle the four storage chambers.

Means C-11. When the storage room is displaced to the discharge position, the floor surface of the storage room on which the movable accessory is placed inclines downward toward the communication passage side,
When the storage room is displaced to the receiving position, the floor surface of the storage room on which the movable accessory is placed inclines downward toward the side away from the communication passage,
The discharge prevention shutter capable of restricting movement of the movable accessory is provided between the storage room at the discharge position and the communication passage. Amusement machine.

According to the means C-11, in order to discharge the mobile accessory stored in the storage room displaced to the discharge position from the storage room, the mobile accessory is moved to the communication section side (for example, the pusher). It is possible to avoid the situation where a separate drive mechanism is required. Furthermore, in order to maintain the storage state of the mobile accessory stored in the storage room displaced to the receiving position, it is possible to avoid a situation where a separate shutter for regulating the displacement of the mobile accessory is required. it can. Therefore, it is possible to relatively smoothly execute the mobile accessory effect while simplifying the configuration.

Further, since the discharge prevention shutter is provided, the mobile accessory stored in the storage room at the discharge position is carelessly discharged (the mobile accessory that is not scheduled to be discharged) from the storage room, or It is possible to prevent a situation in which the mobile accessory is displaced from the communication portion in the direction in which it is stored in the storage room at the discharge position. Therefore, the management control of the mobile accessory can be performed more reliably and smoothly. It should be noted that, if only the mobile accessory discharged from the storage room at the discharge position to the preparation assisting means is prevented from returning to the storage room at the discharge position, no storage room matches the discharge position. It is also possible to displace the storage means to such a position, but in the process of positioning a predetermined storage room at the discharge position, when a storage room other than the predetermined one matches the discharge position, It is impossible to prevent the mobile accessory stored in the storage room from being discharged to the preparation assisting means side.

Means C-12. The mobile accessory production means is the mobile accessory, the mobile accessory storage means, the preparation assisting means, and the first mobile accessory moving area that commonly uses the storage assisting means, and , The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 to C-11, further comprising a plurality of mobile accessory moving area units each including the second mobile accessory moving area.

According to the means C-12, after performing the mobile character effect production in the first mobile character role moving area of the predetermined mobile character role moving area unit, the mobile character role is moved in another mobile character role moving area unit. While the performance is being performed, it is possible to sufficiently prepare for the next mobile character performance in the second mobile character moving area of the predetermined mobile character moving area unit. Therefore, it is possible to relatively smoothly perform a magnificent mobile accessory production by a plurality of mobile accessory movement area units.

Means C-13. 13. The gaming machine according to means C-12, wherein the movable accessory moving area unit is configured to be installed in an upside down orientation.

According to the means C-13, when a plurality of mobile accessory moving area units are installed, even if the same mobile accessory moving area unit is used, the installation direction is changed, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It is possible to arrange a mobile accessory moving area unit capable of suitably performing a mobile accessory moving effect (without giving a sense of incongruity) while reducing the number of It is possible to perform mobile accessory productions that do not seem to be using.

Means C-14. The mobile character effect production means is provided with a connection effect means capable of deriving a connection effect for moving and displaying a virtual mobile effect object between a plurality of the mobile character effect moving area units. The gaming machine described in Means C-12 or C-13.

According to the means C-14, a more magnificent mobile accessory using a plurality of mobile accessory moving area units by a connection effect that connects the behaviors of the mobile accessory between a plurality of mobile accessory moving area units. In addition to being able to derive effects, it is possible to smoothly connect between mobile effect effects by mobile effects in each mobile effect object movement area unit, adjust time etc. It is possible to derive a bold display effect that is impossible (for example, physically impossible). As a result, it is possible to smoothly and easily provide the effect in which the analog effect and the digital effect are combined, and to surely improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the movable character effect producing means may be provided with an end point detecting means for detecting the end point of the movable character part moving area or the movable character object located in the vicinity thereof". .. In this case, when the movable accessory effect is linked with other effects, the timing of the effect can be more accurately matched.

Means C-15. The starting point and the ending point of the movable accessory moving region are configured to be invisible or difficult to visually recognize from the front of the game machine. The game machine described.

According to the means C-15, it is possible to blind the mobile type accessory at the start point and the end point (corresponding to the means C-4, the first movable floor and the second movable floor at the start point and the end point). By visually observing the behavior of the mobile accessory that is in a stopped state before and after the mobile accessory production, and between the start point and the end point and the mobile accessory storage means. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the performance is deteriorated.

Means C-16. The first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region are configured to be individually attachable to and detachable from the gaming machine body. The game machine according to any one of C-15.

According to the means C-16, it is possible to improve the maintainability (the easiness of work such as repair and replacement) of the first movable type accessory movement region and the second movable type accessory movement region. As in the above-mentioned means C-12, the first mobile accessory moving area and the second mobile accessory moving area are unitized into one (configured as a mobile accessory moving area unit. ) Even in the case, the first movable type accessory moving area and the second movable role moving area can be individually attached and detached with the movable role moving area unit attached to the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience.

D (Increase the progress of the game ball moving in the specific area by handing over instead. Finally, return to the state where the behavior of the real game ball can be visually confirmed). There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. Variable display is performed for this purpose (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in the pachinko machine provided with the variable display means, many players proceed with the game just by continuing to look at the variable display means. For this reason, there is a concern that the user will get bored sooner, and in the first place, the game of continuing to look at the variable display means is becoming rude.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

Means D-1. A game area where the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
In a gaming machine provided with a specific area entering means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific area entrance means,
A first special ball entering part, and a second special ball entering part, into which a game ball moving in the specific area can enter.
Entry detection means for detecting the game sphere entering the specific area on the upstream side of the first special entry part and the second special entry part,
A first special entrance detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the first special entrance portion;
A second special ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second special ball portion,
When the game ball is detected by the first special entrance detection means, the first grant is made,
When the game ball is detected by the second special entrance detection means, a second grant different from the first grant (which is more advantageous to the player than the first grant) is performed. hand,
The behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific area until the detection of the first special ball detection unit and the second special ball detection unit is triggered by the detection of the entry detection unit. A gaming machine comprising: a takeover effect means capable of deriving a takeover effect.

According to the means D-1, instead of the game ball that entered the specific area, by deriving a takeover effect that inherits the behavior of the game ball that entered the specific area, a bold effect that cannot be executed by the game ball. Can be derived. That is, in general, the advantage in advancing the game (the number of game values given to the player, etc.) differs depending on the behavior of the game ball (which ball entering means). In order to make it easy to discriminate that the game is being performed fairly, it is impossible to arbitrarily apply an external force to the game ball after it has been launched by the launching means.

In this regard, the hand-over effect, although it is shown as if the behavior of the game ball is handed over, is merely an effect and the content can be freely set. Further, it is possible to give a variety of predetermined suggestions and teachings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability and the playability, and thus to improve the entertainment.

In addition, in this means, even if the hand-over effect is started, the game ball that has entered the specific area has not entered the first special entrance part and the second special entrance part, It is in a state where the result of whether the grant or the second grant is granted has not been decided yet. For this reason, the time length (timing of the end) of the hand-over effect is already determined for the hand-over effect by determining it according to the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area. It is possible to eliminate the impression (so-called finished race feeling) that only the behavior corresponding to the result is shown. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest in the hand-over production.

On the other hand, of the passages of the game spheres in the specific area, for the sections where the game spheres pass during the period when the hand-over effect is derived, the shape of the passage, and thus the behavior of the game spheres passing through the passage Even if (for example, a shape that does not easily clog a ball), instead of the behavior of the game ball, it is possible to excite the game with a hand-over effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably derive an effect in which the behavior of the game ball in the specific area and the takeover effect are entwined while suppressing the complication of the configuration.

Regarding the behavior of the game ball moving in a specific area while the hand-over effect is being performed, it is possible to make it invisible from the front of the gaming machine where the player side is located, but for the player who is anxious It is desirable that the game machine be configured so that it can be seen from the front. Furthermore, the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area is not so noticeable while the corresponding hand-over effect is being performed, while the hand-over effect of the game ball is so remarkable that the hand-over effect is conspicuous. A structure that reduces visibility (for example, a semi-transparent member is provided in front of the game ball moving in a specific area, a plate-like body that refracts or diffuses light to the front is provided, a beam A splitter may be provided, a transmissive display device may be provided, and a display that is relatively difficult to visually recognize at a relevant portion may be provided.

Means D-2. The hand-over effect is before the game ball whose entry into the specific area is triggered by the start of the hand-over effect is detected by the first special entrance detection means and the second special entrance detection means. The gaming machine according to the means D-1, characterized in that the mode of the handover effect is configured to be inheritable to the game ball moving in the specific area, which is the trigger for starting the handover effect.

According to the means D-2, after the pseudo sphere effect, the behavior of the pseudo sphere is taken over, and the state is switched to a state in which the behavior of the real game sphere in the specific area is visually recognized. Of course, the actual result will differ depending on whether the game ball enters the first special entrance section or the second special entrance section. For this reason, it is possible to dispel the sense of success of the succession production, and it is possible to have a stronger interest in the succession production.

It should be noted that, compared to the linear distance from the entrance of the specific area to the point where the game sphere that inherits the aspect of the takeover effect is visually recognized, the point where the game ball that inherits the aspect of the takeover effect is visually recognized from the entrance of the specific area Up to, the movement distance of the game ball that inherits the mode of the above-mentioned effect is longer." In this case, it is possible to carefully take over the effect.

Means D-3. The takeover effect is configured to be executable until a game ball moving in the specific area is detected by the first special entrance detecting means and the second special entrance detecting means, and the result is taught. The gaming machine according to the means D-1 or D-2.

According to the means D-3, as a way of showing the effect, as to which of the first special entrance portion and the second special entrance portion the game ball moving in the specific area enters Instead of showing the behavior directly, it can be indirectly performed until the end by means of a hand-over effect production (hand-over effect). Therefore, the production can be performed flashily.

Means D-4. The takeover effect is
Before a game ball moving in the specific area, which is a trigger for the hand over to enter the specific area, is detected by the first special entrance detecting means and the second special entrance detecting means. And a first effect state in which the mode of the hand-over effect is configured to be handed over to the game ball moving in the specific area, which is a start timing of the hand-over effect,
A game ball moving in the specific area is detected by the first special ball detection means and the second special ball detection means, and the state can be changed to a second effect state that is performed until the result is taught. The gaming machine described in Means D-1 which is configured.

According to the means D-4, it is possible to switch between the first effect state (similar to that shown in the above-mentioned means D-2) and the second effect state (similar to that shown in the above-mentioned means D-3). .. Therefore, the effect patterns are increased, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the switching between the first effect state and the second effect state is performed based on a predetermined trigger of the gaming machine (e.g., winning in a corresponding lottery, the number of games exceeds a set value). Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed based on the corresponding operation of the operation means operable by the player. Further, for example, instead of the hand-over effect, an effect state in which the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area is directly visually recognized may be provided (switchable automatically or manually).

Means D-5. The specific area entrance means moves the specific area in a passage effect corresponding section, which is a section through which a game ball passes in a period in which the takeover effect is derived, in the passage of the game balls in the specific area. Equipped with a progress detection means capable of detecting a sphere,
The game machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-4, wherein the content of the takeover effect is determined based on the detection information of the progress detection means.

According to the means D-5, the game ball moving in the specific area and the hand-over effect can be more surely linked, and the hand-over effect can be advanced at any time along with the progress of the game ball. In other words, the progress (speed) of the game ball and the timing of the start and end of the predetermined effect of the handover effect are matched, the result selected by the behavior of the game ball, and the contents of the suggestion/teaching by the handover effect are displayed. Can be matched. Therefore, the hand-over effect can be made more realistic and interesting.

Incidentally, corresponding to the means D-2, "the specific region is a section for passing over effect, which is a section through which the game ball passes in the period in which the effect for leading over is derived, the section for passing over effect, 1 special ball entry section, and a section between the second special ball entry section, and a settling section visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the takeover effect means is discharged from the takeover effect corresponding section. Equipped with a hand-over effect end detection means for detecting a game ball,
The takeover effect may be derived from the time the detection is performed by the entrance detecting means to the time when the detection is performed by the takeover effect end detecting means."

In this case, the hand-over effect can be more easily understood by the effect expression that the game ball moving in the specific area is handed over.

Means D-6. The specific area entering means, in the passage of the game ball of the specific area, the game ball in the passage special corresponding section, which is a section through which the game ball passes in the period in which the takeover effect is derived, the second special ball A main passage for guiding to the entrance portion side, a removal passage for guiding a game ball moving in the main passage to the first special entrance portion side, a gaming ball moving in the main passage for the main passage, and And a sorting means for guiding to one of the detached passages,
A progress detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the specific area is provided so as to be able to determine whether the game ball is guided to the main passage or the outflow passage in the sorting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristic means D-1 to D-5.

According to the means D-6, since the distribution means and the progress detection means are provided in the transfer effect corresponding section, it is possible to derive an effect as to whether or not the transfer effect fails (continues). Therefore, the value of the hand-over effect can be increased and the interest in the hand-over effect can be further increased.

It should be noted that it may be configured such that "when a game ball enters the branch passage, the game ball is taught not to reach the second special entrance portion in the handover effect". Good. Further, the passage detecting means may be configured to include a detecting means provided in a portion of the main passage immediately downstream of the connecting portion with the branch passage and in the branch passage, respectively. The structure may be provided with a part immediately upstream of the connecting part and a detecting means provided in the branch passage, respectively, and a part of the main passage immediately downstream of the connecting part with the branch passage, and a part downstream of the connecting part, and Alternatively, it may be configured to include detection means provided in each branch passage.

Means D-7. The disengagement passage includes a first section that extends in parallel with the main passage (forward and backward), and a second section that guides the game ball that has moved in the first section to a discharge passage that leads to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to means D-6.

According to the means D-7, even if the game ball moving in the main passage and the out passage is visible to the player, the game ball is in the out passage immediately after the game ball enters the out passage. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the entry. In particular, when the branch passage and the main passage are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction (the escape passage and the game ball passing through the main passage can be visually recognized by the player), the action and effect are more remarkably exhibited. It As a result, the announcement of which branch the game ball has moved to can be postponed until, for example, a notification is given by a predetermined teaching means, and the game ball performed by the takeover effect by the takeover effecting means has entered the outflow passage. You can get a stronger interest in the teaching of whether or not.

Note that "the main passage and the detachment passage may be transparent". Further, it may be a “first section set as a section through which the game ball passes while the transfer effect of the game ball having entered into the deviation passage is being performed among the deviation passage”.

Means D-8. Among the passages of the game balls in the specific area, a takeover effect corresponding section that is a section through which the game balls pass in a period in which the takeover effect is derived, and when the takeover effect means is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, The brightness of the game ball moving in the transfer effect corresponding section is configured to be darker than the brightness of the transfer effect performed by the transfer effect means, D-1 to D-7. A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the means D-8, while the hand-over effect is derived, it is possible to concentrate on the hand-over effect. Further, even during the handover effect, a player who wants to grasp the behavior of the game ball can confirm the behavior of the game ball. It should be noted that a transmissive display device, a translucent plate-shaped body, or the like may be provided in front of the handover effect corresponding section. Further, the visualizing portion of the takeover effect of the takeover effect means may be arranged in front of the gaming machine with respect to the takeover effect corresponding section.

Furthermore, “the specific area is a section between the handover effect corresponding section, the first special ball-in section, and the second special ball-in section, and includes a settlement section visible from the front of the gaming machine. , The brightness of the game sphere moving in the settlement section may be configured to be brighter than the brightness of the game sphere moving in the handover effect corresponding section”. In this case, the behavior of the game ball in the settling section can be more surely enjoyed. It is also possible to provide an illumination means capable of irradiating light toward the settlement section. In addition, it is provided with a hand-over effect end detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed the end point of the hand-over effect corresponding section or its vicinity, and the lighting means is turned on based on the detection of the hand-over effect end detection means. May be

Means D-9. The specific area, in the passage of the game ball of the specific area, a passing effect corresponding section which is a section through which the game ball passes in the period in which the effect is derived, the passing effect corresponding section, and the first A special ball entering section and a section between the second special ball entering section, and a settlement section visible from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-8, wherein the takeover effect means is arranged at a position deviating from a front position of the takeover effect corresponding section.

According to the means D-9, while the hand-over effect is derived, it is possible to have the user concentrate on the hand-over effect. Further, even during the handover effect, a player who wants to grasp the behavior of the game ball can confirm the behavior of the game ball. Furthermore, whether the game ball in the specific area enters the first special entrance section or the second special entrance section can be visually recognized in the settlement section.

It should be noted that “the settlement section may be arranged in front of the gaming machine with respect to the handover effect corresponding section”. In this case, the action and effect of making it easier to see the behavior of the game ball in the settling section are more reliably exhibited. Also, so that the transfer between the transfer effect corresponding section and the settling section is carried out well, "the game ball moving in the transfer effect corresponding section is the transfer mode of the transfer effect means among the transfer effect means when looking at the game machine front type. It is also possible to derive from the part where the effect is performed to the settlement section”.

Means D-10. Starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Starting ball detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball means,
A winning/winning lottery is performed based on the detection of the starting entry detecting means, and a main control means is provided to give a special game state advantageous to the player when winning in the winning/winning lottery,
The main control means is configured to add the special game state as the second addition even when the detection by the second special entrance detection means is performed.
Any of the means D-1 to D-9 characterized by being configured to be capable of deriving the hand-over effect even if there is no detection information of the entrance detection means, triggered by the detection by the start-up entrance detection means. A game machine described in Crab.

According to the means D-10, the hand-over effect may be executed even when the game ball has not entered the specific area (even if there is no detection information of the entry detection means), and an opportunity to derive the hand-over effect. Can be increased. In particular, the succession effect that is performed based on the winning or non-winning lottery can more freely determine the content and the like regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the specific area, and a variation of the succession effect having an impact can be provided. By the way, if the hand-over effect is triggered by the winning/absence lottery, not by the detection of the entrance detecting means, there is no game ball that moves in a specific area in parallel with the progress of the hand-over effect (the hand-over effect is the specific area). Since the behavior of the game ball entered in is not inherited), the transfer effect is taught to give a special game state (as in the means D-2, a game in which a specific area is moved from the transfer effect). It does not carry over to the behavior of the sphere).

In addition to the winning/unwinning lottery that was won in the special gaming state, the winning/winning lottery that is not won in the special gaming state is used as a trigger to derive the takeover effect, so that the game ball enters the specific area. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is understood that a special game state will always occur when it is possible to confirm that the hand-over effect has started despite the absence.

In addition, “displaced between an open position which is provided at the entrance of the specific area and allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter the specific area and a closed position which restricts the ball entering the specific area. Possible entrance opening and closing means,
A game ball moving in the game area is provided with an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the variable ball entering means is provided.
A special game state in which at least the winning/winning lottery is performed based on the detection of the starting entrance detecting means and the open lottery, and when the winning/winning lottery is won, the variable entering means is opened. When the game is detected by the second special entrance detecting means, when the game is detected by the second special entrance detecting means, the entrance opening and closing means is set to the open position when the opening lottery is won. And a main control means for imparting the special game state”.

Means D-11. A special guide passage for guiding the game ball moving in the specific area to the second special ball entering portion,
The game ball moving in the special guide passage must enter the second special ball portion,
The game ball entering the second special ball entering portion is configured to always pass through the special guide passage,
The game machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-10, characterized in that the second special ball-in portion and the special guide passage are visible from the front of the game machine.

According to the means D-11, it is possible to more surely see how the game ball moving in the specific area enters the second special entrance part. Therefore, it is possible to firmly recognize the development of the game as to whether or not the second grant is made (to avoid the progress of the game without knowing it well), and the game ball has entered the special guide passage. In this case, it is possible to secure time to have the game balls moving in the special guidance passage viewed with pleasure. As a result, interest can be improved. In particular, it is possible that the hand-over effect is derived in a visual mode that is easier to see than the behavior of the game ball, and like the above-mentioned means D-2, the hand-over effect mode is the specific region that is the trigger for starting the hand-over effect. When it is configured to be taken over by a moving game ball, it is feared that it will be relatively difficult to follow the game ball with eyes, but by adopting the configuration of the means D-11, such a concern is concerned. Can be wiped off.

Incidentally, in place of or in addition to the structure of the means D-11, “the first special ball-in part and the second special ball-in part are provided in communication with at least one of the first special ball-in part and the first special ball-in part. It is also possible to include a special entrance portion or a transparent passage portion through which the game ball entered in the second special entrance portion can be visually recognized." In this case, as compared to the configuration in which the game ball disappears at the moment when the game ball enters the second special entrance section and the first special entrance section, the game ball becomes the second special entrance section, and , It is possible to make it easier to recognize which one of the first special entrance portions has entered the ball.

Means D-12. The hand-over effect is a pseudo-sphere effect in which a pseudo-sphere that is an object that can be derived to a position visible from the player side is used and a predetermined suggestion or teaching is given based on the behavior of the pseudo-sphere. The gaming machine according to any one of D-1 to D-11.

According to the means D-12, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the behavior of the game ball and the hand-over effect are related.

Means D-13. Any of the means D-1 to D-12 characterized in that the hand-over effect means includes a display means, and the hand-over effect includes at least a pseudo-sphere display effect for displaying a movement of a virtual pseudo-sphere on the display means. A game machine described in Crab.

According to the means D-13, the pseudo sphere display effect allows the behavior of the game sphere to be smoothly connected to the succeeding effect. Incidentally, corresponding to the means D-12, "the pseudo-sphere display effect is interposed between the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific region and the pseudo-sphere effect" Good. In this case, the behavior of the game ball and the pseudo ball effect can be connected more smoothly (displacement or the like can be eliminated).

Means D-14. In the passage of the game ball in the specific area, an electric drive accessory that is configured to be able to execute a periodic operation and that operates at least in the state where the game ball exists in the specific area is provided.
A game ball moving in the specific area is guided by the electric driving accessory and moves to a downstream side of the electric driving means in the specific area, which is characterized in that the means D-1 to D-13. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the means D-14, the staying time in the specific area of the game ball moving in the specific area passage can be earned by a method other than extending the distance of the specific area passage. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for performing the hand-over effect.

Means D-15. In the passage of the game ball in the specific area, an electric drive means that is configured to be able to execute a periodic operation and that operates at least when the game ball exists in the specific area is provided,
The game ball that moves in the specific area is a side of the first special entrance portion and the second special entrance portion, or the first special entrance portion and the second special entrance portion. It is configured to be movable to a retreat area located on the downstream side of the retreat area, and the game balls in the retreat area are assisted by the electric drive means to cause the first special entrance portion and the second special entrance ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-14, which is configured to be capable of reaching a section.

According to the means D-15, the specific area can be secured in a wider range, and the staying time of the game ball moving in the specific area can be earned. In addition, by setting the retracted position to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to concentrate on the transfer effect.

Means D-16. The takeover effect means is capable of deriving the takeover effect between the entrance portion of the game ball to the specific area entrance means, the first special entrance ball portion, and the second special entrance ball portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to the game D-15, which is configured.

According to the means D-16, the takeover effect and the behavior of the game ball in the specific area entering means can be continued more smoothly.

Means D-17. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
A brightness adjusting means capable of adjusting the brightness of the game area based on the operation of the operating means,
By adjusting the brightness adjusting means, the brightness (visibility) of the passage of the game ball of the specific area entering means can be changed, and the means D-1 to D-16 are provided. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the means D-17, the demand of the player who wants to more clearly see the behavior of the game ball of the specific area entering means, the player who does not want to be distracted by the behavior of the game ball of the specific area entering means, etc. It is possible to adopt a display mode in line with.

E (participation of the player's operation in a game area accessory). There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. Variable display is performed for this purpose (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in the pachinko machine provided with the variable display means, many players proceed with the game just by continuing to look at the variable display means. For this reason, there is a concern that the user will get bored sooner, and in the first place, the game of continuing to look at the variable display means is becoming rude.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

Means PE-1. Electric drive effect means capable of executing an electric drive effect using an electric drive accessory operated by an electric drive means, and a mobile type effect using a movable accessory effectable based on mechanical energy At least one of movable type effect production means capable of executing the effect production,
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
A game machine comprising: an interlocking device capable of changing a mode of the electric drive accessory or the movable accessory based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the means PE-1, by the electric driving effect using the electric driving accessory or the moving accessory, or by the moving accessory effect, the effect different from the effect display by the display device is enjoyed. You can get it done. Further, the electric drive effect or the mobile accessory effect is merely an effect, and the behavior of the electric drive effect object or the mobile accessory can be freely set. Here, the analog-type effect that is not a display is an effect that the player's power is easy to enter originally, but in this means, the operation of the player is further reflected in the analog effect. Therefore, the electric drive effect or the mobile accessory effect can be made more interesting. In addition, the operation of the operation means may cause appropriate stress dissipation, and it may be possible to consolidate points at which the player applies external force to the game machine. Furthermore, it is already determined whether or not the electric drive effect for giving a predetermined suggestion or instruction or the mobile accessory effect can make the mobile accessory effect succeed, and there is an undesired instruction for the player. If it is performed, it is impossible to succeed in the electric drive effect or the mobile accessory effect, but if the desired instruction is given to the player, the electric drive effect or the mobile role effect is performed. It is possible to make the production successful. In other words, there are cases where the player's technology can succeed in the electric drive effect or the mobile accessory effect, and in that case, the feeling of uplifting and satisfaction is greater than that of other effects. ..

Means PE-2. The gaming machine according to means PE-1, wherein the interlocking means is configured to be capable of physically contacting the electric driving accessory or the movable accessory.

According to the means PE-2, it is possible to enjoy the novel effect that the interlocking means actually changes the behavior of the electrically driven accessory or the mobile accessory, so that the interest can be improved. it can.

Means PE-3. The electric drive accessory or the movable accessory that can be interlocked with the operation of the operating means by the interlocking means is provided so as to be visible to the player at a position where the player cannot contact it. Characteristic Means PE-1 or PE-2 gaming machine.

According to the means PE-3, the movable accessory (electrically driven accessory, movable accessory) which cannot be directly touched by the player, and which has not conventionally operated in conjunction with the operation of the player, It is possible to surely enjoy new productions that can be linked to the operation of the player. In other words, it is possible to clear the conventional thought that it is right there but it is frustrating to touch.

Hereinafter, as the means E, a configuration in which the electric drive effect producing means described in the means PE-1 and the mobile type effect producing means are embodied as the mobile type effect producing means will be listed. It is also possible to appropriately change (replace) the "movable accessory effect producing means" described in "Electrical driving effect producing means or mobile type effect producing means", and eventually to "electric drive effect producing means". It is possible.

Means E-1. A mobile role that can derive a mobile role effect that uses a mobile role that is an object that can be derived to a position visible from the player side and that gives a certain suggestion or teaching according to the behavior of the mobile role. Equipped with means for producing things,
The mobile accessory production means is provided with a mobile accessory moving region in which the mobile accessory is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy,
In the mobile accessory production, at least a part of the mobile accessory moving from the start point to the end point of the mobile accessory moving area is visually recognized,
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine, comprising: interlocking means capable of causing a change in a moving mode of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory moving area based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the means E-1, it is possible to enjoy the effect different from the effect display by the display device by the movable effect effect using the movable effect. In other words, it is possible to incorporate an operation different from the routine in the normal game, and the reaction operation of the three-dimensional mobile type accessory which is rare in appearance is derived, so that the interest can be improved. ..

In addition, in general, the advantage in advancing the game (the number of game values given to the player, etc.) differs depending on the behavior of the game ball (which ball entering means), In order to make it easy to discriminate that the game is being performed fairly, it is impossible to arbitrarily apply an external force to the game ball after it has been launched by the launching means.

In this respect, the mobile accessory production is merely an production, and the behavior of the mobile accessory can be freely set. Furthermore, the movement mode of the mobile accessory moving in the mobile accessory moving area can be changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player. Therefore, it is possible to derive an effect in which the player participates in the effect more actively, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of boredom. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability and the playability, and thus to improve the entertainment.

In addition, although the analog-type effect is originally an effect in which the player's power is easy to enter, in the present means, the operation of the player is further reflected in the analog effect. Therefore, the mobile accessory production can be made more interesting. In addition, the operation of the operation means may cause appropriate stress dissipation, and it may be possible to consolidate points at which the player applies external force to the game machine. Furthermore, the mobile character effect that gives a predetermined suggestion or instruction has already been determined as to whether or not the mobile character effect can be successfully achieved, and the mobile character effect is given when an instruction that is undesirable to the player is performed. Although it is impossible to make the character effect successful, the mobile character effect can be made successful when the instruction desirable for the player is given. In other words, there are cases where the player's technique can succeed in the mobile accessory production, and in that case, the feeling of uplifting and satisfaction are so large that they cannot be compared with other productions.

There is no particular limitation on what is taught or suggested by the mobile character effect, and for example, the mobile character effect and the result of the predetermined lottery are associated with each other to determine the predetermined lottery. It may be possible to teach or suggest the result of the above, or a predetermined bonus (options that can be used in mobile linked games (display objects such as characters) will increase depending on the result of the mobile accessory production, and it is difficult to derive. May be given (instructed or suggested). That is, the mobile accessory production is performed as a part of the production for teaching or suggesting the result of the predetermined lottery, and in the state where the production is not performed, the mobile accessory production is not performed. Good. In this case, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot enjoy the mobile accessory production even though the predetermined lottery performed by advancing the game is not performed, and the game is not progressed.

Means E-2. The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the interlocking device can cause a change in a moving mode of the mobile accessory during movement in the mobile accessory moving area.

According to the means E-2, the influence of the operation of the operation means on the behavior of the mobile accessory can be made large and easy to understand, and it is further realized that the operation of the player is reflected in the effect. You can Furthermore, it is possible to secure a period as long as possible in which the behavior of the mobile accessory changes according to the operation of the operation means. Therefore, the operation effect is further enhanced by suppressing the monotonous feeling of the game by the mobile accessory production.

Means E-3. There are multiple types of the mobile accessory,
The interlocking means differs depending on the type of the mobile accessory from the moving mode of the mobile accessory moving in the mobile accessory moving area based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine according to the means E-1 or E-2, which is capable of causing a change.

According to the means E-3, for example, when the operation means is operated during the movement of the mobile accessory of A, a propulsive force for displacing the mobile accessory to the downstream side is applied, and When the operation means is operated during the movement of the mobile accessory, it is possible to apply a force for suppressing the displacement of the mobile accessory to the downstream side. In this way, by correlating the type of the mobile auditors with the pattern of the operation of the interlocking means, not only the appearance of the mobile auditors (they may have the same appearance) but also the behavior can be changed. The development of each mobile accessory production can be varied. Therefore, the action and effect of improving the interest by the mobile accessory production are further exhibited.

It should be noted that the type of the mobile accessory and the operation pattern of the interlocking means based on the operation of the operation means do not have to be in one-to-one correspondence, and the operation pattern is configured to be selected from a plurality of types. May be. It is also possible to incorporate the RFID tag in the mobile accessory, read the information of the RFID tag by the reading means, and drive the interlocking means based on the type information and the position information. It should be noted that it is also possible to prepare a movable mobile accessory made of resin and a movable mobile accessory made of metal so that the operations are substantially different.

Means E-4. There are multiple types of the mobile accessory productions,
The interlocking means, based on the operation of the operating means, with respect to the moving aspect of the mobile auditors moving in the mobile auditors moving area, according to the type of the mobile auditors effect, The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-3, which is capable of causing different changes.

According to the means E-4, it is possible to make the movable type effect production various. Therefore, the action and effect of improving the interest by the mobile accessory production are further exhibited.

Means E-5. Display means capable of deriving a mobile accessory display corresponding to the mobile accessory,
An end point of the movable accessory moving region, or an end point detection means for detecting the mobile accessory located in the vicinity thereof,
In the display means, it is possible to derive an accessory behavior takeover effect for performing the mobile accessory display by taking over the behavior of the mobile accessory that has reached the end point of the mobile accessory moving area,
In the role object behavior succession effect, it is configured to be able to reflect a change in the moving mode of the movable role object by the interlocking means, the game according to any one of means E-1 to E-4. Machine.

According to the means E-5, it is possible to derive an effect which is difficult in the analog effect (for example, an effect such that the mobile accessory flows backward in the game area) by the effect behavior takeover effect of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effect while suppressing the monotonous feeling while making use of the mobile accessory effect. Further, since the degree of the influence of the interlocking means on the mobile character effect is properly reflected in the character effect handing over effect, it is possible to more appropriately connect the mobile character effect effect and the character effect handing over effect. It is possible to derive more interesting productions. In particular, in the mobile accessory production, since the movement mode of the mobile accessory may change due to the interlocking means, the effect obtained by responding to the change in the accessory behavior handover production becomes more remarkable. Played.

Means E-6. A display means capable of deriving a mobile accessory display corresponding to the mobile accessory;
The mobile accessory production means is configured to be able to derive the mobile accessory production by taking over the behavior of the mobile accessory display,
The game according to any one of the means E-1 to E-5, characterized in that the mobile accessory production is configured to be able to reflect a change in the mode of the mobile accessory display on the display means. Machine.

According to the means E-6, the connection between the mobile accessory display on the display means and the mobile accessory effect by the mobile accessory effecting means can be more improved, and the performance can be improved. You can As an example of an aspect, in the first mobile type effect production, two mobile type characters were moved, but in the mobile type character display, a display in which the mobile type character is decremented by 1 is performed, and thereafter, In the second mobile accessory production, there is only one mobile accessory.

Means E-7. A teaching effect for teaching or suggesting predetermined information is configured by the movable accessory effect using the movable accessory and the movable accessory display on the display means,
The period of the teaching effect is predetermined,
A means E-5, characterized in that the ratio of the movable accessory effect and the display of the movable accessory can be changed by changing the movement mode of the movable accessory by the interlocking means. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to E-6.

According to the means E-7, the variation in the time of the mobile accessory production can be eliminated by the time adjustment of the display of the mobile accessory, and the teaching production can be performed in a predetermined period.

Means E-8. Any one of the means E-1 to E-7 characterized in that it is configured to be capable of changing its state between an interlocking state in which the interlocking means operates and a non-interlocking state in which the interlocking means does not operate based on an operation of the operation means. The game machine described.

According to the means E-8, the game can be sharpened.

Means E-9. Main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether to give a special game state advantageous to the player,
A variable display means for performing variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the win/win lottery,
The game according to the means E-8, wherein the interlocking state is possible during the variable display of the identification information and before a predetermined time elapses from the end of the variable display of the identification information. Machine.

According to the means E-9, for example, the player can enjoy the pseudo ball effect using the operation means, the interlocking means, and the movable accessory at any time, and thus, a normal game that is advanced mainly in the win/loss lottery is performed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who occupies the gaming machine occurs without it and a player who wants to play the game cannot play the game. The interlocking state may occur only during the variable display of the identification information.

Means E-10. Production display means that can derive production display,
And a production operation means capable of changing the display on the production display means based on an operation by a player,
The game machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-9, characterized in that the operation means is constituted by the effect operation means.

According to the means E-10, by making the operating means used for production and the like common and reducing the number as much as possible (for example, one), it is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration on the front side of the gaming machine and to operate the operating means. It is possible to reduce the hurdle of participation in the production using, and make the production easy to understand and familiar. Therefore, more players can enjoy the effect of using the operating means, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress that may occur when a complicated operation is required to make a quick judgment.

It should be noted that "the operation surface to which the effect operation means is attached is not provided with any other operation means that can be operated by the player (the operation means other than the effect operation means is the attached surface). It must be attached to a surface different from the surface)." In this case, the other operating means is unintentionally operated by the hand operating the effect operating means, and unintended behavior based on the operation to the other operating means occurs or the other operating means is damaged. It is possible to avoid situations such as increased risk. In particular, in a configuration in which the movement mode of the movable accessory changes based on the operation of the effect operation means, it is considered that more force may be applied by the operation of the effect operation means, so the above-described effect is more remarkably achieved. To be done. In addition, it becomes easy to take measures for reinforcement, and damage risk and cost can be suppressed.

Means E-11. The attached portion to which the operation means is attached is a member different from the member to which the movable accessory production means is attached, and a shock absorbing cushion is provided between the attached portion and other members. The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-10, characterized in that means are provided.

According to the means E-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the impact when the operation means is operated reaches the mobile accessory production means and the mobile accessory causes an unintended behavior. Further, in a configuration in which vibration detection means for detecting the vibration of the mobile accessory production means is provided and an error state is generated based on the detection of the vibration detection means, the operation of the operation means and the mobile accessory production means Can be distinguished as much as possible from the case where is vibrated by other methods.

In addition, as the operation direction of the effect operation means, in order to suppress the force (impact) caused by the operation from acting on the main body of the gaming machine (control board, etc.), the vertical direction and the horizontal direction include as much as possible and the front-back direction. It is desirable to prevent it.

Means E-12. It is provided with a visible state changing means for changing the state between a blind state where a part of the movable accessory moving region is difficult to see or a blind state where it is invisible and an exposed state where it is visible. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-11.

According to the means E-12, it is possible to enhance the effect of the mobile accessory effect and diversify it. Furthermore, for example, when the mobile accessory production is unintentionally unfolded, it is possible to set the visual recognition state changing means to be in a blindfolded state and perform recovery or situation explanation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance from the desired development of the mobile accessory production from becoming too large, which makes recovery difficult and causes trouble. In particular, when a predetermined (for example, end) timing of the mobile auditors effect is matched with a predetermined timing of another member, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited. When the visual recognition state changing means is in the blinded state, the interlocking means may not operate based on the operation of the operating means.

Means E-13. Means comprising an excluding means for excluding the mobile accessory from the mobile accessory moving area when the stay of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory moving area is detected. The gaming machine according to any one of E-1 to E-12.

According to the means E-13, the clogging of the mobile accessory can be cleared. Further, even when the progress of the mobile accessory in the mobile accessory production is too slow, the mobile accessory can be positively discharged from the mobile accessory moving area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap from the desired development of the mobile accessory production from becoming too large, and to eliminate the retention (clog) of the mobile accessory production. In particular, when a predetermined (for example, end) timing of the mobile auditors effect is matched with a predetermined timing of another member, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited.

The interlocking device may be used as the excluding device, and, for example, the floor of the movable accessory moving region is removed (by configuring the floor of the movable accessory moving region by a shutter and opening the shutter). , The mobile accessory existing in the mobile accessory moving area is discharged to the outside).

Means E-14. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-13, which is configured to be capable of generating a state in which the movable accessory is visible inside the operation means.

According to the means E-14, regarding the act of operating the operating means, the operator can be interested in a novel change in the appearance of the operating means itself, and the change in appearance is associated with the occurrence expectation degree of a predetermined state. By performing, it is possible to improve the performance. In addition, since the mobile accessory appears in the operation means touched by the player, it is possible to make the player feel the mobile accessory (movable accessory production) more closely, and to create the mobile accessory production. You can raise interest. For example, when a special game state that is advantageous to a player occurs, a mobile accessory appears inside the operating means (a mobile accessory that flows in, a mobile accessory that was previously installed with the blindfold removed). (Dummy that is not actually used) may be exposed). In this case, it is possible to enjoy a new effect of relatively quietly grasping the occurrence of the special game state in a portion of the gaming machine that is familiar to the player. Further, the type of the special game state may be taught or suggested by the type of the mobile type accessory visually recognized inside the operation means. Furthermore, when the mobile accessory is switched to a state where it is visually recognized inside the operating means, a predetermined vibration (vibration due to the mobile accessory flowing into the operating means or a dedicated vibration) Means may be provided so that such a vibrating means vibrates) or voice or the like is derived.

It should be noted that even if the movable accessory is in a visible state in a specific manner inside the operating means and the success of the mobile accessory effect is associated (one of success patterns). Good. In this case, it is possible to look forward to the fact that the mobile accessory is led out in the player's hand, and when it is led out, it is much more enjoyable to operate the operating means. .. By the way, the success of the mobile accessory production may cause a special game state advantageous to the player, or may increase the degree of expectation of occurrence of the special game state. Further, it is desirable to provide it at a position outside the gaming machine, or at a position as far as possible outside the mounting surface on which the operating means is attached, rather than at the back of the operating means. However, a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the mobile accessory collides with the operation means when the operation means is operated (the operating portion of the operation means does not come into contact with the mobile accessory when the operation means is operated, In addition, the portion where the mobile accessory is installed and the mobile accessory are fixed so as not to be displaced relative to each other, and the mobile accessory is not displaced even when the operating means is operated, or the operating means It is desirable that the operating part of the operating means and the movable accessory be similarly displaced when the is operated.

It should be noted that it is desirable that the mobile accessory that appears inside the operating means be a real mobile accessory used in the mobile accessory production (the mobile accessory can be displaced to the inside of the operating means). , A mobile accessory that is the same as the real thing is prepared only for showing inside the operation means, a smaller size than the original is prepared, and a display means is built in to display the mobile accessory. Alternatively, a member on which a movable accessory is printed may be prepared so as to achieve an effect similar to that of the present means. Further, in the case where an effect that makes the movable accessory visible is derived inside the operation means, the operation of the operation means may be restricted until it is in a visible state, It does not have to be regulated.

In addition, the configuration in which the movable accessory is visible inside the operating means of the present means may be embodied in a gaming machine that does not include the interlocking means. Furthermore, for example, it is also possible to apply to a configuration in which an object that is a motif of a gaming machine changes its state between a state in which it is visible inside the operating means and a state in which it is invisible.

Means E-15. An effective operation effective period is provided as a period for interlocking the interlocking device based on the operation of the operating device,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-14, characterized in that period teaching means for teaching that the operation is valid is provided.

According to the means E-15, by setting the operation effective period, it is possible to prevent problems such as the mobile character effect being delayed and the game not proceeding. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation valid period has passed without knowing and the operation in the mobile accessory production cannot be performed.

Means E-16. The movable accessory located at the starting point of the movable accessory moving area is displaced to the side of the connection passage which is a portion connecting the start point and the end point in the movable accessory moving area. Is provided with a starting aid for
The game machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-15, wherein the interlocking means can cause a change in the operation of the start-up assisting means.

According to the means E-16, the player can perform the hand-over effect more closely (with (re)starting the pseudo-ball effect) with expectation.

Means E-17. The operation means is provided with an operation measuring means capable of measuring a strength at which the operation means is operated, or a displacement speed of the operated operation means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-16, wherein the operation pattern of the interlocking means is changed based on the measurement result of the operation measuring means.

According to the means E-17, even if the interlocking means is not directly operated, the interlocking means operates in a manner similar to the operated feeling, so that the operation of the operating means can provide an interesting effect. it can. Further, it is possible to grasp the condition of the operation to the operating means by the operation measuring means, and to prevent damage to the operating means, for example, when the operating means is smashed, the succession effect is not worked well. It is also possible to take measures. Examples of the operation measuring means include a pressure gauge capable of contacting a portion of the operating means inside the gaming machine that is not touched by the player, a speed sensor capable of detecting a passing speed, and the like.

Means E-18. In a configuration in which the winning probability of winning a predetermined lottery can be set by selecting one from multiple stages,
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-17, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of suggesting or teaching the setting of the winning probability by the mobile auditors product effect.

According to the means E-18, it is possible to grasp the mobile accessory production as an opportunity to detect the winning probability, and to add more fun and excitement. In particular, by changing the moving mode of the mobile accessory by the interlocking means, if the possibility of suggesting or teaching the setting of the winning probability increases, the interlocking means can be made more interesting. As a suggestion or instruction for setting the winning probability, regarding the pattern of the change of the movement mode of the mobile auditors, if the specific pattern is derived, the setting of the specific winning probability is sure (specific It may not be derived if a setting other than the winning probability has been made), or a specific winning probability may have been set if a specific pattern has been derived (a setting other than the specific winning probability has been made). It can be higher than when you are there.

Means E-19. Means E-1 comprising a plurality of the mobile accessory, wherein the specific mobile accessory is provided with a mark which is visible when the mobile accessory is viewed from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine according to any one of B-18.

According to the means E-19, a predetermined suggestion can be made based on the visual recognition mode (presence or absence of a mark, type, etc.) of the mobile accessory. If the mark is not visible even when the mobile accessory is viewed from a direction other than the predetermined direction, the marked mobile accessory is led to a position visible from the front of the gaming machine. Even if the confirmation of the mark is impossible (for example, there is a mark on the back side of the mobile accessory as viewed from the player, or the mobile accessory is moving at a high speed and cannot be confirmed well), When a mobile accessory of a type that may be marked is derived, a new enjoyment of confirming the mark can be added.

In particular, as described above, since the movement of the mobile accessory moving in the mobile accessory moving area can be officially changed by the interlocking means by the operation of the operation means of the player, the operation of the operation means is used to change the mark. You can add more interesting effects such as finding.

In addition, "the movable accessory is led to the movable accessory moving area in a posture in which the mark does not face the front of the game machine, and the movable type is moved by the interlocking device so that the mark faces the front of the game machine. It is also possible to change the orientation of the character.” In this case, the mark becomes visible due to the behavior of the mobile accessory moving in the mobile accessory moving area, or the mark becomes visible based on the operation of the operation means by the player. The behavior of the character or the operation of the operation means can surely make the person interested.

Means E-20. The interlocking means is provided in the movable accessory moving area or adjacent to the movable accessory moving area,
A configuration in which the movable accessory moving region and the front of the interlocking device are covered by a blocking device having transparency.
The game according to any one of the means E-1 to E-19, characterized in that the front of the interlocking means is provided with an approach operation detecting means for detecting an object that is in contact with or close to the closing means. Machine.

According to the means E-20, the interlocking means can be operated intuitively. For this reason, it becomes easy to match the timing, and when a plurality of interlocking means are provided, it becomes easy to understand the operation method.

In addition, even if the contact with the closing means is strong, the closing means has a two-layer structure, and at least one of them is arranged in the front-rear direction so that the impact does not easily affect the moving accessories that move in the moving area of the moving accessory. Alternatively, a cushioning material for gently regulating the displacement of the closing means may be added (a rubber material is fitted to the outer periphery of the plate-like closing means).

Means E-21. Equipped with effect display means for effect display,
The movable role moving area and the effect display unit have a first relative arrangement in which the movable role moving area is located in front of the effect display unit, and the movable role moving area displays the effect. 21. The gaming machine according to any one of the means E-1 to E-20, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be relatively displaceable in a second relative arrangement that is located outside the front of the means.

According to the means E-21, the mobile accessory effect can be more excited at a position where it is easier to visually recognize it, and with the support of the effect display means. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the movable role moving area interferes with the visibility in a state where the effect display of the effect display means is visually recognized without using the movable role. As the operation of the movable type accessory moving area and the effect display means, for example, a pair of left and right movable type effect article moving areas can be slid in the left and right direction, and the effect display means can be moved in the front-back direction. In the first relative arrangement, the pair of left and right movable accessory movement regions abut or come close to each other, and in the second relative arrangement, the pair of left and right movable officers are separated from each other left and right, An example of such a configuration is that the effect display means is displaced forward and positioned in a space vacated therebetween.

With regard to the means E-1 to E-20, the movable accessory moving area and the effect display means may be arranged only in the first relative arrangement or only in the second relative arrangement. In the case of the first relative arrangement, the effect display unit can display a background, a character that works with the movable accessory, an operation content of the operation unit, an explanation of the operation timing, and the like.

Means E-22. Any one of the means E-1 to E-21 characterized in that it comprises a sensation means capable of displacing a member operable by a player in accordance with the behavior of the movable accessory of the movable accessory effect. A game machine described in Crab.

According to the means E-22, the mobile character effect production can be felt closer and the mobile character effect production can be further enjoyed.

Means E-23. In the movable type effect production, means for forcibly ending the operation effect performed by using the operation means and the interlocking means (forced end effect) is configured. The gaming machine described in E-1 to E-22.

According to the means E-23, the operation performance is prolonged and the mobile type effect production is not ended, but the performance is deteriorated and the game is adversely affected (especially, the derivation of a display assisting the game method or the like). It is possible to prevent an adverse effect).

F (continue production even if trouble occurs in the configuration related to production). There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. Variable display is performed for this purpose (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, if the production means for performing the production fails, the production performance is greatly deteriorated, which may cause a decrease in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest due to a problem in the rendering means.

Means F-1. A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining whether to give a special game state advantageous to the player,
And a production means capable of deriving a production capable of teaching or suggesting the result of the win/win lottery,
A grasping means for grasping an abnormal portion showing a behavior different from a normal behavior in the production of the production means,
A gaming machine comprising: an alternate effect means capable of deriving an alternative effect in place of the effect in charge of the abnormal place.

According to the means F-1, when a predetermined trouble occurs such that a normal behavior is not derived at a predetermined location of the rendering means, an alternative live performance instead of the performance at the predetermined location of the performance means is performed to compensate for the performance. be able to. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the production in which the derivation period (time) is predetermined, from being interrupted or the power of the production from decreasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest and the like when a failure occurs in the rendering means. Further, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game machine is stopped due to a failure of the rendering means.

The alternative presentation may be configured to be derivable not only when the abnormal portion is grasped by the grasping means, but also in a normal state where the abnormal portion is not grasped. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the alternative effect is a special effect when a trouble occurs, is not derived in the normal state, and the mode thereof is not fully utilized. Further, as the rendering means, a display means, an electric drive rendering means, a mobile accessory rendering means, a light emitting means and the like can be mentioned.

Means F-2. A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining whether to give a special game state advantageous to the player,
And a special display means for performing variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning/disapproving lottery,
It is possible to start in response to the start of the variable display of the identification information, and comprises a production means capable of deriving a variation corresponding effect that can be ended in response to the end of the variable display of the identification information,
A grasping means for grasping an abnormal portion which is a portion related to the variation-responsive production in the production means and which exhibits a behavior different from the normal behavior, in the variation-responsive production,
A gaming machine comprising: an alternate effect means capable of deriving an alternative effect in place of the effect in charge of the abnormal place.

According to the means F-2, when a predetermined trouble occurs such that a normal behavior is not derived at a predetermined location of the production means, an alternative production is performed instead of the production at the predetermined location of the production means, and the special display means is identified. It is possible to continue (complete) the variation response effect that is performed in response to the variable display of information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the change-adaptive effect from being interrupted or the dynamic force of the change-accepting effect from decreasing.

In other words, even if trouble occurs in the rendering means, the result of the winning/winning lottery does not change, and in addition to the rendering means, special display means for teaching the result of the winning/winning lottery is also provided. There is no need to interrupt the game just to be interrupted. However, if the variation response effect is interrupted, it is feared that the player will be greatly confused. In particular, in the case where a large number of directing means for directing are provided in order to improve the directivity and, by extension, the entertainment, the risk of failure of the directing means is increased, and depending on the directing means that fails, the directing performance is greatly reduced. However, there is concern that it may cause a decline in interest.

In this respect, by making it possible to derive the alternative effect, the variation response effect is not interrupted, and the game can be proceeded with peace of mind. Furthermore, for example, in a situation where the effect is produced by two effect means, if one effect means fails, there is a concern that the force of the effect may be reduced or a sense of discomfort may occur. Such a concern can be suppressed by performing the effect that the effect means of one effect means covers as much as possible, or by adding (substituting) the effect by another effect means. it can. As a result, it is possible to perform a relatively large-scale production by providing a plurality of effecting means and to improve the interest, while suppressing a decrease in the interest and the like when a failure occurs in the effecting means.

Means F-3. The production means includes an instep production means for performing instep production and an instep production means provided adjacent to the instep production means for performing an instep production.
When the grasping unit grasps that one of the instep producing unit and the second producing unit has the abnormal portion, the other one of the first producing unit and the second producing unit performs the substitution. The game machine according to the means F-1 or 2, characterized in that the effect is started.

According to the means F-3, it is possible to connect the alternative effects with a relatively uncomfortable feeling, and it is possible to proceed with the variation response effect without significantly disrupting the flow. Further, by providing a plurality of rendering means, the risk of failure may be increased, but the risk of failure of all and rendering cannot be performed can be reduced.

It should be noted that the instep production means and the second production means mean the production means adjacent to each other. For example, when the production means is composed of three or more production means, the production means adjacent to each other. Can be the relationship between the instep production means and the second production means.

Means F-4. One of the instep production means and the second production means is an electrical drive production means capable of executing an electrical drive production using an electrical drive accessory operated by an electrical drive means, or a mechanical drive production means. It is configured by a mobile accessory production means capable of executing a mobile accessory production that uses a mobile accessory that is movable based on energy,
The other of the instep production means and the second party production means is constituted by a display means,
The gaming machine according to means F-3, wherein when it is determined that the one of the abnormal locations is present, a display imitating the one of the other is derived.

According to the means F-4, when trouble occurs in the electric drive effect production means or the mobile type effect effect production means, which has a relatively high possibility of failure as compared with the display means, the display close to the trouble occurs in the display means. Can be derived to entertain the player. For example, a movable accessory may be provided adjacent to the liquid crystal display device, and when trouble occurs in the movable accessory, the movable accessory may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Means F-5. An abnormal point storage means for storing the abnormal point grasped by the grasping means;
(In the case of the means F-2; the variation response effect, and) In the case of creating the alternative effect, the abnormal part storage means is referred to, and means F-1 to F-4. A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the means F-5, it is possible to simply grasp the abnormal portion after the abnormal portion is once grasped. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which after creating a variation response effect or an alternative effect, a predetermined effect means cannot be used, and a variation response effect or an alternative effect is recreated (excluding an abnormal point) (abnormal point). Can be avoided except at the first grasp of).

In the meantime, for example, in the above-mentioned means F-3, if a trouble occurs in the second direction means if there is a second direction means adjacent to the second direction means, one of the instep direction means and the second direction means It is also possible to determine whether or not a trouble has occurred, and if it is determined that a trouble has occurred, the alternative effect may be started by the other one of the instep effecting means and the trick effect means. Further, when a trouble occurs in the instep production means, it is determined whether or not the trouble occurs in the second production means, and when it is determined that the trouble occurs, the substitute production is performed in the second production means. May be started.

Means F-6. In the state in which the information indicating the abnormal place is stored in the abnormal place storage means, it is possible to try the effect at the abnormal place in the variation response effect (the effect using the effecting means as the means F-1). In the case where normal behavior is exhibited with respect to the attempted performance (when the grasping means does not recognize the abnormal location), the corresponding information in the abnormal location storing means is deleted. The gaming machine according to the feature F-5.

According to the means F-6, when the temporary trouble is naturally resolved, it can be automatically restored, and the abnormal portion of the effect means can be effectively utilized at an early stage, and the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed is also provided. It is possible to reduce annoying the hands of persons concerned.

Means F-7. The gaming machine according to any one of the means F-1 to F-6, further comprising an error notifying means for notifying that the abnormal portion is grasped by the grasping means.

According to the means F-7, it is possible to notify that a trouble has occurred in the rendering means, and it is possible to obtain a clue for maintenance and the like. It should be noted that the error notification means may be configured to be able to notify the abnormal portion of the effecting means to the gaming hall side where the gaming machine is installed. In this case, check the relevant game machine to see if it is in a favorable situation for the player side or the game hall side. It is possible to take various measures relatively smoothly, such as confirming whether the game hall side can respond or requesting the game machine manufacturer for repair. In addition, examples of the notification to the gaming hall include notification to a hall computer that manages the gaming hall, notification to an external device provided in a place where the gaming machine is installed, notification in the gaming machine, and the like.

Means F-8. The error notification means is configured to notify the player of the abnormal portion of the effect means,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to means F-7, wherein the mode of the error notification means can be changed from a notification mode to a non-report mode by operating the operation means.

According to the means F-8, the player is made aware that the trouble has occurred in the production means, and if that is all right, the notification of the error notification means is turned off and the game is advanced. You can get it. In addition, as a notification to the player, a light emitting means for specifying an abnormal portion of the effecting means, which displays the information in a part of the display means (in the form of telop), is provided (a plurality of light emitting means are combined in one place). (Providing or providing a light emitting means at each part of the production means), and causing the corresponding light emitting means to emit light. Further, the timing of the notification may be performed after the variation response effect in which the abnormal portion is grasped by the grasping means, or may be performed from the time when the abnormal portion is grasped by the grasping means. Alternatively, it may be performed after the variable display of the identification information on the special display means (corresponding to the means F-2) is not performed.

In addition, in response to the means F-5 (according to the means F-2), "when the variation display of the identification information on the special display means is not performed for a specific time, or the power of the gaming machine is off. When the state is changed to the on state and the information indicating the abnormal place is stored in the abnormal place storing means, the error notifying means may be in the notifying mode”. In this case, even when a player who does not know that a trouble occurs in the rendering means plays a game, it is possible to properly inform that the trouble occurs in the rendering means.

Means F-9. The notification by the error notifying unit is performed at least after the variation response effect (the effect using the effect unit as the unit F-1) in which the abnormal portion is recognized by the grasping unit. The game machine according to F-7 or F-8.

According to the means F-9, for example, even if the grasping means grasps the abnormal portion in the latter half of the variation response effect, and even if the variation response effect is somehow raised by the alternative effect, the notification is annoying and ruined. It is possible to avoid such a situation as to end up.

Means F-10. The rendering means is an electrical driving rendering means capable of executing an electrical driving rendering using an electrical driving accessory operated by the electrical driving means, and a mobile accessory capable of moving based on mechanical energy. Equipped with at least one of mobile type effect production means capable of executing a mobile type effect production using
Any one of the means F-1 to F-9, characterized in that the electric drive effect producing means and the movable type effect producing means are provided with a lock means capable of being locked with respect to themselves. The game machine described.

According to the means F-10, when a trouble occurs in the electric drive effect producing means or the movable type effect producing means, it is possible to avoid a situation such as hindering the visual recognition mode of another effect producing means. In addition, by forcibly locking the electric drive effect production means and the mobile accessory effect production means with a member that was not provided in the game machine at the beginning, the appearance may deteriorate and the player may feel uneasy or distrustful. It is possible to avoid such a situation. It should be noted that, while the power of the game machine is turned on, only the displacing function of the electric drive effect production means or the mobile accessory production means is turned off (installed in the electric drive production means or the mobile accessory production means). The light emitting means may be configured to emit light appropriately. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the state of being locked by the locking means.

Means F-11. 11. The game machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-10, characterized in that the effect means is configured to be changeable in shape, and another effect means can be arranged in front of the abnormal portion. ..

According to the means F-11, it is possible to make the abnormal portion inconspicuous and reduce the distraction of the abnormal portion.

G (suppresses deviation of production). There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, the game ball shot by the launching means can enter the various ball entering means provided on the game board. For example, when the player enters the start-up entering means out of the entering means, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the win/win lottery is taught on the variable display means. Variable display is performed for this purpose (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, there are many players who attach great importance to the production means for performing the production such as the variable display means, and it is feared that derivation of an uncomfortable sense of discomfort in the production means may lead to a decrease in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest due to a problem in the rendering means.

Means PG-1. Equipped with effect means for executing the corresponding effect corresponding to the effect content determined based on the predetermined lottery,
In the middle of the corresponding effect, it is provided with a grasping unit that grasps whether or not the corresponding effect deviates from the effect content determined by the predetermined lottery,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the remaining corresponding effects can be changed based on the information grasped by the grasping means.

According to the means PG-1, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the predetermined effect contents and the corresponding effect that is actually being performed. Therefore, in the corresponding performance, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects such as the effect being interrupted, ending too early, and ending too late, and the contents of the effect determined by a predetermined lottery, that is, the corresponding effect should be taught. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the matter and the corresponding presentation do not correspond to each other. In particular, it is possible to understand whether or not such a deviation has occurred during the course of the response production, so even if you try to adjust the book edge at the end of the response production, the deviation is too large and recovery is impossible at all. It is possible to avoid such a situation as As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which there is a great deal of discomfort in the corresponding performance due to a malfunction of the rendering means, which causes a decline in interest.

Means PG-2. The gaming machine according to means PG-1, further comprising: a check item storage unit that stores check items for a corresponding effect at a stage when the shift by the grasping unit is grasped.

According to the means PG-2, it is possible to surely check the correspondence effect during the correspondence effect (check point).

Hereinafter, as the means G, the configurations of the grasping means and the like for grasping the deviation by the grasping means of the means PG-1 and the configuration in which the remaining time grasping means grasps the time difference will be listed. It is also possible to appropriately change (replace) the configuration relating to the “remaining time grasping means” described in the following means G to the configuration relating to the “grasping means”. For example, "the effecting means is configured to be able to execute a period corresponding effect corresponding to an effect period determined by a predetermined lottery as the corresponding effect, and the grasping means is configured to perform the effect after the effect period is started. It also comprises a remaining time grasping means capable of grasping the remaining time until the end of the period, and based on the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means, it is possible to change the period corresponding effect'' Good.

Means G-1. Equipped with a production means for executing a period corresponding production corresponding to a production period determined based on a predetermined lottery,
The remaining time grasping means capable of grasping the remaining time from the start of the effect period to the end of the effect period,
A gaming machine, characterized in that it is configured to be able to change the period corresponding effect based on the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means.

According to the means G-1, by making it possible to change the period corresponding effect based on the remaining time until the end of the predetermined effect period, the end timing of the predetermined effect period and the actual effect are performed. It is possible to eliminate as much as possible the deviation from the end timing of the production corresponding to the period. Therefore, the period corresponding effect performed corresponding to the effect period is interrupted, there is too much space between the effect performed following the period corresponding effect, or the interval is too close, and in some cases, the effect periods overlap. It is possible to avoid such a situation. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a sense of inconvenience is caused due to a malfunction of the rendering means, which causes a decline in interest.

Means G-2. The gaming machine according to the means G-1, wherein a plurality of the effecting means are provided, and the effect corresponding to the period is performed by connecting effects by the plurality of effecting means.

According to the means G-2, for example, one of the pair of rendering means prepares while the other performs rendering, and the other prepares while the other renders (the preparation time is Can earn). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a problem occurs in the period-corresponding effect because the preparation for the effect by the effecting means is not in time (the cause of the deviation is reduced). Furthermore, when there is a possibility that a time lag will occur in the rendering means, by using a plurality of rendering means, it is possible to minimize the deviation of each rendering means and to recover (to minimize the deviation, Alternatively, (erasing) can be performed by a rendering unit that subsequently performs rendering. Also, as the period-corresponding effect, it is possible to perform a magnificent effect using a plurality of effecting means, so that it is possible to improve the effect.

Means G-3. The rendering means is an electrical driving rendering means capable of executing an electrical driving rendering using an electrical driving accessory operated by the electrical driving means, and a mobile accessory capable of moving based on mechanical energy. Equipped with at least one of mobile type effect production means capable of executing a mobile type effect production using
On the basis of the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means, in the electric drive effect producing means and the movable type effect producing means, the electric drive producing means and the movable type effect producing means are used. The game machine according to the means G-1 or G-2, characterized in that the effect time to be performed is adjustable.

According to the means G-3, even with the electric drive effect producing means and the mobile type effect producing means, the electric drive producing means and the mobile type effect producing are changed by changing the effect on the occasion. The means can reduce or eliminate the deviation from the timing of ending the specific period.

Means G-4. The rendering means is an electrical driving rendering means capable of executing an electrical driving rendering using an electrical driving accessory operated by the electrical driving means, and a mobile accessory capable of moving based on mechanical energy. At least one of the movable type effect production means capable of executing the movable type effect production using, and a display means,
The effect time performed by the display means is configured to be adjustable based on the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means, according to any one of the means G-1 to G-3. Amusement machine.

According to the means G-4, the time adjustment of the effect time is performed by interposing the electric drive effecting means and the display means capable of performing the adjustment relatively easily or more strictly than the moving accessory effect effecting means. , It is possible to more closely match the end timing of the specific period. Therefore, the operational effect of matching the end timing of the effect period with the end timing of the effect corresponding to the period is dramatically improved.

By interposing the effect by the display means after the effect by the electrically driven effect means and the movable accessory effect means, the electrically driven effect means, and , It becomes easy to return the movable type effect production means to the reference state. Also, by interposing the effect by the display means before the effect by the electrically driven effect means and the movable accessory effect means, the electrically driven effect means and the movement at the end of the last effect period. Even if the expression accessory production means cannot be returned to the standard state, it is possible to return it to the standard state while performing the production by the display means.

Means G-5. A plurality of the production means are provided, and the production corresponding to the period is performed by connecting the productions by the plurality of production means,
At least one of the electric drive effect producing means and the movable accessory producing means is used in the first effect in the period-corresponding effect, and in other order. There is a gaming machine according to the means G-3 or G-4.

According to the means G-5, more diverse and interesting effects can be performed by appropriately changing the order of the effects performed by the plurality of effecting means, changing the combination, and the like. On the other hand, when the rendering means used in the relatively last order of the previous period corresponding effect is used in the relatively first order of the next period corresponding effect, preparation of the effecting means cannot be completed in time. However, as in the above-mentioned means G-1, it is possible to eliminate such a concern by taking an appropriate countermeasure while grasping the remaining time of the period corresponding effect (effect period). it can.

Means G-6. A plurality of the production means are provided, and the production corresponding to the period is performed by connecting the productions by the plurality of production means,
At least one of the electric drive effect production means and the movable type effect production means is used in a final production performed in the period-corresponding production and in a sequence other than that. The gaming machine according to any one of the means G-3 to G-5.

According to the means G-6, more diverse and interesting effects can be performed by appropriately changing the order of effects performed by the plurality of effecting means, changing the combination, and the like. On the other hand, when the rendering means used in the relatively last order of the previous period corresponding effect is used in the relatively first order of the next period corresponding effect, preparation of the effecting means cannot be completed in time. However, as in the above-mentioned means G-1, it is possible to eliminate such a concern by taking an appropriate countermeasure while grasping the remaining time of the period corresponding effect (effect period). it can.

Means G-7. The electric drive effecting means for performing the effect corresponding to the period, and the reference state determination means capable of determining whether or not the movable accessory effect producing means is in a reference state,
Means for determining whether or not the electric drive effect means and the movable accessory effect effect means that are not in the reference state are present at least at the timing of ending the effect period. The gaming machine according to any one of G-3 to G-6.

According to the means G-7, it is possible that the electric drive effect means and the mobile accessory effect effect means that are not in the standard state at the timing of the end of the effect period cannot be used immediately (usually, the standard). To program the action from the state). Therefore, at the timing of the end of the effect period, it is confirmed whether or not there is an electrically driven effect means and a movable accessory effect means that are not in the standard state, and an appropriate countermeasure is executed. It is possible (at least, the predetermined effect means should be returned to the reference state when the predetermined effect means is used next time).

That is, for example, when the period corresponding effect is performed subsequent to the period corresponding effect, the electric drive effecting means and the mobile accessory effect effecting means which are not in the reference state are not used. Alternatively, the time until the start of use can be set as a time sufficient for returning to the reference state (a process of confirming the return may be performed). Further, for example, in the case where a situation in which the electric drive effecting means and the movable accessory effecting means are not used is derived subsequent to the effect corresponding to the period, the electrical state that is not the reference state It is also possible to continue only the work in which the drive effect means and the movable accessory effect effect means are set to the reference state (however, when the reference state determination means does not bring the reference state, the next period corresponding effect is It is desirable to consider the use timing/order of the electric drive effect producing means and the mobile type effect producing means which are not in the standard state when the operation is started).

Note that this means can be applied to a configuration without the remaining time grasping means of the means G-1. Further, corresponding to the means G-2, “a plurality of effect patterns are provided in each effect means, the time from performing the effect of the first effect pattern to reaching the reference state, and the second effect pattern. The time from when the effect is performed to the time when the reference state is achieved is different, and by the other effect means of the effect corresponding to the period when the first effect pattern is derived in the effect corresponding to the period. At least part of the effect pattern and the effect pattern of the other effect of the period corresponding effect when the second effect pattern is derived in the period corresponding effect" may be different. That is, for example, when it takes time to return the predetermined effect means to the reference state, the time (margin) to allow the predetermined effect means to return to the reference state within the effect period in anticipation thereof By setting the period-corresponding effect with "," it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect means cannot be returned to the reference state within the effect period. However, by having an electric drive effect production means and a pattern in which the movable type effect production means are driven even just before the end of the period corresponding production to produce an effect, it is possible to greatly enhance the effectivity and variety of effects.

Means G-8. Means G, characterized in that it comprises a preparation state storage means for storing information indicating whether or not the rendering means that is not in the reference state is stored based on the discrimination by the reference state discrimination means. A gaming machine described in -7.

According to the means G-8, it is possible to simplify the processing for determining the state of whether or not the electric drive effect producing means and the movable accessory producing means are in the reference state. In addition, for example, at the timing of the end of the effect period, although it is determined that there is an electric drive effecting means and a mobile type effect effecting means that are not in the standard state, after the effect corresponding to the period, electric Even if a situation is derived in which the dynamic drive effect production means and the mobile accessory production means are not used, the electric drive production means and the mobile accessory production effect means return to the reference state. Whether or not it can be continued. Therefore, when the performance corresponding to the next period is started during the monitoring period, the setting in consideration of the use timing and the order of the electric drive effect means which are not in the standard state and the movable accessory effect effect means should be ensured. It can be carried out.

Incidentally, any one of the means described as the means A (means PA), the means B (means PB), the means C, the means D, the means E (means PE), the means F, and the means G (means PG). It is also possible to combine them appropriately and embody them. Further, the "pseudo sphere" is one form of the "movable accessory", and the movable accessory production means is the first production means, the second production means, the connection production means, the instep production means, and the second party. This is one form of the rendering means, and it is possible to appropriately replace the above means.

The basic configuration of various game machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed example, "operation means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), launching means for launching and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching There is a "ball game machine" provided with a game area in which the game balls are guided and each of the ball entering means (general winning hole, variable winning device, operating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball-and-ball game machine having a game area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed mode example, "operation means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), launching means for launching and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching The game balls are guided, and a predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface or the like) extending substantially in the vertical direction, and each ball means arranged in the game area (general winning hole, Variable winning device, actuating port, etc.), and is configured so that the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine or the ball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a game machine similar to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a spinning-roller gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example of an aspect, “an identification information string (a symbol string; specifically, a reel with a symbol, a rotating body such as a belt) composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information (variable display) (specifically, a reel) The variable display means (specifically, the rotating body unit such as the reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation) is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The variation of the identification information (design) is started, the variation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop A spinning-roller type gaming machine configured to give a game value on condition that the information is specific identification information”.

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (particularly, a spinning machine using a ball of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a game medium). As a more detailed mode example, "variable display of an identification information sequence (design sequence; specifically, a reel with a design, a rotating body such as a belt) including a plurality of identification information (specifically, a reel) The variable display means (specifically, the rotating body unit such as the reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation of the The fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification is aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. A game value is provided on condition that the information is specific identification information, and further a ball saucer (upper plate, etc.) is provided to take in game balls from the ball saucer, and to the ball saucer. A gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a game ball, and the game start condition being satisfied by the game ball being taken in by the take-in means".

10... Pachinko machine, 32... Variable winning device, 33a... 1st starting winning device, 33b... 2nd starting winning device, 34... Through gate, 35... Variable display device unit, 42... Decorative symbol display device, 43a... 1st Special display device, 43b... Second special display device, 261... Main control device, 262... Sub control device.

Claims (1)

At a position visible from the player side, a first effect means for performing a first effect and a second effect means for effecting a second effect are provided,
Between the first effect production means and the second effect production means, there is provided a connection effect production means capable of executing a connection effect connecting the first effect and the second effect. ..

Images